1997 2001 Prelude Electrical Troubleshooting Manua

Menu
Circuit Index
Accessory power socket 155 Engine coolant Ignition system 20 Radiator fan 63
Active torque transfer temperature gauge 81 Immobilizer system 132 Rear side marker lights 110
system (ATTS) 35 Engine oil pressure Indicators 80 Rear window defogger 64
Air conditioner indicator light 72 Interlock system 138 Seat belt reminder 73
Air delivery 61 Entry light control system 115 License light 110 Seat heaters 147
Blower controls 60 Fog lights 110 Lights-on reminder 73 Security system
Compressor controls 62 Front parking lights 110 Low fuel indicator light 74 Canada 133
Fans 63 Front side marker lights 110 Mirror defoggers (Canada) 141 USA 133
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 44 Fuel gauge 81 Moonroof 122 Speedometer 81
A/T gear position indicator 89 Fuse/relay box Multiplex control system 50 Spotlights 115
Automatic transmission controls 39 Under-dash 6 Odometer 81 Starting system
Back-up lights Under-hood 6 Power distribution Early production ‘97 model 21
Automatic transmission 110 Gauges 81 From battery to ignition switch, All except early production
Manual transmission 110 Ground distribution 14 fuses, relays 10 ‘97 model 21
Brake lights 110 Ground-to-components index 6 From fuses to relays Stereo sound system 150
Brake system indicator light 71 Hazard warning lights 110 and components 10 Supplemental restraint
Ceiling light 115 Headlights Power door locks system (SRS) 47
Charging system 22 Canada 110 ’97-’98 models 130 Tachometer 81
Clock 154 USA 110 ’99-'01 models 130 Taillights 110
Condenser fan 63 Headlight switch 100 Power mirrors Trailer lighting connector 118
Console lights 114 Heater Canada 141 Trunk light 114
Courtesy lights 114 Air delivery 61 USA 141 Turn signal lights 110
Cruise control 34 Blower controls 60 Power windows 120 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) 33
Dash lights 114 Fans 63 Programmed fuel injection Wiper/washer 91
Daytime running lights 110 Horns 40 system (PGM-FI) 23
Ignition key reminder 73
2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu
1997-2001 Prelude Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
General Information Indexes
Safety Messages All Circuit Schematics
How to Read Schematics Fuse/Relay Information
Symbol Definitions Ground-to-Components
How to Troubleshoot In-Line Connector Views
Request for Correction Component Connector Views
How to Identify Terminal Numbers
Wire Harness Routing Index

Menu Circuit Index
Connector Identification and Wire Harness Routing Index

ABS Modulator Unit Wire Harness . . . . 203-6 Main Wire Harness
ATTS Sub-harness (Type SH) . . . . . . . . 203-25 (Engine compartment branch) . . . . . 203-6
Battery Ground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Passenger’s Door Wire Harness . . . . . 203-21
Dashboard Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-16 Shift Lock Solenoid
Driver’s Door Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . 203-20 Sub-harness (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-10
ECM Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-10 Spoiler Sub-harness (Type SH) . . . . . . 203-18
ECM Wire Harness SRS Main Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-23
(Engine compartment branch) . . . . . 203-9 Starter Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Engine Ground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Rear Window Defogger
Engine Wire Harness (With ATTS) . . . . . 203-2 Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-18
Engine Wire Harness (Without ATTS) . . 203-4 Rear Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-18
Heater Sub-harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-24 Right Engine Compartment
Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-8
Left Engine Compartment
Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-6 Right Side Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-15
Main Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-12 Roof Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203-22

Menu Circuit Index
Menu Circuit Index
Connector Views
Terminal Numbering System
The cavities (and wire terminals) in each connector are numbered starting from the upper left, looking
at the male terminals from the terminal side (or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both
views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same.) All actual cavities are numbered, even if
they have no wire terminals in them.
Wire Side Terminal Side

of of
Female Terminals Male Terminals
1 2 3
4 5 6
The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic.
The cavity/terminal shown below is #6.
Cavity/
Terminal 6
Male
Terminal
6 C103
Female
Terminal

Menu Circuit Index
▲
▼
Menu Circuit Index
Fuse/Relay Information
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Front View
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39
*49 48
31
51 50
37 36 35 34 33 32
38 RADIATOR FAN RELAY
* DIMMER RELAY
T1 T101 HEADLIGHT RELAY

* (Not Used) (To starter cable) (To engine wire harness)
Rear View
C252
(To main wire harness)
C255
(To main wire C251
harness) (To main wire harness)
C253
(To main wire
harness)
C254
(To main wire harness)

6
▲
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse
Number Fuse Name Amps Page Component or Circuit Protected
31 (ABS MOTOR) 30 10 ABS pump motor relay
32 BATTERY 100 10 Power distribution (Main fuse)
33 IG SW 50 10-1 Ignition switch (BAT)
34 REAR DEFROSTER 40 10-11 Rear window defogger
35 HEATER MOTOR 40 10-11 Blower controls
36 FUSE BOX 50 10 Power distribution
37 POWER WINDOW 40 10 Power distribution, Power windows, Moonroof
38 — — — Not Used
39 HAZARD 10 10-11 Turn signal/hazard warning lights
40 (ABS +B) 20 10-11 ABS fail-safe relay
41 STOP HORN 15 10-11 Horn relay, Brake lights, Ignition key light,
Interlock system
42 SMALL LIGHT 20 10-12 Parking lights, Taillights, Dash lights, Console lights
43 CLOCK RADIO 7.5 10-12 Automatic transmission controls, Stereo sound system,
Multiplex control system, Clock, PGM-FI, Moonroof,
Immobilizer system, Security system (Canada)
44 DOOR LOCK 10 10-13 Power door locks
45 CONDENSER FAN 20 10-13 Condenser fan relay, A/C compressor clutch relay
46 INTERIOR LIGHTS (*15) 10-13 Ceiling light, Trunk light, Accessory power socket relay,
10 Data link connector, Courtesy lights, Power door locks
(’99-’01 Models)
47 COOLING FAN 20 10-13 Radiator fan motor
48 (ABS UNIT) 7.5 44-3 ABS control unit
50 R HEAD LIGHT 20 100 Right headlight, Daytime running lights control unit
(Canada)
51 L HEAD LIGHT 20 100 Left headlight, High beam indicator light (USA),
Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
* = ‘97-‘98 Models

6-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
(#$*1#"+% -+$$'"0 )/
*)(,&$.
!

$ (& !$

$ &$%
)% %#&&

$
"# %#&&

$ #'$#
&)'

$ (#%,&
(&%!+ $*

$ $"#'$#
!' &)'
Y
D
D
Y Y

D
D D
SRS FUSE BLOCK
D: Spare fuse
*: Not used
**: Not used (’97-’98 Models)
Y: Canada
A: C981
B: C982
C: C983 To optional connector
D: C984
E2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

6-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –


6-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse
Number Fuse Name Amps Page Component or Circuit Protected
1 (ATTS UNIT) 10 10-2 ATTS fail-safe relay
2 STARTER SIGNAL 7.5 10-2 PGM-FI main relay, ECM, Starting system
4 ACG-S 10 10-2 PGM-FI main relay, Immobilizer control unit
5 (RR SPEAKER) 10 10-3 Stereo amplifier
6 (HEATED SEAT) 15 10-2 Seat heaters (Canada)
7 (SUN ROOF) 30 10-3 Moonroof
8 (DAY LIGHT) 7.5 10-3 Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
R/C MIRROR ABS system, Mirror defoggers (Canada), Power mirrors,

9 (ABS, ATTS) 7.5 10-4 Seat heaters (Canada), Blower motor relay,
Option connector C982, ATTS system
10 TAIL LIGHT 15 100-2 Console lights, Dash lights, Parking lights, Rear side
marker lights, Taillights, Security system (Canada)
REAR Rear window defogger relay
11 DEFROSTER 7.5 10-5
RELAY
12 (DAY LIGHT UNIT) 7.5 10-5 Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
METER Turn signal lights, Hazard warning lights, Back-up lights,
13 (CRUISE 15 10-7 Cruise control, Clock, Gauge assembly, Driver’s
CONTROL) multiplex control unit
ECU Charging system, Vehicle speed sensor (VSS), TCM,
14 EAT ECU 15 10-8 PGM-FI, Immobilizer system (early production ’97
Model), Interlock system, Gauge assembly, Security
system (Canada)
15 P/W DRIVER 20 120 Master power window switch/motor
16 P/W ASSISTANT 20 120 Passenger’s power window switch/motor
Windshield wiper motor, Windshield intermittent wiper
17 WIPER 30 10-6 relay, Windshield washer switch
18 ACC 7.5 10-3 Stereo sound system, Accessory power socket relay,
Interlock system
21 (ATTS) 7.5 10-6 ATTS control unit, ATTS fail-safe relay
22 — 10 10-6 Keyless receiver unit
23 (FUEL PUMP) 15 10-10 SRS unit
24 (SRS) 10 10-10 SRS unit

6-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Ground-to-Components Index
NOTE: All ground wires are BLK unless otherwise noted.

Ground Page Component or Circuit Grounded
G1 14 Battery, Transmission
G2 14 Cylinder head cover, Power steering pump bracket (2 wires)
G3 110-15 Fog lights
G101 14, 14-1 ATTS control unit (PG1 and PG2 are BLK; LG1 and LG2 are BRN/BLK), ATTS unit
(2 wires), Data link connector (DLC), Engine control module (ECM) (PG1 and PG2 are BLK;
LG1 and LG2 are BRN/BLK), PGM-FI main relay, Power steering pressure (PSP) switch,
Radiator fan switch, Shift control solenoid valves B & C, Transmission control module (TCM)
(PG1 is BLK; LG1 and LG2 are BRN/BLK), Vehicle speed sensor (VSS), Shielding between
the ECM and these components (all have BRN/BLK wires): CKP sensor, TDC sensor, CYP
sensor, Primary HO2S, Secondary HO2S, Knock sensor Shielding between the TCM and
these components (all have BRN/BLK wires): Mainshaft speed sensor, Countershaft speed
sensor
G201 14-2 Radiator fan motor, Right front parking light, Right front side marker light, Right front turn
signal light, Right headlight
G301 14-3 Brake fluid level switch, Condenser fan motor, Left headlight, Left front parking light, Left
front side marker light, Left front turn signal light, Windshield washer motor, Windshield
wiper intermittent relay, Windshield wiper motor
G302 14-3 ABS pump motor
G401 14-4, Accessory power socket, Accessory power socket relay, Blower motor relay, Ceiling light/
14-5 spotlights (2 wires), Clock, Clutch interlock switch, Clutch switch, Combination light switch,
Cruise control main switch, Cruise control unit, Door multiplex control unit, Driver’s door
key cylinder switch, Driver’s door lock switch, Driver’s multiplex control unit, Driver’s seat
heater switch, Driver’s window motor, Electrical load detector (ELD) unit, Gauge assembly
(3 wires), Ignition key switch, Immobilizer control unit, Left horn (BLU/RED wire), Moonroof
close relay, Moonroof open relay, Moonroof switch, Passenger’s multiplex control unit,
Power mirror switch, Power window relay, Right horn (BLU/RED wire), Turn signal hazard
relay, Windshield wiper/washer switch...plus everything grounded through G402
G402 14-6 ABS fail-safe relay, Daytime running lights control unit, Dimmer relay, Door multiplex control
unit (2 wires), Driver’s door lock assembly, Driver’s multiplex control unit, Left power mirror,
Multiplex control inspection connector, Passenger’s door key cylinder switch, Passenger’s
door lock switch, Passenger’s multiplex control unit (2 wires), Passenger’s seat heater
switch, Right power mirror, Seat heater relay...plus everything grounded through G401
G403 14-7 ABS control unit (2 wires)
G404 14-7 ABS control unit (2 wires)
G471 14-7 A/T gear position switch, Ashtray light, Cruise control actuator, Data link connector (DLC),
Evaporative emission (EVAP) purge flow switch, Mode switch, Parking pin switch, Shift lock relay
G501 14-8 Driver’s seat belt switch, Driver’s seat heater, Fuel pump, Fuel tank unit, High mount brake
light, Passenger’s seat heater, Stereo amplifier, and shield WHT and ORN wires from Stereo
amplifier to Left rear microphone
G551 14-8 Audio unit
G601 14-9 High mount brake light, Left/right back-up light, Left/right brake light/taillight, Left/right rear
side marker light, Left/right rear turn signal light, Left/right taillight, License plate light, Trailer
lighting connector, Trunk latch switch
G801 14-8 SRS unit (2 GRY or GRN wires)
G901 14-9 Heater control panel, Heater fan switch

6-5
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Distribution
From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays
UNDER-HOOD
T1 FUSE/RELAY BOX
PHOTO 6 PHOTO 5
FUSE 32 FUSE 31 FUSE 38 FUSE 39 FUSE 40 FUSE 41 FUSE 49

BATTERY (ABS MOTOR) (NOT USED) HAZARD ABS STOP (NOT USED)
100A 30A 10A +B HORN
20A 15A
ABS PUMP
ELECTRICAL Contact MOTOR
LOAD RELAY
DETECTOR Page 44-3
(ELD) UNIT
PHOTO 6
Page 22
PHOTO 7
4 C251
T101 (Not (Not
PHOTO 6 Used) Used)
BLK See Power Distribution,
T102 page 10-11.
PHOTO 37
ALTERNATOR
Page 22
PHOTO 37 * = ’97-’98 Models
FUSE 34 FUSE 35 FUSE 42 FUSE 43 FUSE 44 FUSE 45 FUSE 46 FUSE 47

REAR HEATER SMALL CLOCK DOOR CONDENSER INTERIOR COOLING
DEFROSTER MOTOR LIGHT RADIO LOCK FAN LIGHTS FAN
To A on 40A 40A 20A 7.5A 10A 20A (*15A) 20A
facing page. 10A
BLK
See Power Distribution, See Power Distribution,

page 10-11. pages 10-12 and 10-13.
FUSE 36 FUSE 37 HEADLIGHT

FUSE BOX POWER RELAY
50A WINDOW Pages 100,
40A
110, and 110-2
PHOTO 6
BLK 1 2 C254
STARTER PHOTO 7
PHOTO 36 VIEW 20
T2
PHOTO 36
WHT/ WHT/BLU
STARTER RED
SOLENOID
Pages 21
and 21-1 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
3 C435 BOX
1 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51
FUSE 3 FUSE 1 FUSE 4 FUSE 6 FUSE 5 FUSE 7 FUSE 8

(NOT (ATTS ACG–S (HEATED (RR (SUN (DAY
USED) UNIT) 10A SEAT) SPEAKER) ROOF) LIGHT) POWER
+ BATTERY 10A 15A 10A 30A 7.5A WINDOW
TRANS- RELAY
MISSION Pages
120 and
122-1
PHOTO 54
– 6 C432
BLK T3 C981 (Not

BLK PHOTO OPTION Used) See Power Distribution, See Power Distribution,
G1 31 CONN- page 10-2. page 10-3.
PHOTO 11 ECTOR
PHOTO 52
10
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Power Distribution
From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays
From A on UNDER-HOOD
facing page. FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 5
FUSE 33
IG SW
50A
1 C253
WHT PHOTO 7
3 C411
WHT PHOTO 60
3 A
STEERING
IGNITION LOCK
SWITCH PHOTO 62
0 = Lock VIEW 78
(0) (III) (0) (III) (0) (III) (0) (III) I = Acc
II = On
(I) (II) (I) (II) (I) (II) (I) (II) III = Start
4 5 6 1 A
BLK/WHT
1 C411
WHT/RED PHOTO 60
Early
Production WHT/
All except Early
RED
‘97 Model Production ‘97 Model
WHT/RED WHT/RED
4 3
STARTER
Coil CUT RELAY
YEL WHT/BLK BLK/YEL WHT/RED Pages 21
and 21-1
PHOTO 61
1
BLK/WHT BLK/WHT See
Starting
System
BLK/WHT
2 1 C976 SRS FUSE BLOCK

4 PHOTO 51 PHOTO 51
UNDER- FUSE 23 FUSE 24

DASH (FUEL (SRS)
FUSE/ PUMP) 10A
RELAY 15A
BOX 4 2 1 5 C974
PHOTO 51
See Power
FUSE 9 FUSE 11 FUSE 12 FUSE 18 FUSE 13 FUSE 17 FUSE FUSE Distribution, C433
R/C REAR (DAY LIGHT ACC METER WIPER page 10-10. PHOTO 57
14 19 18 VIEW 69
MIRROR DEFROST- UNIT) 7.5A (CRUISE 30A
(ABS, ER 7.5A CONTROL) ECU (NOT
ATTS) RELAY 15A EAT ECU USED)
7.5A 7.5A 15A FUSE 2
STARTER
SIGNAL
7.5A
See Power See Power See Power See Power See Power See Power
Distribution, Distribution, Distribution, Distribution, Distribution, Distribution,
pages 10-4 page 10-3. pages 10-6 page 10-8. page 10-10. page 10-2.
and 10-5. and 10-7.

10-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Distribution
From Fuses to Relays and Components
HOT IN START HOT WITH ENGINE CRANKING
Early Production All except Early

‘97 Model Production ‘97 Model HOT AT ALL TIMES
FUSE 2 FUSE 4 FUSE 1 FUSE 6

STARTER ACG-S (ATTS UNIT) (HEATED
SIGNAL 10A 10A SEAT)
7.5A 15A
3 C551 19 C433 5 10 C432 2 C431

PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57
VIEW 54 VIEW 69 VIEW 49 VIEW 48
BLU/RED BLU/RED WHT/GRN WHT/ WHT/

BLU BLK
2 C482
PHOTO 71
VIEW 34
BLU/RED BLU/ BLU/ WHT/ WHT/

RED RED GRN GRN
6 C 4 2 7 1 A 2 2
Coil Coil Contact Contact Contact
ENGINE STARTER PGM-FI MAIN IMMOBILIZER ATTS SEAT

CONTROL CUT RELAY CONTROL FAIL-SAFE HEATER
MODULE RELAY Pages 23 UNIT RELAY RELAY
(ECM) Page 21 and 23-1 Page 132 Page 35 Page 147
Page 23-1 PHOTO 61 PHOTO 59 PHOTO 61 PHOTO 53
PHOTO 80 VIEW 22 VIEW 76
VIEW 85
Early
Production Type SH Canada
‘97 Model

10-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Power Distribution
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ACC OR ON
UNDER-
DASH
FUSE/
FUSE 5 FUSE 7 FUSE 8 RELAY
BOX
(RR SPEAKER) (SUN ROOF) (DAY LIGHT) FUSE 18 PHOTO 51
10A 30A 7.5A ACC
7.5A
Contact Contact
MOONROOF MOONROOF
CLOSE RELAY OPEN RELAY
Page 122-1 Page 122-1
PHOTO 54 PHOTO 54
11 C431 3 C433 C984

4 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 OPTION
VIEW 48 VIEW 69 CONNECTOR
PHOTO 52
WHT/GRN RED/BLU YEL/RED
5
8) C461 (*3)
(Canada,) PHOTO 83
Type SH 4) VIEW 26 Coil
YEL/RED
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET 11 C453
RELAY PHOTO 76
Pages 150 VIEW 2
and 155
PHOTO 53 YEL/RED
WHT/GRN
1 C485
PHOTO 85
YEL/RED
4 2 1
STEREO DAYTIME SHIFT LOCK

AMPLIFIER RUNNING SOLENOID
Page 150-1 LIGHTS Page 138-1
PHOTO 105 CONTROL * = ’97-’98 Models PHOTO 86
VIEW 58 UNIT
Page 110-4
VIEW 52 A/T
Canada

10-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Distribution
HOT IN ON
FUSE 9
R/C MIRROR
(ABS, ATTS)
7.5A
Coil
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
Page 60
PHOTO 54
1 C434
1 C438 3 C437 8 C432 (Not C982
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 Used) OPTION
VIEW 25 VIEW 49 CONNECTOR
YEL/BLK PHOTO 52
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK YEL/
BLK
YEL/BLK
C456 21 C453
PHOTO 76
(Terminals VIEW 2
11-13)
PHOTO 82
VIEW 64 8 C430
PHOTO 97
VIEW 73
YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK YEL/
BLK
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
5)
11 B 24 A (* 3) 2 B 9 A
Coil
ABS ATTS SEAT POWER MIRROR

CONTROL CONTROL HEATER SWITCH
UNIT UNIT RELAY Pages 141 and 141-1
Page 44 Page 35 Page 147 VIEW 77
PHOTO 83 PHOTO 80
VIEW 79 VIEW 82
Type SH Canada * = ‘97-‘98 Models

10-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Power Distribution
UNDER-
DASH
FUSE/
FUSE 11 FUSE 12 RELAY
(DAY LIGHT
REAR DEFROSTER RELAY UNIT) BOX
7.5A 7.5A PHOTO 51
Coil
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
Page 64
PHOTO 54 1 C433
(Not Used) 12 C433
PHOTO 57
VIEW 69
YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK
4 C403
PHOTO 65
VIEW 60
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL
10 C302 8 3 C569
11 PHOTO 55 PHOTO 71
VIEW 47 VIEW 28
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
YEL/WHT YEL/BLK
C252
PHOTO 7
4 VIEW 29
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
2 2 8 5 3 12
Coil
Coil Coil
RADIATOR
FAN CONDENSER A/C HEATER RECIRCU- A/C DAYTIME
RELAY FAN RELAY COMPRESSOR CONTROL LATION THERMO- RUNNING
Page 63 Page 63 CLUTCH PANEL CONTROL STAT LIGHTS
PHOTO 6 PHOTO 15 RELAY Pages 61, MOTOR Pages CONTROL
Page 62 62-1, 63-1 Page 61 62-1 and UNIT
UNDER-HOOD PHOTO 15 and 64 PHOTO 73 63-1 Page 110-4
FUSE/RELAY BOX VIEW 71 PHOTO 78 VIEW 52
PHOTO 5
Canada

10-5
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Distribution
HOT IN ON OR START
FUSE 17
WIPER
30A
17 C434
2 C435 (Not 5 C436 16 C980
PHOTO 57 Used) PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51
VIEW 67
BLK/YEL
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
AUXILIARY
FUSE
FUSE 22 FUSE 21 HOLDER
(ATTS) PHOTO 132
10A
7.5A
7 A
YEL/RED 6 C303
PHOTO 55
VIEW 21
BLK/YEL YEL/GRN
WINDSHIELD
YEL/RED WIPER/
WASHER
10 C402 SWITCH
PHOTO 65 Page 91-1
1 C139 VIEW 53 VIEW 75
PHOTO 9 YEL/RED YEL/RED GRN/BLK
5 C482
1) C461 PHOTO 71
(Type SH and) PHOTO 83 VIEW 34
VIEW 26 YEL/RED
Canada 12)
BLK/YEL YEL/GRN
YEL/RED YEL/RED GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
1 3 5 12 A 1 B 4 3
IGNITION KEYLESS ATTS ATTS WINDSHIELD WINDSHIELD

COIL RECEIVER FAIL-SAFE CONTROL WIPER WIPER
Page 20-1 UNIT RELAY UNIT MOTOR INTERMITTENT
PHOTO 23 Page 130-3 Page 35 Page 35 Page 91-1 RELAY
PHOTO 129 PHOTO 53 PHOTO 80 PHOTO 19 Page 91
VIEW 86 VIEW 82 PHOTO 20
VIEW 19
Type SH
10-6
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Power Distribution
UNDER-
DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/
METER RELAY
(CRUISE CONTROL) BOX
15A PHOTO 51
13 A
DRIVER’S MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
Page 50
PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
3 C431 4 C551 1 C432 5 C980

VIEW 48 VIEW 54 VIEW 49 GRN/RED VIEW 67
YEL
2
TURN SIGNAL
LIGHT DIODE
YEL YEL PHOTO 52
YEL 1
5) RED
(B
2 (* 3) 7 (D in S/M) 13
Contact Coil
Turn
Signal
Switch
A/T REVERSE PASSENGER’S
RELAY MULTIPLEX
Page 110-8 CONTROL
PHOTO 53 UNIT COMBINATION
Page 50-2 LIGHT SWITCH
A/T Page 110-6
PHOTO 83
VIEW 80 VIEW 50
* = ‘97-‘98 Models
** = Type SH and C559
all ’99-’01 Models (Terminals 7-10)
YEL PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
YEL 10) C482
(** 11) PHOTO 71
VIEW 34
A/T Canada YEL YEL

YEL
1 C143
PHOTO 8
VIEW 24
YEL
YEL YEL YEL YEL
C126
PHOTO 26
4 3 YEL
9 D 9 C 2 4
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CLOCK BACK-UP CRUISE

Pages 80, 80-1, 80-2, 81, and 89 Page 154 LIGHT CONTROL
PHOTO 66 SWITCH MAIN
VIEW 84 Page 110-9 SWITCH
PHOTO 26 Page 34
VIEW 9
M/T

10-7
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Distribution
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 14 FUSE/RELAY
ECU BOX
EAT ECU PHOTO 51
15A
8 C551 7 C432
PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57
VIEW 54 BLK/YEL VIEW 49
BLK/YEL
C456
(Terminals 4-6)
PHOTO 82
VIEW 64
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/ BLK/

YEL YEL
2 C302
PHOTO 55
VIEW 47
BLK/YEL
2 C311
PHOTO 18
RED
9 B 3 2 4 A 12
GAUGE ELECTRICAL INTAKE EXHAUST GAS IMMOBILIZER SECURITY

ASSEMBLY LOAD CONTROL RECIRCULATION CONTROL CONTROL
Page 80 DETECTOR SOLENOID (EGR) CONTROL UNIT UNIT
PHOTO 66 (ELD) UNIT VALVE SOLENOID Page 132-1 Page 133
VIEW 84 Page 22 Page 23-6 VALVE PHOTO 61 VIEW 40
PHOTO 7 PHOTO 29 Page 23-6 VIEW 76
PHOTO 18
Early
UNDER-HOOD Production Canada
FUSE/RELAY BOX ’97 Model
PHOTO 5

10-8
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Power Distribution
BLK/YEL
10 C454
PHOTO 76
BLK/YEL VIEW 63
C479
(Terminals
17-20)
PHOTO 77
BLK/ BLK/ BLK/ BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL VIEW 65
YEL YEL YEL
4 C294 1)
PHOTO 49
WHT (*2)
1 6
EVAPORATIVE SHIFT SECONDARY 3 C144 EVAPORATIVE

PHOTO 8
EMISSION LOCK HEATED VIEW 45 EMISSION (EVAP)
(EVAP) RELAY OXYGEN PURGE CONTROL
BYPASS Page 138-1 SENSOR SOLENOID
SOLENOID PHOTO 85 (HO2S) BLK/ VALVE
VALVE VIEW 15 Page 23-7 YEL Page 23-6
Page 23-6 PHOTO 50 PHOTO 5
PHOTO 119
C117
(Terminals
BLK/ BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
1-7)
YEL PHOTO 43
PHOTO 125
(Type SH)
VIEW 42
Type SH All except
Type SH
BLK/ BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
YEL
4 C118
1 12 25 PHOTO 43 1 2 1
A
WHT
C293 (Type SH)
PHOTO 49
EVAPORATIVE TRANSMISSION ALTER- VEHICLE INTAKE AIR

EMISSION CONTROL NATOR SPEED BYPASS (IAB)
(EVAP) CONTROL MODULE (TCM) PRIMARY Page 22 SENSOR CONTROL
CANISTER VENT Page 39-1 HEATED PHOTO 37 (VSS) SOLENOID
SHUT VALVE PHOTO 80 OXYGEN Page 33 VALVE
Page 23-6 VIEW 83 SENSOR PHOTO 22 Page 23-7
PHOTO 120 (*) (HO2S) PHOTO 44
PHOTO 130 Page 23-7 * = ’97 (California)-’98 models PHOTO 124 (Type SH)
PHOTO 48
‘97 Model: California A/T
‘98-’01 Models: All

10-9
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Distribution
HOT IN ON OR START
SRS
FUSE
BLOCK
FUSE 23 FUSE 24 PHOTO 51
(FUEL (SRS)
PUMP) 10A
15A
5
1 C974
UNDER- 1 C801
2 PHOTO 51
DASH
FUSE 19 FUSE/
(NOT USED) RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 51
2 C437 2 C438 13 C551 8 9 C433

7 C433 (Not (Not (Not (Not (Not
PHOTO 57 Used) Used) Used) Used) Used)
VIEW 69
GRY GRY
or or
GRN GRN
RED/
ORN
5 3
7
PGM-FI SRS UNIT

MAIN Page 47
RELAY PHOTO 70
Page 23 VIEW 57
PHOTO 59
VIEW 22

10-10
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Power Distribution
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-
HOOD
FUSE/
FUSE 39 FUSE 40 FUSE 41 FUSE 34 FUSE 35 RELAY
HAZARD ABS STOP HORN REAR HEATER BOX
10A 15A DEFROSTER MOTOR PHOTO 5
+B
40A 40A
20A
2 C252 7 C251 2 C253

PHOTO 7 10 PHOTO 7 3 PHOTO 7
VIEW 29 VIEW 38
WHT/ WHT/GRN WHT/YEL WHT/GRN WHT/BLK

GRN
C437
PHOTO 57
8 VIEW 25
UNDER-
DASH
3 FUSE/
RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 51
TURN
SIGNAL/
HAZARD
RELAY
Page
110-6
PHOTO 53
VIEW 17
5 C434
PHOTO 57
VIEW 62
WHT/
GRN
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL WHT/ WHT/YEL
YEL
13 C402
PHOTO 65
VIEW 53 5 C410
PHOTO 60
WHT/YEL VIEW 1
WHT/
2 C436
GRN 7 B 1 PHOTO 57
5)
5 2 4 (*3) 2
Contact Coil Contact Contact Contact
HAZARD ABS BRAKE HORN REAR BLOWER

WARNING FAIL- SWITCH RELAY Key WINDOW MOTOR
SWITCH SAFE Pages Page 40 Ignition Interlock DEFOGGER RELAY
Page 110-6 RELAY 23-9, PHOTO 53
Key Switch RELAY Page 60
VIEW 12 Page 44-2 34-1, 39, Light Page 64 PHOTO 54
PHOTO 53 44, 110-12, PHOTO 54
110-13,
and 138 STEERING LOCK
PHOTO 64 UNDER-DASH
Pages 50-1, FUSE/RELAY BOX
115, and 138 PHOTO 51
* = ’97-’98 Models PHOTO 62
VIEW 78
10-11
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Distribution
HOT AT ALL TIMES
FUSE 42 FUSE 43
SMALL CLOCK
LIGHT RADIO
20A 7.5A
2 C251 4 C254
PHOTO 7 PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 WHT/YEL VIEW 20
UNDER-DASH
WHT/YEL C431 FUSE/RELAY
WHT/YEL PHOTO 57 BOX
6 VIEW 48 PHOTO 51
RED/ (A
GRN 9 (E in S/M)
3 A
PASSENGER’S
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT DRIVER’S
Page 50-2 MULTIPLEX
PHOTO 83 CONTROL UNIT
VIEW 80 Page 50
WHT/YEL PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
19 C434 5 C431
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57
VIEW 62 VIEW 48
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL
C456 5 C454
(Terminals 7-10) PHOTO 76
PHOTO 82 WHT/YEL VIEW 63
RED/ RED/ WHT/YEL VIEW 64
GRN GRN
WHT/
YEL WHT/YEL
WHT/ 3 C402
YEL PHOTO 65 WHT/YEL WHT/
WHT/YEL VIEW 53 YEL
4 C430
PHOTO 97
VIEW 73
5 C408 WHT/YEL
PHOTO WHT/
60 YEL WHT/YEL WHT/YEL 7 C569 23 A
RED/ PHOTO 71
GRN WHT/YEL 10) WHT/YEL
(F in VIEW 28
4 4 5 16 (S/M) 10 A 1 (* 4) 20 10 C
TRANS-
MISSION
CONTROL
COMBI- SECURITY DOOR GAUGE CLOCK AUDIO HEATER ENGINE MODULE
NATION CONTROL MULTIPLEX ASSEMBLY Page 154 UNIT CONTROL CONTROL (TCM)
LIGHT UNIT CONTROL Page 132 Page 150 PANEL MODULE Page 39
SWITCH Page 133 UNIT PHOTO 66 VIEW 55 Pages (ECM) PHOTO 80
Pages VIEW 40 Pages VIEW 84 61, 62-1, Page 23 VIEW 83
100-1 and 50-3, 120-1, and 63-1 PHOTO 80
110-10 and 130-4 VIEW 71 VIEW 85
Canada * = ‘97-‘98 models
VIEW 50 PHOTO 94 A/T
VIEW 68

10-12
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Power Distribution
UNDER-
HOOD
FUSE 44 FUSE 45 FUSE 46 FUSE 47 FUSE/
DOOR CONDENSER INTERIOR COOLING RELAY
LOCK FAN LIGHTS FAN
20A BOX
10A 20A (*15A) PHOTO 5
10A
Contact
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
Page 63
PHOTO 6
5 C254 1 6 C251
PHOTO 7 PHOTO 7
VIEW 20 VIEW 38
WHT WHT WHT/BLU
13 C302
PHOTO 55
WHT VIEW 47
C306 C456
(Terminals (Terminals
11-13) WHT/BLU WHT/BLU 1-3)
PHOTO 58 PHOTO 82
WHT WHT VIEW 59 WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
VIEW 64
C406
1 WHT/BLU (Terminals
3-4)
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU PHOTO 59
VIEW 61
19 C454
PHOTO 76 10 C430 2 C464
VIEW 63 PHOTO 77 PHOTO 97
CONDENSER VIEW 73 VIEW 74
FAN RELAY WHT/BLU
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
Page 63
PHOTO 15 1 2 2
’99-’01
Models
A/C DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S

WHT WHT WHT
COMPRESSOR DOOR DOOR
CLUTCH COURTESY COURTESY
2 RELAY LIGHT LIGHT
Contact Page 62 Page 114 Page 114
PHOTO 15
8 3 C463 3 C462
PHOTO 75 PHOTO 83
DATA LINK VIEW 3 VIEW 70
DOOR CONNECTOR
LOCK (DLC)
RELAY Pages 23-8, WHT/BLU 2
Page 130-2 35-2, and 39-4 Contact
PHOTO 130 PHOTO 72
VIEW 56
3 2 C WHT/BLU WHT/BLU WHT/BLU ACCESSORY

POWER
SOCKET
RELAY
Pages 150
1 C702 and 155
PHOTO 101 PHOTO 53
DRIVER’S RED
MULTIPLEX 1 8
CONTROL
UNIT
Page 50-1
PHOTO 58
* = ‘97-‘98 models
VIEW 81
CEILING TRUNK KEYLESS
UNDER-DASH LIGHT/ LIGHT RECEIVER UNIT
FUSE/RELAY SPOTLIGHTS Page 114 Page 130-3
BOX Page 115 PHOTO 129
PHOTO 51 VIEW 86

10-13
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Ground Distribution
G1, G2, and G101
NOTE: Wires shown without color codes are black.
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
Page 23
PHOTO 59
BATTERY TRANSMISSION VIEW 22
T3
PHOTO 31
3 10 A
23
16 C454
PHOTO 76 Type SH
VIEW 63
ATTS UNIT ATTS
Page 35-5 CONTROL
POWER UNIT
CYLINDER STEERING Type SH, A/T LEFT Page 35
HEAD PUMP SOLENOID RIGHT PHOTO 80
COVER BRACKET From A on PHOTO 122 SOLENOID VIEW 82
facing page.
T4 T5 1 1 21 B
PHOTO 18 PHOTO 18
5 9 C146
PHOTO
123
VIEW 87
4 C141
6 PHOTO 8
VIEW 43
11 10 C144
PHOTO 8
POWER VIEW 45
STEERING A/T
PRESSURE
(PSP) SHIFT SHIFT VEHICLE
SWITCH RADIATOR CONTROL CONTROL SPEED
Page 23-9 FAN SOLENOID SOLENOID SENSOR
SWITCH VALVE B VALVE C (VSS)
PHOTO 43
PHOTO 121 Page 63 Page 39 Page 39 Page 33
(Type SH) PHOTO 23 PHOTO 32 PHOTO 32 PHOTO 22
2 1 1 1 1
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
G1 G2 G101
PHOTO 11 PHOTO 18 PHOTO 21
14
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Ground Distribution
Type SH, A/T

ENGINE ATTS CONTROL UNIT (M/T) or
CONTROL TRANSMISSION CONTROL
MODULE (ECM) MODULE (TCM) (A/T) CKP/TDC/CYP PRIMARY SECONDARY
Pages 23-2 Pages 35 and 39-1 SENSOR HO2S HO2S
and 23-3 PHOTO 80 SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
PHOTO 80 VIEW 83 Page 23-2 Page 23-7 Page 23-7
VIEW 85 VIEW 82 (Type SH)
22 9 A (M/T 25) 14 A (M/T 12) (B M/T)

13) 26) (A
BRN/ BRN/BLK
BLK BRN/BLK BRN/BLK BRN/BLK BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
To A on
facing page.
A/T
BRN/BLK DATA LINK MAIN
4 C142 CONNECTOR SHAFT/
PHOTO 8 (DLC) COUNTER-
VTEC
VIEW 44 Pages KNOCK SHAFT
PRESSURE
CKP/ 23-8, 35-2, SENSOR SENSOR
SWITCH
CYP TDC and 39-4 SHIELD SHIELD
Page 23-9
SENSOR SENSOR PHOTO 72 Page 23-9 Page 39-1
PHOTO 21 VIEW 56
SHIELD SHIELD
Page 23-2 Page 23-2 13
BRN/ BRN/BLK BRN/ BRN/BLK BRN/BLK

BLK BLK
BRAIDED BRAIDED
WIRE WIRE
C479
Terminals
1-6)
PHOTO 77
BRN/BLK VIEW 65
All except
Type SH
COUNTER- MAIN
SHAFT SHAFT
4) C143 SPEED SPEED
PRIMARY KNOCK (A/T 12) PHOTO 8
HO2S SENSOR VIEW 24 SENSOR SENSOR
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
Page 23-7 Page 23-9 Page 39-1 Page 39-1
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
BRAIDED BRAIDED BRAIDED BRAIDED

WIRE WIRE WIRE WIRE
BRN/BLK

14-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Ground Distribution
G201
RADIATOR
RIGHT FRONT FAN RIGHT RIGHT FRONT RIGHT FRONT
SIDE MARKER MOTOR HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL PARKING
LIGHT Page 63 Pages 110 LIGHT LIGHT
Page 110-10 PHOTO 12 and 110-2 Page 110-7 Page 110-10
LOW
1 1 1
2 A
1 C207
PHOTO 13
G201
PHOTO 10

14-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Ground Distribution
G301 and G302
BRAKE
CONDENSER FLUID ABS
LEFT FRONT FAN LEFT LEFT FRONT LEFT FRONT LEVEL PUMP
SIDE MARKER MOTOR HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL PARKING SWITCH MOTOR
LIGHT Page 63 Pages 110 LIGHT LIGHT Page 71 Page 44-3
Page 110-10 PHOTO 12 and 110-2 Page 110-7 Page 110-10 PHOTO 20 PHOTO 17
LOW
1 1 1
2 A 2
1 C323 C310
PHOTO 38 PHOTO 20
C306
(Terminals
1-10)
PHOTO 58
VIEW 59
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
WINDSHIELD WINDSHIELD INTERMITTENT
WASHER WIPER RELAY
MOTOR MOTOR Page 91
Page 91-1 Page 91-1 PHOTO 20
PHOTO 4 PHOTO 19 VIEW 19
2 3 1
G301 G302
PHOTO 16 PHOTO 16

14-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Ground Distribution
G401
Canada
DOOR PASSENGER’S
DRIVER’S POWER DRIVER’S MULTIPLEX MULTIPLEX IMMOBILIZER
DOOR DRIVER’S MIRROR SEAT CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
KEY DOOR SWITCH HEATER DRIVER’S UNIT UNIT UNIT
CYLINDER LOCK Pages 141 SWITCH WINDOW Page 50-3 Page 50-2 Page 132-1
SWITCH SWITCH and 141-1 Page 147 MOTOR PHOTO 94 PHOTO 83 PHOTO 61
Page 130-4 Page 130-4 VIEW 77 VIEW 11 Page 120-1 VIEW 68 VIEW 80 VIEW 76
2 10 A 3 14 (F in S/M) 20 (A 8 A
(E in S/M)
2 C656 4 C653
PHOTO 95 PHOTO 96
22 C430
PHOTO 97
VIEW 73
STEERING
UNDER-HOOD LOCK
FUSE/RELAY Page 73
M/T BOX PHOTO 62
PHOTO 5 VIEW 78
CLUTCH
INTER-
CRUISE LOCK ELECTRICAL
CONTROL SWITCH LOAD
LEFT RIGHT UNIT Pages DETECTOR CEILING
HORN HORN Page 34-2 21, 21-1, (ELD) UNIT Ignition LIGHT/
Page 40 Page 40 PHOTO 68 and 132-1 Page 22 Key SPOTLIGHTS
PHOTO 3 PHOTO 1 VIEW 51 PHOTO 64 PHOTO 7 Switch Page 115
1 1 3 1 1
BLU/RED BLU/RED 4 B
9 BLU/WHT 3 C702
8 C201 PHOTO 101
PHOTO 75
VIEW 39 6 C410
PHOTO 60
VIEW 1
6 C463
PHOTO 75
VIEW 3
To G402
on page 14-6.
G401
PHOTO 56
14-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Ground Distribution
G401
ACCESSORY
CRUISE POWER
CONTROL SOCKET
MAIN MOON- ACCESSORY RELAY
GAUGE ASSEMBLY SWITCH
Pages 80-2, 81-1, and 89 ROOF POWER Pages 150
CLOCK PHOTO 66 Page 34 SWITCH SOCKET and 155
Page 154 VIEW 84 VIEW 9 Page 122-1 Page 155 PHOTO 53
Coil
4 15 D 4 A 8 B 1 4 B (*5)
3)
A/T * = ’97-’98 Models
C559
(Terminals 11-16)
PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
Canada M/T
WINDSHIELD
WIPER/ COMBINATION SECURITY
WASHER LIGHT CONTROL CLUTCH
SWITCH SWITCH UNIT SWITCH
Page 91-1 Page 100-1 Page 133 Page 34-2
VIEW 75 VIEW 50 VIEW 40 PHOTO 64
8 A 9 6 3
UNDER-
DASH
FUSE/
C980 C551 C432 C433 C434 RELAY
PHOTO 51 PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 (Not BOX
17 VIEW 67 10 VIEW 54 2 VIEW 49 10 VIEW 69 4 VIEW 62 Used) PHOTO 51
21 C433
TURN DRIVER’S
SIGNAL/ POWER MULTIPLEX
MOONROOF MOONROOF BLOWER HAZARD WINDOW CONTROL
CLOSE OPEN MOTOR RELAY RELAY UNIT
RELAY RELAY RELAY Page 110-6 Pages 120 Page 50
Page 122-1 Page 122-1 Page 60 PHOTO 53 and 122-1 PHOTO 58
PHOTO 54 PHOTO 54 PHOTO 54 VIEW 17 PHOTO 54 VIEW 81
Con- Con-
tacts tacts Coil Coil Coil
4 7 A
16 C433
PHOTO 57
VIEW 69

14-5
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Ground Distribution
G402
DOOR Canada
MULTIPLEX PASSEN-
CONTROL GER’S PASSENGER’S ABS
UNIT DRIVER’S SEAT DOOR PASSENGER’S FAIL-
Pages 50-3 DOOR LEFT RIGHT HEATER KEY DOOR SAFE
and 120-1 LOCK POWER POWER SWITCH CYLINDER LOCK RELAY
PHOTO 94 ASSEMBLY MIRROR MIRROR Page 147-1 SWITCH SWITCH Page 44-2
VIEW 68 Page 130-4 Page 141-1 Page 141-1 VIEW 14 Page 130-3 Page 130-3 PHOTO 53
1 12 (F in S/M) 3 2 (* 5)
3)
3 C654 2 C657 2 C687 2 C686
VIEW 6 VIEW 7 VIEW 8
21 C430 18 C464
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97
VIEW 73 VIEW 74
UNDER-DASH MULTIPLEX
FUSE/RELAY CONTROL PASSENGER’S
BOX UNDER-HOOD UNIT MULTIPLEX
PHOTO 51 FUSE/RELAY INSPECTION CONTROL UNIT
BOX CONNECTOR Page 50-2
DAYTIME PHOTO 5 Page 50-1 PHOTO 83
DRIVER’S PHOTO 59 VIEW 80
MULTIPLEX RUNNING
CONTROL LIGHTS DIMMER 1
UNIT CONTROL SEAT RELAY
Page 50-1 UNIT HEATER Pages 110-1
PHOTO 58 Page 110-4 RELAY and 110-3
VIEW 81 VIEW 52 Page 147 PHOTO 6
14 (A
19 (E in
A/T (S/M)
Contact
4 C 4 (* 5)
3) ’99-’01
7 C254 Models
PHOTO 7
VIEW 20 DOOR LOCK
RELAY
Page 130-2
PHOTO 53
From
G401 Contact Coil
on page
14-4. 4 3
* = ‘97-‘98 models G402

PHOTO 84

14-6
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Ground Distribution
G403, G404, and G471
NOTE: Wires shown without color codes are black. *1 = ‘97 Model: All except California
*1 A/T
DATA
LINK EVAP- A/T GEAR
CONNEC- ORATIVE POSITION
TOR EMISSION SWITCH
(DLC) (EVAP) SHIFT Pages 21,
CRUISE Pages PURGE PARKING LOCK 21-1, 34-2,
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONTROL 23-8, 35-2, FLOW PIN MODE RELAY 39-3, 89,
Page 44-1 ACTUATOR and 39-4 SWITCH ASHTRAY SWITCH SWITCH Page 138-1 110-8, 132-1,
PHOTO 83 Page 34-2 PHOTO 72 Page 23-8 LIGHT Page 138 Pages 39-4 PHOTO 85 and 138-1
VIEW 79 PHOTO 5 VIEW 56 PHOTO 8 Page 114-3 PHOTO 85 and 89-1 VIEW 15 PHOTO 33
12
RED
Coil
1 B2 A 1 C487 BLK/ 3 RED/WHT
12 7 PHOTO WHT
88
1 C287 2 C292 3 C486 3 C119
8 VIEW 27 VIEW 30
RED/WHT
10 C141
PHOTO 8
VIEW 43
G403 G404 G471


14-7
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Ground Distribution
G501, G551, and G801
* = ‘97-‘98 models
‘99-’01
Canada Models Bulb Type
KEYLESS
STEREO RECEIVER HIGH
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S AMPLIFIER UNIT STEREO MOUNT AUDIO SRS UNIT
SEAT SEAT Page 150-1 Page 130-3 AMPLIFIER BRAKE UNIT Page 47
HEATER HEATER PHOTO 105 PHOTO 129 SHIELD LIGHT Page 150 PHOTO 70
Page 147 Page 147-1 VIEW 58 VIEW 86 Page 150-1 Page 110-12 VIEW 55 VIEW 57
3 7 1 (* 14) 17
20) 16
1 C505 1 C503
BRAIDED
WIRE
GRY GRY
or or
GRN GRN
FUEL
DRIVER’S TANK
SEAT FUEL UNIT
BELT PUMP Pages 74
SWITCH Page 23-1 and 81
Page 73-1 PHOTO 107 PHOTO 107
1 1
2 C506
PHOTO 100
G501 G551 G801


14-8
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Ground Distribution
G601 and G901
LEFT RIGHT
BRAKE BRAKE
LEFT LIGHT/ LEFT RIGHT LIGHT/ RIGHT
REAR LEFT TAILLIGHT REAR REAR RIGHT TAILLIGHT REAR
TURN BACK-UP LEFT Pages SIDE TURN BACK-UP RIGHT Pages SIDE
SIGNAL LIGHT TAIL- 110-11, MARKER SIGNAL LIGHT TAIL- 110-11, MARKER
LIGHT Pages 110-8 LIGHT 110-12, and LIGHT LIGHT Pages 110-8 LIGHT 110-12, and LIGHT
Page 110-7 and 110-9 Page 110-11 110-13 Page 110-11 Page 110-7 and 110-9 Page 110-11 110-13 Page 110-11
3 C607 3 C604
PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111
VIEW 5 VIEW 4
Type SH
HEATER
TRUNK TRAILER CONTROL HEATER
LATCH HIGH PANEL FAN
LICENSE LIGHTING MOUNT
SWITCH CONNECTOR Pages 61-1, SWITCH
Pages 80-1 PLATE BRAKE Pages 60,
LIGHT Page 118 62-1, 63-1,
and 114 LIGHT and 64 62-1, and 63-1
Page 110-11 PHOTO 110
PHOTO 109 VIEW 16
Page 110-12 VIEW 71 VIEW 13
1 13 4
RED/BLK
C633
1 C605 PHOTO 112
PHOTO 92
2 C602
PHOTO 108
G601 G901
PHOTO 111 PHOTO 75

14-9
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Ignition System
NOTE: For Service Check Connector details, see page 23-4.
ENGINE
CONTROL
MODULE
(ECM) See Ground
Distribution,
PHOTO 80
VIEW 85 page 14-1.
TDC CKP CYP
sensor sensor sensor
input input input
(TDCP) (CKPP) (CYPP)
3 2 4 C
C479
(Terminals 1-6)
BRN/BLK BRN/BLK PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
GRN BLU YEL

C142
2 PHOTO 8 4) C143
1 3 VIEW 44 PHOTO 8
(A/T 12) VIEW 24
BRAIDED BRN/BLK
WIRE See Ground
Distribution,
BRAIDED WIRE
page 14-1.
GRN BLU YEL BRN/BLK BRN/BLK
COIL WIRE
3 G101
1 C102 2 C131 PHOTO 21
PHOTO 40 YEL PHOTO 24 BLK
GRN BLU
CRANKSHAFT CYLINDER
POSITION/ POSITION
TDC CKP TOP DEAD CYP (CYP)
CENTER SENSOR
(CKP/TDC)
SENSOR
PHOTO 42
RED WHT DISTRIBUTOR
2 4 C102
PHOTO 40
Plug Wires
RED WHT BLK
4 C131
PHOTO 24
BLK
13 12 14 C142
PHOTO 8 Spark Plugs
VIEW 44
RED WHT BLK
13 12 14 C
(CYPM)
ENGINE
(TDCM) (CKPM)
Sensor Sensor Sensor CONTROL
ground ground ground MODULE
(ECM)
PHOTO 80
VIEW 85

20
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Ignition System
HOT AT ALL TIMES
STEERING
IGNITION LOCK
START
(III) SWITCH PHOTO 62
LOCK
VIEW 78
(0)
ACC (I) ON (II)
6 A
BLK/YEL ENGINE
C976 CONTROL
1 PHOTO 51 Ignition
SRS output MODULE
See Power signal (ECM)
FUSE
Distribution, PHOTO 80
1 C974 page 10-1. BLOCK (ICM) VIEW 85
PHOTO 51
20 A
See Power UNDER-DASH
Distribution, FUSE/RELAY
page 10-6. BOX
PHOTO 51
2 C435 YEL/GRN
PHOTO 57
BLK/YEL
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-6.
BLK/YEL
8 C144
1 C139 PHOTO 8
BLK/YEL PHOTO 9 VIEW 44
1
A IGNITION
COIL
Secondary Primary PHOTO 23
C B
YEL/GRN
BLK COIL WIRE

2 3
YEL GRN
2 C136 1 C131
3 PHOTO 24
BLK/YEL PHOTO 24 GRN YEL/GRN
DISTRIBUTOR
ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 24
IGNITION
Battery Primary Ignition input CONTROL
output signal MODULE
control (ICM)
Engine speed
Ground output (RPM)
BLU
C136
1 PHOTO 24
BLU
C140
10 PHOTO 8
BLU VIEW 31
BLU
BLU
11 C454
BLU BLU PHOTO 76 5)
VIEW 63 (M/T 20) A
C432
PHOTO 57
9 VIEW 49 Type
UNDER-DASH SH, A/T
FUSE/RELAY
3 C438 20 C433 3 C432 BOX
9 C551 (Not (Not (Not
PHOTO 51 ATTS CONTROL UNIT
BLU
PHOTO 51 Used) Used) Used) (M/T) or
BLU VIEW 54 TRANSMISSION
5 B 2 CONTROL
MODULE (TCM) (A/T)
Tacho- GAUGE TEST PHOTO 80
meter ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
TACHOMETER VIEW 83
CONNECTOR VIEW 82 (Type SH)
VIEW 84 PHOTO 9

20-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Starting System
Early Production ‘97 Model
3 A
WHT STEERING
IGNITION LOCK
3 C411 See Power PHOTO 62
PHOTO 60 Distribution, SWITCH VIEW 78
WHT
LOCK page 10-1.
C253 (0)
1 PHOTO 7 START
(III)
UNDER-HOOD
ACC ON
FUSE/RELAY (I) (II)
FUSE 33 BOX
IG SW PHOTO 5
50A 1 A
BLK/WHT
ELECTRICAL
LOAD 1 C411
WHT/RED PHOTO 60
DETECTOR
(ELD) UNIT C433
Page 22 WHT/RED PHOTO 57
18 VIEW 69
PHOTO 7
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 2 FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 32 STARTER SIGNAL BOX
7.5A PHOTO 51
BATTERY See Power
100A Distribution,
page 10-2.
See Power
Distribution, 19 C433
page 10. PHOTO 57
WHT/RED BLU/RED VIEW 69 BLU/RED See Power
T1 Distribution,
PHOTO 6 BLU/RED page 10-2.
3 4
BLK BLK
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
+ BATTERY PHOTO 61
1 2
LT BLU
3 A
Starter cut control IMMOBILIZER
– CONTROL
Park/neutral UNIT
input PHOTO 61
VIEW 76
2 A
M/T GRY A/T
BLK BLK/WHT
GRY
2 C139 6 C453
PHOTO 9 PHOTO 76
GRY VIEW 2
GRY
8 C141
T3 BLK/WHT STARTER PHOTO 8
GRY VIEW 43
PHOTO 31 PHOTO 36
1 C119
T2 STARTER PHOTO 30
PHOTO 36 SOLENOID 2 GRY VIEW 30
CLUTCH D4 A/T GEAR
Pull-in INTERLOCK N D3 POSITION
TRANS- coil Hold- SWITCH R SWITCH
MISSION in coil Clutch 2 PHOTO 33
pedal fully 1
depressed. P
1 PHOTO 64
RED/WHT
BLK 3 C119
PHOTO 30
BLK RED/WHT VIEW 30
STARTER
MOTOR BLK
M 10 C141
See Ground PHOTO 8
BLK
Distribution, VIEW 43 See Ground
BLK page 14-4. Distribution,
page 14-7.
BLK
G1 G401 G471

21
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Starting System
All except Early Production ‘97 Model
3 A
WHT STEERING
IGNITION LOCK
3 C411 See Power PHOTO 62
Distribution, SWITCH VIEW 78
PHOTO 60
WHT
LOCK page 10-1.
C253 (0)
1 PHOTO 7 START
UNDER-HOOD (III)
ACC ON
FUSE/RELAY (I) (II)
FUSE 33 BOX
IG SW PHOTO 5
50A
1 A
BLK/WHT
ELECTRICAL
LOAD 1 C411
WHT/RED PHOTO 60
DETECTOR
(ELD) UNIT
Page 22 WHT/RED WHT/RED
PHOTO 7 4
3
STARTER
CUT
FUSE 32 RELAY
BATTERY PHOTO 61
100A
1 2
See Power BLK/WHT
Distribution,
page 10.
BLK/WHT LT BLU
T1 C433
PHOTO 6 PHOTO 57
BLK 18 VIEW 69 3 A
BLK UNDER- IMMOBILIZER
DASH Starter cut CONTROL
FUSE 2 control
STARTER SIGNAL FUSE/ UNIT
7.5A RELAY PHOTO 61
+ BATTERY See Power Park/neutral VIEW 76
Distribution, BOX
PHOTO 51 input
page 10-2.
2 A
19 C433
PHOTO 57
BLK/WHT BLU/RED VIEW 69
– GRY
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-2.
M/T A/T
BLK
GRY
2 C139 6 C453
PHOTO 9 PHOTO 76
GRY VIEW 2
GRY
8 C141
T3 BLK/WHT STARTER PHOTO 8
GRY VIEW 43
PHOTO 31 PHOTO 36
1 C119
T2 STARTER PHOTO 30
PHOTO 36 SOLENOID 2 GRY VIEW 30
CLUTCH A/T GEAR
D4
Pull-in INTERLOCK N D3 POSITION
TRANS- coil Hold- SWITCH R SWITCH
MISSION in coil Clutch 2 PHOTO 33
pedal fully 1
depressed. P
1 PHOTO 64
RED/WHT
BLK 3 C119
PHOTO 30
BLK RED/WHT VIEW 30
STARTER
MOTOR BLK
M 10 C141
See Ground PHOTO 8
BLK
Distribution, VIEW 43 See Ground
BLK page 14-4. Distribution,
page 14-7.
BLK
G1 G401 G471

21-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Charging System
HOT IN ON OR START
FUSE 14
T1 UNDER- ECU
PHOTO 6 See Power HOOD EAT ECU
15A
Distribution, FUSE/
page 10. RELAY
FUSE 32 BOX
BATTERY PHOTO 5
100A 7 C432
BLK PHOTO 57
BLK/YEL VIEW 49
BLK See
Starting See Power
System Distribution,
page 10-8.
BATTERY BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
C456
(Terminals 4-6)
TRANS-
BLK/YEL PHOTO 82
MISSION 3 VIEW 64

ELECTRICAL
Ignition LOAD
T3 input DETECTOR
BLK PHOTO 31 (ELD) UNIT BLK/YEL
Load
output PHOTO 7 10 C454
Ground
PHOTO 76
BLK BLK/YEL VIEW 63
1 2
See Power C479
Distribution, GRN/RED
(Terminals
page 10. 17-20)
G1
PHOTO 11 PHOTO 77
T101 5 C453 BLK/YEL
VIEW 65
PHOTO 6 (Type SH, A/T 15) PHOTO 76
VIEW 2
GRN/RED
3 C144 See Power
PHOTO 8 Distribution,
BLK BLK/YEL VIEW 45
16 D pages 10-8
ENGINE and 10-9.
(EL)
See Ground ELD unit CONTROL
Distribution, input MODULE C117
page 14-4. (ECM) (Terminals 1-7)
Alternator Alternator PHOTO 80 PHOTO 43
output signal FR signal VIEW 85 PHOTO 125 (Type SH)
BLK (ALTC) (ALTF) VIEW 42
19 A 17 C
G401 See Power
WHT/GRN WHT/GRN BLK/YEL
page 10-9.
11 10 C142 WHT/BLU
PHOTO 8
WHT/GRN WHT/RED VIEW 44
ALTERNATOR T102 4 1 3
PHOTO 37 PHOTO 37 2
Rectifier B C FR IG L
Field
Winding
Voltage Regulator
Stator

22
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Charging System
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 51
8 C551
PHOTO 51
VIEW 54
BLK/YEL
9 B
GAUGE UNDER-DASH
See Indicators ASSEMBLY DRIVER’S FUSE/RELAY
PHOTO 66 MULTIPLEX BOX
VIEW 84 Engine PHOTO 51
CHARGING running CONTROL
SYSTEM input UNIT
– + PHOTO 58
INDICATOR VIEW 81
LIGHT 2 B
See Indicators
1 C
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
WHT/BLU 16
C402
PHOTO 65
WHT/BLU VIEW 53
8 C482
(Type SH and all ‘99-’01 Models 9) PHOTO 71
VIEW 34
WHT/BLU
9 C142
PHOTO 8
VIEW 44
WHT/BLU

22-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Programmed Fuel Injection System (PGM-FI)
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER- SRS
FUSE 43 HOOD FUSE 23 FUSE
CLOCK FUSE/ (FUEL PUMP) BLOCK HOT AT ALL TIMES
RADIO RELAY 15A PHOTO 51
7.5A BOX See Power
FUSE 4
5 C974 page 10-10. ACG-S
4 C254 10A
PHOTO 7 UNDER-
WHT/ VIEW 20 See Power DASH
YEL Distribution, FUSE/
page 10-10. RELAY 5 C432
BOX PHOTO 57
See Power PHOTO 51 WHT/ VIEW 49
Distribution, 7 C433 GRN
page 10-12. PHOTO 57 WHT/GRN See Power
RED/ORN VIEW 69 Distribution,
WHT/GRN
page 10-2.
5 7
3 6
YEL/BLK
BLK YEL/BLK
Immobilizer System
All except Early
YEL/BLK Production ’97 Model
16 17 C454
PHOTO 76
YEL/BLK VIEW 63
WHT/ BLK
YEL
See Ground YEL/BLK

page 14. PHOTO 8
YEL/BLK
VIEW 45
BLK
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
1 1 1 1
NO. 1 NO. 2 NO.3 NO. 4 FUEL
INJEC-
G101 TORS
PHOTO 21
2 2 2 2
BRN RED BLU YEL
4 C144
5 6 7 PHOTO 8
BRN RED BLU YEL VIEW 45
10 C 24 11 4 3 2 1 A
(VBU) (IGP2) (IGP1) (INJ1) (INJ2) (INJ3) (INJ4)
Battery Power Power
input input input Fuel injector control

23
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
HOT IN START HOT WITH ENGINE RUNNING
All except
Early Production ‘97 Model Early Production ‘97 Model
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 2 FUSE/RELAY
STARTER SIGNAL BOX
7.5A PHOTO 51
19 C433 3 C551
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51
BLU/RED VIEW 69 VIEW 54
BLU/RED See Power
Distribution,
BLU/RED
page 10-2.
BLU/RED
2
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
PHOTO 59
VIEW 22
1 4
BLK/YEL
12 C462
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
BLK/YEL
2 C482
PHOTO 71
GRN/ORN VIEW 34
2
FUEL
PUMP
M PHOTO 107
1 BLU/RED
14 C454
C112 PHOTO 76
(Terminals 1-8) VIEW 63
PHOTO 25
YEL/BLK VIEW 23 BLK
C117 (Type SH)
(Terminals 8-14)
PHOTO 125
2 VIEW 42
BLK See Ground
IDLE AIR Distribution,
CONTROL GRN/ORN
page 14-8.
(IAC) VALVE
PHOTO 46
1 BLK
BLK/BLU
5 C142
PHOTO 8 G501
BLK/BLU VIEW 44 PHOTO 99
12 16 A 6 C
(IACV) (FLR (STS)
ENGINE
) CONTROL
IAC valve Fuel Starting MODULE
control pump input (ECM)
control PHOTO 80
VIEW 85

23-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
TDC CKP CYP

sensor sensor sensor
input input input Ground Ground
(TDCP) (CKPP) (CYPP) (LG1) (LG2)
3 C 9 A
2 4 22
See Ground
BRN/BLK BRN/ Distribution,
BLK page 14-1.
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
See Ground BRN/BLK
GRN BLU YEL Distribution,
page 14-1. BRN/BLK
C479
2 C142 (Terminals
1 3 4 PHOTO 8
VIEW 44
1-6)
GRN BLU YEL BRN/BLK PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
BRN/BLK 4) C143
(A/T 12) PHOTO 8
VIEW 24
BRAIDED WIRE
BRN/BLK
BRAIDED WIRE BRN/BLK
See Ground
1 3 2 Distribution,
C102 C131
PHOTO 40 PHOTO 24 page 14-1.
YEL
GRN BLU
DISTRIB-
CRANKSHAFT CYLINDER UTOR
POSITION/ POSITION ASSEMBLY
TDC CKP TOP DEAD CYP (CYP) PHOTO 24
CENTER SENSOR
(CKP/TDC)
RED WHT SENSOR
PHOTO 42 BRN/BLK BRN/BLK
BLK
2 4 C102 4 C131
PHOTO 40 PHOTO 24
RED WHT BLK
13 12 14 C142
PHOTO 8
VIEW 44
RED WHT BLK
13 12 14 C
ENGINE
(TDCM) (CKPM) (CYPM)
CONTROL
Sensor Sensor Sensor MODULE
ground ground ground (ECM)
PHOTO 80
VIEW 85

23-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
ENGINE
CONTROL
MODULE
Ignition MAP (ECM)
output Reference sensor Sensor PHOTO 80
VIEW 85
Ground Ground signal voltage input ground
(PG1) (PG2) (ICM) (VCC1) (MAP) (SG1)
10 23 20 A 4 D
3 12
BLK BLK YEL/GRN YEL/RED RED/GRN GRN/WHT
See Ground
Distribution, See
page 14. ATTS
RED/
GRN
Type SH
BLK BLK
RED/GRN
11 10 8 C144 3 2 1 C140
PHOTO 8 PHOTO 8
VIEW 45 VIEW 31
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14.
BLK BLK YEL/GRN YEL/RED RED/GRN GRN/WHT
1 C131
PHOTO 24
YEL/GRN 3 2
1
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
IGNITION PRESSURE
Ignition CONTROL (MAP)
input MODULE SENSOR
signal (ICM) PHOTO 47
BLK BLK
DISTRIBUTOR
ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 24
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
G101
PHOTO 21

23-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Service Fuel tank

check pressure TP
connector sensor Reference sensor
input input voltage input
(SCS) (PTANK) (VCC2) (TPS)
7 C 15 D
10 1
RED/BLK
ABS
CONTROL SRS WHT/BLU YEL/BLU A/T
UNIT UNIT RED/BLK
PHOTO 83 PHOTO 70 See A/T
VIEW 79 VIEW 57 Controls
C479
14 B 9 (Terminals
7-10)
GRY PHOTO 77
or GRN VIEW 65
RED/ C143
2 C416
WHT PHOTO 61 PHOTO 8
RED/WHT VIEW 24
YEL/BLU YEL/BLU
YEL/BLU
(4
YEL/BLU RED/BLK (6 M/T)
6 5 C140
RED/WHT
PHOTO 8
Type SH YEL/BLU RED/BLK VIEW 31
ATTS 3 1 3 2
CONTROL 2 C454 FUEL THROTTLE
UNIT PHOTO 76 TANK POSITION
PHOTO 80 VIEW 63 PRESSURE (TP)
VIEW 82
SENSOR SENSOR
PHOTO 120 PHOTO 47
1
2
9 A RED/ RED/WHT
WHT
GRN/BLK
RED/
WHT
GRN/
RED/
BLK
WHT
See
ATTS 1
SERVICE
CHECK
CONNECTOR
PHOTO 72
2
GRN/
BLK
‘97 Model: California

‘98-’01 Models: All

23-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
ENGINE
CONTROL
EGR MODULE
valve IAT ECT (ECM)
lift sensor sensor sensor PHOTO 80
input input input VIEW 85
(EGRL) (IAT) (ECT)
9 8 2 D
WHT/BLK RED/YEL RED/WHT
7) C143 12 C144 7 C140

(A/T 5) PHOTO 8 PHOTO 8 PHOTO 8
YEL/BLU WHT/ RED/YEL RED/WHT

BLK
From A on
page 23-7.
3 1 2 2
EXHAUST INTAKE AIR ENGINE
GAS TEMPERATURE COOLANT
RECIR- (IAT) SENSOR TEMPERATURE GRN/BLK
CULATION PHOTO 41 (ECT) SENSOR
(EGR) PHOTO 27 All except
2 VALVE 1 1 Type SH Type SH
LIFT
GRN/
SENSOR GRN/BLK
PHOTO 21 BLK
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
C117
(Terminals 8-14)
PHOTO 43
GRN/BLK VIEW 42
All except Type SH
GRN/BLK
GRN/BLK
From B on
GRN/BLK page 23-7.
4 C140
PHOTO 8
VIEW 31
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
C479
(Terminals
11-13)
GRN/BLK PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
11 D
ENGINE
(SG2)
CONTROL
Sensor MODULE (ECM)
ground PHOTO 80
VIEW 85

23-5
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 14 FUSE/RELAY
ECU BOX
EAT ECU PHOTO 51
15A
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-8. * = ‘97 (California)-‘98 models
7 C432
PHOTO 57
BLK/YEL VIEW 49
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
C456
(Terminals 4-6)
BLK/YEL PHOTO 82
VIEW 64
See Power
Distribution,
BLK/YEL page 10-8.
10 C454
PHOTO 76
BLK/YEL VIEW 63
BLK/ BLK/YEL
YEL
2 C302
PHOTO 55
VIEW 47
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/ BLK/YEL

YEL
2 C311
PHOTO 18 1)
RED
2 (* 2) 1 1
INTAKE EXHAUST EVAPORATIVE EVAPORATIVE EVAPORATIVE
CONTROL GAS RECIR- EMISSION EMISSION EMISSION
SOLENOID CULATION (EVAP) PURGE (EVAP) (EVAP)
VALVE (EGR) CONTROL CONTROL BYPASS
PHOTO 29 CONTROL SOLENOID CANISTER SOLENOID
1 BLK/YEL SOLENOID (* 1) VALVE 2 VENT SHUT 2 VALVE
VALVE 2) PHOTO 5 VALVE PHOTO 119
WHT PHOTO 18 PHOTO 120 (*)
1 C311 PHOTO 130
12 C454 PHOTO 18
PHOTO 76
VIEW 63 ORN
RED/YEL ORN/GRN GRN/WHT

1 C302
PHOTO 55
VIEW 47
WHT ORN
‘97 California
Model, and all
6) C453 ‘98-‘01 Models:
(Type SH or A/T 13) PHOTO 76
VIEW 2
ORN
25 7 15 29 28 A
(RESSOL) (ESOL) (PCS) (VSV) (2WBS)
Intake control EGR control EVAP purge EVAP control EVAP bypass
solenoid valve solenoid control solenoid canister vent solenoid
control valve valve control shut valve control control
control

23-6
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
ENGINE
CONTROL
Primary Secondary MODULE
HO2S HO2S (ECM)
input input PHOTO 80
(PHO2S) (SHO2S) VIEW 85
7 14 D
BRN/BLK BRN/BLK
WHT
C479
(Terminals 1-6)
PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
3) C143 See Ground

(A/T 13) PHOTO 8 Distribution,
VIEW 24 page 14-1.
BRN/BLK
4) C143
(A/T 12) PHOTO 8
All except VIEW 24
BRAIDED BRN/BLK
Type SH
WIRE
BRN/BLK
G101
PHOTO 21
C479
BLK/YEL (Terminals
3 C144 17-20)
BLK/YEL PHOTO 8 PHOTO 77
VIEW 45 BLK/YEL WHT VIEW 65
C117
(Terminals 1-7)
BLK/YEL PHOTO 43 See Power
PHOTO 125 (Type SH) Distribution,
VIEW 42
page 10-9.
BLK/YEL All except Type SH

BLK/YEL WHT/RED
See Power Type SH
Distribution,
page 10-9. 4 C118 4 2 C294
2 PHOTO 43 PHOTO 49
WHT BLK C293 (Type SH) WHT BLK

PHOTO 49
1
INTAKE AIR PRIMARY SECONDARY
BYPASS (IAB) HEATED HEATED
CONTROL OXYGEN OXYGEN
SOLENOID SENSOR SENSOR
VALVE (HO2S) (HO2S)
2 PHOTO 44 WHT GRY PHOTO 48 WHT GRY PHOTO 50
PHOTO 124 (Type SH)
RED/BLU 1 1
3 C118 3 C294
PHOTO 43 PHOTO 49
6 C142 BLK/WHT GRN/BLK C293 (Type SH) ORN/BLU GRN/BLK
PHOTO 8 PHOTO 49
VIEW 44
2) C143
All except (A/T 6) PHOTO 8
Type SH VIEW 24
RED/BLU
BLK/WHT
To A on To B on
page 23-5. page 23-5.
26 6 5 A
ENGINE
(IABSOL) (PO2SHTC) (SO2SHTC)
CONTROL
IAB control Heater Heater MODULE
solenoid control control (ECM)
valve PHOTO 80
control VIEW 85

23-7
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
HOT IN ON OR START HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-DASH UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 14 FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY
ECU BOX BOX
PHOTO 51 PHOTO 5
EAT ECU FUSE 46
15A
INTERIOR LIGHTS
See Power (*15A)
10A
Distribution,
page 10-8. * = ‘97-‘98 Models
8 C551 6 C251
BLK/ PHOTO 51 PHOTO 7
VIEW 54 WHT/BLU
VIEW 38
YEL
9 B
GAUGE C456
See ASSEMBLY WHT/
(Terminals 1-3)
Indicators PHOTO 66 BLU PHOTO 82
VIEW 84 VIEW 64
19 C454 See Power
MALFUNCTION (USA) PHOTO 76 Distribution,
INDICATOR WHT/BLU VIEW 63 page 10-13.
LIGHT (MIL) 8
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
(Canada) PHOTO 72
VIEW 56
16 B 6 15 13 12
LT GRN/RED LT GRN BRN/BLK
BLK
GRY/
RED See Ground See Ground
Distribution, Distribution,
page 14-1. page 14-7.
3 C482
PHOTO 71 See ABS, BLK
VIEW 34 ATTS, SRS, BRN/BLK
A/T Controls
GRY/
RED
G101 G471
18 A 8 C PHOTO 21 PHOTO 77
(MIL) (K-LINE)
MIL DLC VTEC
control EVAP purge input/ solenoid
flow switch output valve
input control
(PFSW) (VTS)
20 C 8 A
BRN GRN/YEL
1 C292
BRN PHOTO 8
7 C142
EVAPORATIVE PHOTO 8
EMISSION VIEW 44
(EVAP)
PURGE FLOW
SWITCH GRN/YEL
PHOTO 8
BLK
2 C292
PHOTO 8
BLK
See Ground C123
Distribution, GRN/WHT PHOTO 21
page 14-7.
BLK VTEC
SOLENOID
G471 VALVE
PHOTO 77 PHOTO 21
‘97 Models:
All except California
23-8
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 41 FUSE/RELAY
STOP HORN BOX
15A PHOTO 5
10 C251
WHT/YEL PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 See Power
Distribution,
WHT/YEL page 10-11.
4
BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with brake
pedal depressed.
PHOTO 64
3
WHT/BLK
See ABS, IMMOBILIZER
Cruise Control Immo- CONTROL
WHT/BLK
bilizer UNIT
C438 signal PHOTO 61
4 PHOTO 57 (Not Used) VIEW 76
output
3 C434 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY 6 A
BOX
PHOTO 51
13 C432 BRN/YEL
14 C432 (Not Used)
PHOTO 57
WHT/BLK VIEW 49 WHT/BLK
See Brake Lights 3) C453
WHT/BLK
VIEW 2
13 C454
PHOTO 76
WHT/BLK VIEW 63 WHT/BLK
BRN/YEL
See A/T Controls
WHT/BLK
5 D 22 C
(BKSW) (IMOCODE)
ENGINE
Brake switch Immobilizer CONTROL
input signal input MODULE
(ECM)
VTEC pressure PSP switch PHOTO 80
switch input input KS input VIEW 85
(VTM) (PSPSW) (KS)
15 16 C 6 D
BLU/BLK GRN See Ground Distribution,
9 page 14-1.
8 C140
PHOTO 8
BLU/BLK GRN
VIEW 31
1 1 BRN/BLK
VTEC POWER STEERING
PRESSURE PRESSURE (PSP) C479
SWITCH SWITCH (Terminals 1-6)
PHOTO 21 PHOTO 43
PHOTO 121 (Type SH) PHOTO 77
VIEW 65 RED/BLU
BRN/BLK
2 2 4) C143
(A/T 12) 8) PHOTO 8
(A/T 14) VIEW 24
BRN/BLK BLK
BRN/BLK
See Ground
See Ground Distribution, BRAIDED WIRE
Distribution, pages 14
page 14-1. and 14-1.
RED/BLU
BLK
BRN/BLK BRN/BLK
KNOCK
BLK
SENSOR
(KS)
PHOTO 45
G101
PHOTO 21

23-9
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Type SH
ATTS
CONTROL
UNIT
PHOTO 80
VIEW 82
Data
communication
lines
Reference
(VREF) (FI-TX) (FI-RX)
17 B See A/C See

9 19 Compressor See Charging
Controls Fans System
LT GRN/BLK GRN/BLU GRN/YEL

ENGINE
PNK/BLU GRN GRN/RED
CONTROL
MODULE
(ECM)
30 31 27 PHOTO 80
1 C 17 A 16 D VIEW 85
(VREF) (FITX) (FIRX) (ACC) (FANC) (EL)

Reference A/C compressor Radiator fan ELD unit
voltage Data clutch relay control input
communication control
lines
Transmission PGM-FI Alternator Alternator

Reference control data control data Park/neutral A/C VSS FR output
voltage input output input request input signal signal
(VREF) (SEAF) (SEFA) (ATPNP) (ACS) (VSS) (ALTF) (ALTC)
1 30 31 29 5 18 17 C 19 A
LT GRN BLU/ BLU/WHT WHT/GRN WHT/GRN

ORN
LT GRN
See A/T
Controls
LT GRN/BLK GRN/BLU GRN/YEL

LT GRN
See A/C See See

10 C483 Charging
PHOTO 71 Compressor Vehicle
VIEW 41 Controls Speed System
Sensor
LT GRN (VSS)
20 18 19 B 7 D
(VREF) (SEAF) (SEFA) Park/
Reference Transmission PGM-FI neutral
voltage control data control output
output data input
TRANSMISSION GAUGE
CONTROL MODULE ASSEMBLY
(TCM) PHOTO 66
VIEW 84
PHOTO 80
VIEW 83
A/T

23-10
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index How the Circuit Works
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
A/T
HOT IN ON OR START
ENGINE
UNDER- CONTROL TRANSMISSION CRUISE
FUSE 14 DASH MODULE CONTROL GAUGE CONTROL
ECU FUSE/ (ECM) MODULE (TCM) ASSEMBLY UNIT
EAT ECU RELAY PHOTO 80 PHOTO 80 PHOTO 66 PHOTO 68
15A VIEW 85 VIEW 83 VIEW 84 VIEW 51
BOX
See Power PHOTO 51
Distribution, Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle
page 10-8. speed speed Odometer speed
input input driver input
(VSS) (VSS) circuit (VSS)
7 C432
PHOTO 57 C 5 B 3 B 12
VIEW 49
18
BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
BLK/YEL
BLU/WHT BLU/
(*7) C482 1 C454
WHT PHOTO 71 PHOTO 76
(**8) VIEW 34 VIEW 63
See Power
Distribution, BLU/WHT
page 10-9. BLU/WHT
C479
(Terminals
BLU/WHT 14-16)
PHOTO 77
BLK/YEL VIEW 65
9 C144
PHOTO 8
VIEW 45
BLU/WHT
3
2
VEHICLE
Ignition input Vehicle SPEED
speed SENSOR
output (VSS)
PHOTO 22
Ground
1
BLK
* = All ’97-’98 Models except Type SH

** = Type SH and all ’99-’01 Models
See Ground BLK

Distribution,
page 14.
G101
PHOTO 21

33
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

How the Circuit Works
With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III),
battery voltage is supplied through fuse 14 and the
BLK/YEL wire to the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The
sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The
speedometer and other control units in the circuit
supply 5 volts or more to the BLU/WHT wire. The
vehicle speed sensor (VSS) intermittently grounds the
BLU/WHT wire which generates a pulsed signal in it.
The number of pulses per minute
increases/decreases with the speed of the car.
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 23, Electrical)
for specific tests or troubleshooting procedures.

33-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Cruise Control
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER BOX
(CRUISE PHOTO 51
CONTROL)
15A See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
4 C551
PHOTO 51
YEL VIEW 54
C559
See Dash and (Terminals 7-10)
Console Lights PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
YEL
RED/BLK
4
3
CRUISE
CONTROL See Power
MAIN Distribution,
CRUISE page 10-7.
CONTROL ON
SWITCH
MAIN VIEW 9
SWITCH OFF
LIGHT
“ON”
INDICATOR
5 2 1
BLK
RED LT GRN
See Ground
13 C403 Distribution,
PHOTO 65
VIEW 60
page 14-5.
See Dash and
Console Lights
LT GRN BLK
G401
PHOTO 56 LT GRN
Open with
brake pedal
depressed.
LT GRN
GRY
2
13
Power Brake
input switch
input

34
s

s
t
+ –
Cruise Control
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 41 FUSE/RELAY
BOX
STOP HORN PHOTO 5
15A
10 C251
PHOTO 7
WHT/YEL VIEW 38
WHT/YEL
5
See Power
(*3)
Distribution,
page 10-11. HORN
RELAY
PHOTO 53
(*5)
3
LT GRN/BLU
WHT/YEL LT GRN/BLU LT GRN/BLU
9 3 C409
PHOTO 60
BLU/RED
2
(*3)
SECURITY CABLE
CONTROL REEL
PHOTO 63
UNIT
Page 133-1
VIEW 40
See
Horns
Canada
GRY or BLK
STEERING
1 WHEEL
CRUISE
Resume/ CONTROL
Set/Decel Accel SET/RESUME
Switch Switch SWITCH
4
BRAKE
SWITCH 3 2
Closed with PHOTO 64
brake pedal GRY or BLK GRY or BLK
depressed.
CABLE
REEL
3 PHOTO 63
WHT/BLK
See ABS, (*1) (*2)

PGM-FI, 4 3
Brake Lights LT GRN/RED LT GRN/BLK * = ’97-’98 Models
2 C409
WHT/BLK 1 PHOTO 60
LT GRN/RED LT GRN/BLK
5 6 7
CRUISE
Brake Set/decel Resume/ CONTROL
switch signal input accel signal UNIT
input input PHOTO 68
VIEW 51

34-1
s

s
t
Cruise Control
HOT IN ON OR START
FUSE 13 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
METER
(CRUISE See Power BOX
CONTROL) PHOTO 51
15A
Distribution,
page 10-7.
See Dash 4 C551
and Console YEL PHOTO 51
Lights VIEW 54
See Power
Distribution,
RED/BLK
page 10-7.
YEL
11 B 4 C
GAUGE
See See Indicators ASSEMBLY
Dash PHOTO 66
Lights VIEW 84
Dimming Circuit CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR LIGHT
See Indicators
10 B 4 11 A
BLK
RED
BLU/BLK
See Ground Distribution,
page 14-5. 12 C403
See Dash
PHOTO 65
and Console VIEW 60 CRUISE
BLK
Lights BLU/BLK CONTROL
UNIT
G401 PHOTO 68
PHOTO 56 10 VIEW 51
“Cruise control”
indicator light control
Cruise control Vehicle
actuator control Disengage speed
Ground input input
11 1 9 3 14 12
BRN/ PNK
BLK BRN BRN/WHT BLK A/T M/T
7 C454
9 8 PHOTO 76 PNK BLU/
BRN/ VIEW 63 WHT
BLK BRN BRN/WHT 12 C453
PHOTO 76
PNK VIEW 2
2 4 3 See
C287 9 C141 PNK
BRN/ PHOTO 5 PHOTO 8 Vehicle
BRN/WHT BRN
BLK PNK VIEW 43 Speed
2 C119 Sensor
B D C
PNK
PHOTO 30 2
VIEW 30 CLUTCH
Vacuum Safety Vent P A/T GEAR SWITCH
Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid 1 POSITION Open with
SWITCH clutch
R 2 PHOTO 33 pedal
3 depressed.
N D3 PHOTO 64
BLK
A D4
CRUISE BLK See Ground

CONTROL See Ground RED/WHT
ACTUATOR 1 C287 3 C119 page 14-5.
PHOTO 5 PHOTO 5 page 14-4. PHOTO 30
BLK RED/WHT VIEW 30
BLK
See Ground BLK 10 C141
PHOTO 8
Distribution, BLK VIEW 43 See Ground
page 14-7. Distribution,
BLK page 14-7.
BLK
G471 G401 G471 G401


34-2
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Cruise Control
The cruise control system uses mechanical and You can cancel the cruise control system by
electrical devices to maintain the car’s speed at a turning the main switch off. This removes power to
setting selected by the driver. the control unit and erases the set speed from
memory. If the system is disengaged temporarily
by the brake switch, or clutch switch, and the car’s
System Description
speed is still above 25 mph, press the resume
The cruise control unit receives command signals switch: the car will automatically return to the
from the cruise control main switch and the cruise previously set speed.
control Set/Resume switch. With the ignition switch For gradual acceleration without pressing the
in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is provided to the accelerator pedal, push the RESUME switch and
cruise control main switch through fuse 13. When hold it there. This will send an “acceleration” signal
you push the switch to ON, power is provided to the to the control unit. When you release the switch, the
cruise control unit and the brake switch. system will be reprogrammed for the new speed. To
The cruise control unit receives information about slow the car down, push the SET switch in and hold
operating conditions from the brake switch, the it there. This sends a “deceleration” signal to the
vehicle speed sensor (VSS), and the clutch switch control unit, causing the car to coast. When the
(manual transmission) or the A/T gear position desired speed is reached, release the SET switch.
switch (automatic transmission). The cruise control This reprograms the system for the new speed.
unit then sends signals to the cruise control actuator Refer to the Service Manual (Section 4, Engine
which regulates the throttle position to maintain the Electrical) for specific tests or troubleshooting
selected speed. The control unit compares the procedures.
actual speed of the car to the selected speed. The
control unit then uses the result of that comparison
to open or close the throttle.
The brake switch releases the system’s control of
the throttle at the instant you press on the brake
pedal. The switch sends a signal to the control unit
by removing power from the normally closed brake
input (GRY wire), and providing power at the
normally open brake input (WHT/BLK wire). The
control unit responds by allowing the throttle to
close. The clutch switch or the A/T gear position
switch sends a “disengage” signal to the control unit
that also allows the throttle to close.
The cruise control system will set and automatically
maintain any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). To set
it, make sure the main switch is on and the switch
indicator is on. Then, after reaching the desired
speed, press the SET switch. This sends a “set”
signal to the cruise control unit which, in turn,
controls the cruise control actuator to maintain the
set speed.
When you push the SET switch and the cruise
control system is on, the “cruise control” ON
indicator lights up.

34-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Active Torque Transfer System (ATTS)

Type SH
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ON
STEERING UNDER-
IGNITION LOCK FUSE 1 FUSE 9 DASH
See Power Distribution, SWITCH PHOTO 62
page 10-1. (ATTS UNIT) R/C MIRROR FUSE/
VIEW 78 10A (ABS ATTS) RELAY
7.5A BOX
LOCK START See Power PHOTO 51
(0) (III) Distribution,
ACC ON page 10-4
(I) (II)
10 C432 3 C437
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57
VIEW 49 VIEW 25
6 A
BLK/YEL
C976
1 PHOTO 51
SRS FUSE
See Power BLOCK
YEL/BLK
1 C974 page 10-1.
UNDER-DASH
See Power FUSE/RELAY
Distribution, BOX
page 10-6. PHOTO 51
2 C435
BLK/YEL PHOTO 57 21 C453
See Power PHOTO 76
VIEW 2
Distribution,
page 10-6.
BLK/YEL
WHT/BLU YEL/BLK
AUXILIARY
FUSE 21 FUSE
(ATTS) HOLDER
7.5A PHOTO 56
YEL/RED
YEL/RED
YEL/RED
10 C402 5 2
PHOTO 65
YEL/RED VIEW 53 ATTS
FAIL-SAFE
5 C482 RELAY
PHOTO 71 PHOTO 53
YEL/RED VIEW 34
3 1
ORN/GRN
RED/BLU
2 1 C453
YEL/RED YEL/RED PHOTO 76
VIEW 2
ORN/GRN RED/BLU
12 A 1 10 B 2 24 A
(IG1-A) (IG1-B) (FSR) (PWR) (IG2)
Ignition Ignition Fail-safe Power Ignition
input input relay input input
control
Ground Ground Ground Ground

(LG1) (LG2) (PG2) (PG1)
25 A 12 21 B 14 A
BRN/BLK BRN/BLK BLK BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
pages 14 and 14-1.
BRN/BLK BRN/BLK BLK BLK
G101
PHOTO 21

35
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

Type SH
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER BOX
(CRUISE PHOTO 51
CONTROL)
15A
See Power
Distribution
page 10-7.
4 C551
PHOTO 51
YEL VIEW 54
C559
(Terminals 7-10)
PHOTO 67
YEL VIEW 66
YEL
See Power 11 C482

page 10-7. VIEW 34
YEL YEL
9 C
GAUGE 1 C143
See ASSEMBLY PHOTO 8
VIEW 24
Indicators PHOTO 66
VIEW 84 YEL
ATTS
INDICATOR
LIGHT C126
PHOTO 26
YEL
ATTS
BACK-UP
LIGHT
12 C SWITCH
Closed with
transmission
PNK in reverse.
GRN/BLK
PHOTO 26
4 C482 C127
PHOTO 71 PHOTO 26
VIEW 34 GRN/BLK
5 C143
PHOTO 8
PNK VIEW 24
GRN/BLK
GRN/BLK See
Back-up
PNK PNK Lights
GRN/BLK
3 B 23 A 5 A
(WARN 2) (WARN 1) (BACK)
ATTS
Reverse CONTROL
input UNIT
ATTS indicator light control PHOTO 80
VIEW 82
Parking brake
switch input
(PARK)
6 B
GRN/RED
See Brake System

Indicator Light,
page 71.
GRN/RED
PARKING
BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with parking
brake applied.
PHOTO 87

35-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Type SH
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 46 FUSE/RELAY
INTERIOR BOX
LIGHTS PHOTO 5
(*15A)
10A
6 C251 * = ‘97-‘98 models

PHOTO 7
VIEW 38
WHT/BLU
C456
(Terminals 1-3)
WHT/BLU PHOTO 82
VIEW 64
19 C454
PHOTO 76
VIEW 63 See Power
WHT/BLU Distribution,
page 10-13.
8
PHOTO 72
VIEW 56
6 13 12
LT GRN/ BRN/BLK BLK
RED LT GRN/
RED See See Ground See Ground
ABS, Distribution, Distribution,
SRS page 14-1. page 14-7.
BRN/BLK BLK
G101 G471
PHOTO 21 PHOTO 77
DISTRIBUTOR
IGNITION ASSEMBLY
CONTROL PHOTO 24 MANIFOLD
MODULE (ICM) ABSOLUTE ENGINE CONTROL
PRESSURE MODULE (ECM)
(MAP) SENSOR PHOTO 80
TEST PHOTO 47 VIEW 85
TACHOMETER (RPM)
CONNECTOR Data communication
PHOTO 9
lines Reference
2 voltage
LT GRN/ BLU
RED
Output (FIRX) (FITX) (VREF)
1 C136
PHOTO 24 3 31 C
BLU BLU 30 1
RED/GRN
10 C140
2 PHOTO 8
BLU VIEW 31
RED/GRN
BLU RED/GRN
See See GRN/YEL GRN/BLU LT GRN/BLK
Gauges PGM-FI
BLU RED/GRN
20 A 20 19 9 17 B
11
(DLC) (NE) (PB) (FI-RX) (FI-TX) (VREF)
DLC input/ Engine speed MAP sensor Reference
output input input Data communication voltage
lines
ATTS CONTROL UNIT

PHOTO 80
VIEW 82

35-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
ATTS
CONTROL
UNIT
PHOTO 80
VIEW 82
ABS Left front wheel Right front wheel Left rear wheel Right rear wheel
busy input sensor input sensor input sensor input sensor input
(ABSY) (FLP) (FRP) (RLP) (RRP)
22 10 8 6 4 A
See ABS
YEL/RED
YEL/ WHT/RED WHT/BLU GRY/WHT GRY/RED
RED
YEL/RED
16 10 9 8 7 C453
PHOTO 76
VIEW 2
YEL/RED WHT/RED WHT/BLU GRN/WHT GRY/RED
12 A 3 5 13 15 B
(PMR) (FLP) (FRP) (RLP) (RRP)
ABS
Pump motor Left front wheel Right front wheel Left rear wheel Right rear wheel CONTROL
relay control sensor output sensor output sensor output sensor output UNIT
PHOTO 83
VIEW 79
Speed sensor inputs
(FLW (–)) (FLW (+)) (FRW (–)) (FRW (+)) (RLW (–)) (RLW (+)) (RRW (–)) (RRW (+))
6 7 8 9 18 17 20 19 B
BRN GRN/BLU GRY LT BLU BLU/YEL GRN/YEL
21 10 22 11 C462
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
GRN GRN/BLK GRY LT BLU BLU/YEL GRN/YEL
12 C301 3 4 9 10 C517
13 PHOTO 55 PHOTO 106
VIEW 46 VIEW 35
BRN GRN/BLU GRY LT BLU BLU/YEL GRN/YEL
2 1 C312 2 1 C257 2 1 C609 2 1 C608

WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT

FRONT FRONT REAR REAR
WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR

35-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Type SH
Service Yaw
check rate Sensor Signal Signal Signal
connector sensor power Z B A G-sensor Reference
input input source input input input input voltage
(SCS) (YAW) (VCCY) (STR-Z) (STR-B) (STR-A) (G-SEN) (VCC)
9 A 8 B 16 19 21 7 A 18 B 26 A
YEL/
BLU YEL/BLU
RED/WHT GRN ORN BLU/ YEL/ BLU/ YEL
GRN WHT ORN YEL/BLU
See YEL/
PGM-FI BLU
22 11 4 5 6 17 19
C453
PHOTO 76
YEL/ VIEW 2
GRN ORN BLU/ YEL/ BLU/ YEL BLU
GRN WHT ORN
RED/WHT
9)
(** 11) C461
YEL/
8 3 C412 YEL
BLU
PHOTO 83 9 10 PHOTO 60
VIEW 26
GRN ORN BLU) YEL/ LT VIEW 33 2 C451
1 PHOTO 127
(**BLU/GRN) RED GRN
3) 4) YEL/
YEL
1 (* 2) (* 3) 4 2 BLU
3
SERVICE YAW STEERING LATERAL
CHECK RATE ANGLE G-SENSOR
CONNECTOR SENSOR SENSOR PHOTO 127
2 1
5
BLK/GRN BLK/YEL
(* 1) 8 4 C412
2) PHOTO 60 GRN/BLK
GRN/BLK YEL/BLU VIEW 33
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
3 C451
(** 10) C461 PHOTO 127
5) PHOTO 83
VIEW 26 GRN/BLK
GRN/BLK
See
PGM-FI
GRN/BLK
18 C453
PHOTO 76
GRN/BLK VIEW 2
** = ‘97 Model (Also male-female terminals are reversed)

** = ‘97-‘98 Models

35-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
ATTS CONTROL UNIT

PHOTO 80
VIEW 82
Left oil Right oil

pressure pressure Oil temp. Linear Left Right
sensor sensor sensor solenoid solenoid solenoid
input input high high control control
(POL) (POR) (TOH) (ASH) (LSOL) (RSOL)
15 5 2 B 15 3 1 A
RED/GRN RED/BLK
YEL/ YEL/BLU GRY YEL/WHT BLK/BLU BLK/WHT

BLU
8 10 11 7 14 1 3 5 C141
PHOTO 8
VIEW 43
YEL/ BLU YEL/BLU ORN YEL/RED RED/WHT YEL/GRN GRN/YEL
BLU
13 C146
6 3 10 1 8 2 12 PHOTO 123
VIEW 87
YEL/ BLU YEL/BLU ORN YEL/RED RED/WHT YEL/GRN GRN/YEL
BLU
2 3 2 3 1 2 2 2
LEFT OIL RIGHT OIL OIL LINEAR LEFT RIGHT
PRESSURE PRESSURE TEMPER- SOLE- SOLENOID SOLE-
SENSOR SENSOR ATURE NOID PHOTO 122 NOID
PHOTO 122 SENSOR
1 1 2 1 1 1
ATTS
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK BLU/WHT BLK/WHT BLK BLK
UNIT
7 11 14 4 5 9 C146
PHOTO 123
VIEW 87
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK BLU/WHT BLK/WHT BLK BLK
12 C141
9 13 2 4 6 PHOTO 8
VIEW 43
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK BRN YEL/BLK BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14.
BLK
GRN/BLK
BLK BLK
10 C144
11
C479 PHOTO 8
BLK BLK VIEW 45
(Terminals 11-13)
GRN/BLK PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
13 A 13 22 B
(SG) (TOL) (ASG) See Ground
Sensor Oil temp. Linear Distribution,
BLK
ground sensor solenoid page 14.
low ground BLK
ATTS CONTROL UNIT

PHOTO 80
VIEW 82 G101
PHOTO 21

35-5
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Automatic Transmission Controls
UNDER-HOOD DISTRIBUTOR
FUSE/RELAY IGNITION ASSEMBLY
FUSE 43 FUSE 41 Engine CONTROL PHOTO 24
CLOCK STOP HORN
BOX speed MODULE
PHOTO 5
RADIO 15A output (ICM)
7.5A (RPM)
4 C254 10 C251
PHOTO 7 WHT/YEL PHOTO 7
VIEW 20 VIEW 38 See Power
Distribution, BLU
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL page 10-11.
4 1 C136
BRAKE PHOTO 24
See Power
Distribution, SWITCH
BLU
page 10-12. Closed with brake
pedal depressed.
PHOTO 64 10 C140
3
WHT/YEL PHOTO 8
WHT/BLK VIEW 31
See ABS,
C431 Cruise Control
WHT/BLK BLU
PHOTO 57 C438
6 VIEW 48 4 PHOTO 57 (Not Used)
3 C434 UNDER-
See Power DASH
Distribution, FUSE/
page 10-12. 13 C432 RELAY
5 C431 14 C432 BOX
(Not Used) PHOTO 51
PHOTO 57 WHT/BLK PHOTO 57
VIEW 48 VIEW 49 BLU See
WHT/YEL WHT/BLK See Ignition
Brake System
WHT/BLK Lights
5 C454
13 PHOTO 76
WHT/YEL WHT/BLK VIEW 63 BLU
WHT/YEL See Power WHT/BLK
See TRANSMISSION
Distribution, PGM-FI CONTROL
WHT/YEL
page 10-12. WHT/BLK MODULE (TCM)
PHOTO 80
23 A 12 B 5 A VIEW 83
(VBU) (STOP SW) (NE)

Battery input Brake switch input Engine speed input
A/T clutch pressure control Lock-up control
solenoid valves control solenoid Shift control solenoid valves control
valve control
(LS A-) (LS A+) (LS B-) (LS B+) (LC) (SH A) (SH B) (SH C)
21 1 22 11 B 15 3 2 16 A
BLU/
WHT RED WHT/RED RED YEL BLU/YEL GRN/WHT GRN/BLK
12 11 14 13 C141 C143
PHOTO 8 7 3 2 1 PHOTO 8
BLU/ VIEW 43 GRN/WHT GRN/BLK VIEW 24
WHT RED WHT/RED YEL
RED 2 2
SHIFT SHIFT
CONTROL CONTROL
1 1 SOLENOID SOLENOID
A/T CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH BLU/YEL VALVE B VALVE C
PRESSURE PRESSURE PHOTO 32 PHOTO 32
CONTROL CONTROL 1 1
BLK BLK
SOLENOID SOLENOID
VALVE A VALVE B
2 PHOTO 34 2 PHOTO 34 BLK
1 2 C135 See Ground

YEL GRN/BLK
page 14.
LOCK-UP SHIFT
CONTROL CONTROL
SOLENOID SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE A
PHOTO 28 PHOTO 28 G101
PHOTO 21

39
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
HOT IN ON OR START
ENGINE UNDER-DASH
CONTROL FUSE 14 FUSE/RELAY
MODULE ECU BOX
Transmission PGM-FI (ECM) EAT ECU PHOTO 51
Reference control data control PHOTO 80
15A
voltage input data output See Power
VIEW 85
(VREF) (SEAF) (SEFA) Distribution,
page 10-8.
1 30 31 C 7 C432
PHOTO 57
BLK/YEL VIEW 49
LT GRN/BLK GRN/BLU GRN/YEL See Power

Distribution,
page 10-9.
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
20 18 19 B 12 25 A
(VREF) (SEAF) (SEFA) (IG1) (IG1)
TRANS-
Transmission PGM-FI MISSION
Reference CONTROL
voltage control data control data
output input Ignition input MODULE
(TCM)
Mainshaft speed Countershaft speed PHOTO 80
VIEW 83
sensor input sensor input Ground Ground Ground
(NM) (NC) (LG2) (LG1) (PG1)
10 B 26 A
9 13 14
BRN/BLK BRN/BLK BLK

See Ground See Ground
Distribution, BRN/BLK Distribution,
pages 14 pages 14
and 14-1. and 14-1.
BRN/BLK
RED BLU BRN/BLK
C479
(Terminals 1-6)
BRN/BLK PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
8 C143 4 C142
9 12 PHOTO 8 PHOTO 8
VIEW 24 VIEW 44
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
BRAIDED WIRE
BRAIDED WIRE
RED BLU BLK
2 2
11 C144
MAINSHAFT COUNTER- PHOTO 8
SPEED SHAFT VIEW 45
SENSOR SPEED BLK
PHOTO 35 SENSOR
PHOTO 30
1 1
WHT GRN
BRN/BLK BLK BRN/BLK BLK
10 11 C143
PHOTO 8
WHT GRN VIEW 24
17 8
B
(NMSG) (NCSG)
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL
Sensor Sensor MODULE
ground ground (TCM)
PHOTO 80 G101
VIEW 83 PHOTO 21
39-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
HOT IN ON OR START
ENGINE TRANS- UNDER-

CONTROL TP MISSION FUSE 13 DASH
Reference MODULE sensor Shift indicator control Indicator CONTROL METER FUSE/
(ECM) MODULE (CRUISE
voltage input control CONTROL) RELAY
(VCC2) PHOTO 80 (TPS) (LED A) (LED B) (LED C) (D4 IND) (TCM) 15A BOX
VIEW 85 PHOTO 80 See Power PHOTO 51
4 B 21 A VIEW 83 Distribution,
10 D 20 19 17 page 10-7.
4 C551
YEL/ RED/BLK PHOTO 51
BLU VIEW 54
C479
(Termi-
nals
7-10) RED/BLK BLU/ BLU/ BLU/ BLU/RED YEL
PHOTO 77 YEL GRN BLK
VIEW 65
YEL/BLU See See See Power
PGM-FI PGM-FI Distribution,
RED/BLK page 10-7.
5 7 8 9 1 C483
6 C140 PHOTO 71
PHOTO 8 VIEW 41
VIEW 31
YEL/BLU RED/BLK BLU/YEL BLU/ BLU/ BLU/RED YEL
GRN BLK
3 2 12 11 10 3 9 D
THROTTLE GAUGE
POSITION ASSEMBLY
(TP) PHOTO 66
SENSOR VIEW 84
PHOTO 47 Shift A/T
See page 89-1 Indicator See page 89 for details. Gear
1 for details. Circuit Position
Indicator
GRN/BLK
15 D
GRN/BLK
See
PGM-FI
GRN/BLK BLK
4 C140
PHOTO 8
VIEW 31
GRN/BLK
C479
(Terminals 11-13)
PHOTO 77
VIEW 65 See Ground
GRN/BLK
Distribution,
pages 14-4 and 14-5.
11 D
(SG2)
ENGINE
CONTROL
Sensor MODULE
ground (ECM) BLK
PHOTO 80
VIEW 85
G401
PHOTO 56

39-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL
Park/ Neutral Reverse Drive inputs MODULE (TCM)
neutral input input input PHOTO 80
VIEW 83
(ATP PN) (ATP N) (ATP R) (ATP D4) (ATP D3) (ATP 2) (ATP1)
10 4 11 9 8 7 6 A
LT GRN
LT GRN
See
PGM-FI RED WHT YEL GRN BLU BRN
LT GRN
10 C483
PHOTO 71 GAUGE
LT GRN VIEW 41 ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
7 D VIEW 84
A/T Gear
Position
See A/T Gear
Indicator
Position
Indicator
6 4 D
BLK/BLU RED
11 5 C483
PHOTO 71
VIEW 41
BLK/BLU RED
RED BLU
BLK/BLU BLK/BLU RED WHT GRN GRN BLU BRN BRN
See See A/T See A/T See

Interlock Gear Gear A/T Gear
System Position Position Position
Indicator Indicator Indicator
7 5 6 4 3 2 1 C141
PHOTO 8
VIEW 43
BLK/BLU RED WHT YEL GRN BLU BRN
10 8 9 7 6 5 4 C119
PHOTO 30
BLK/BLU RED WHT YEL GRN BLU BRN VIEW 30
A/T GEAR
D4
N D3 POSITION
SWITCH
R 2 PHOTO 33
P 1
RED/WHT
3 C119
PHOTO 30
RED/WHT VIEW 30
10 C141
PHOTO 8
BLK VIEW 43
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-7.
BLK
G471
PHOTO 77

39-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 46 FUSE/RELAY
INTERIOR BOX
LIGHTS PHOTO 5
(*15A)
10A
6 C251
PHOTO 7 * = ‘97-‘98 Models
WHT/BLU
VIEW 38
C456
(Terminals 1-3)
WHT/BLU PHOTO 82
VIEW 64
19 C454
PHOTO 76
WHT/BLU VIEW 63 See Power
Distribution,
8 page 10-13.

PHOTO 72
VIEW 56
6 13 12
LT GRN/RED BRN/BLK BLK
LT GRN/RED See See Ground See Ground

ABS, Distribution, Distribution,
SRS page 14-1. page 14-7.
LT GRN/RED BRN/BLK BLK TRANSMISSION

CONTROL
MODULE
(TCM)
G101 G471 PHOTO 80
7 B PHOTO 21 PHOTO 77 VIEW 83
(RXD/TXD)
Mode DLC input/ 2nd clutch
switch Shift switch input output pressure VSS Shift lock
input switch input input circuit control
(T-MODE) (T-M-) (T-M+) (OP2SW) (VSS) (ILU)
13 B 22 A
15 16 14 5 See VSS
BLK/RED BLU/YEL WHT/BLU BLU/BLK BLU/WHT WHT/GRN
6 5 4 C486 C479
PHOTO 87 (Terminals 14-16)
ORN BLU/YEL WHT/BLU VIEW 27 PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
MODE BLU/WHT
See
Mode Shift SWITCH
Switch Switch Interlock
– + System
13 9 C144
PHOTO 8
VIEW 45
BLK
BLU/BLK BLU/WHT
1 C486
PHOTO 87
BLK VIEW 27
See Ground 3
Distribution, 2ND VEHICLE
page 14-7. CLUTCH Vehicle SPEED
BLK PRESSURE speed SENSOR
SWITCH output (VSS)
G471 PHOTO 22 PHOTO 22
PHOTO 77

39-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Horns
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 41 FUSE/RELAY
STOP HORN BOX
15A PHOTO 5
10 C251
PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 * = ’97-’98 Models
WHT/YEL
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-11.
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL
5)
(*3) 2
HORN
RELAY
PHOTO 53
(*5) 1
3)
LT GRN/BLU
BLU/RED BLU/RED
LT GRN/BLU
10 11 C201
9 PHOTO 75
VIEW 39
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL
2 LEFT 2 RIGHT
HORN HORN
SECURITY PHOTO 3 PHOTO 1
LT GRN/BLU CONTROL
3 C409 UNIT
PHOTO 60 Page 133-1 1 1
VIEW 40
BLU/RED BLU/RED
BLU/RED Canada
2) 9
8 C201
(*3) PHOTO 75
CABLE VIEW 39
REEL
PHOTO 63
BLK BLK
See
Cruise Control
GRY or BLK
STEERING
BLU/RED BLU/RED WHEEL See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-4.
BLK
LEFT RIGHT
HORN HORN
SWITCH SWITCH
BLK BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

40
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ON HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER- UNDER-
HOOD FUSE 9 FUSE 13 DASH
FUSE 41
FUSE/ R/C MIRROR METER FUSE/
STOP HORN (ABS, ATTS) (CRUISE
15A RELAY 7.5A CONTROL) RELAY
BOX See Power 15A
See Power BOX
PHOTO 5 Distribution, Distribution, PHOTO 51
10 C251 page 10-4. page 10-7.
PHOTO 7
WHT/YEL VIEW 38 1 C438 4 C551
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51
See Power YEL VIEW 54
Distribution, See
page 10-11. Dash See Power Distribution,
Lights page 10-7.
WHT/YEL
YEL/BLK
4 RED/BLK YEL
BRAKE
SWITCH C456
Closed with (Terminals
11-13) YEL YEL
pedal depressed. PHOTO 82
PHOTO 64 VIEW 64 11 B 4 9 C
3
GAUGE
See See ASSEMBLY
Dash Indicators PHOTO 66
WHT/BLK
Lights ABS VIEW 84
INDICATOR
LIGHT
See
Cruise
Control,
Brake ABS Indicator Circuit USA
Lights
See
Indicators Canada
10 B 4 A 6 C
BLK BLU/WHT
WHT/BLK YEL/BLK RED
page 14-5. 12 C402
PHOTO 65
See VIEW 53
Dash BLK
BLU/WHT
Lights
11 G401
10 B PHOTO 56 1 A
(STOP) (IG2) (WARN)
ABS
CONTROL
Brake switch input Ignition input ABS indicator UNIT
light control PHOTO 83
Speed sensor inputs VIEW 79
(FLW (–)) (FLW (+)) (FRW (–)) (FRW (+)) (RLW (–)) (RLW (+)) (RRW (–)) (RRW (+))
6 7 8 9 18 17 20 19 B
GRY LT BLU BLU/YEL GRN/YEL
BRN GRN/BLU
21 10 22 11 C462
PHOTO 83
12 C301 GRN GRN/BLK VIEW 70
13 PHOTO 55
VIEW 46
3 4 9 10 C517
BRN GRN/BLU PHOTO 106
VIEW 35
2 1 C312 2 1 C257 2 1 C609 2 1 C608

WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT

FRONT FRONT REAR REAR
WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR

44
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
ATTS
Wheel speed inputs CONTROL
UNIT
(FLP) (FRP) (RLP) (RRP) PHOTO 80
VIEW 82
10 8 6 4 A
WHT/RED WHT/BLU GRY/WHT GRY/RED Type
10 9 8 7 C453 SH
PHOTO 76
WHT/RED WHT/BLU GRY/WHT GRY/RED VIEW 2
3 5 13 15 B
(FLP) (FRP) (RLP) (RRP) ABS
CONTROL
Wheel speed outputs UNIT
DLC PHOTO 83
VIEW 79
Brake/park Service check input/
Ground Ground Ground Ground input connector input output
(GND1) (GND2) (GND3) (GND4) (PARK) (SCS) (DLC)
2 7 A 1 12 4 14 22 B
RED/WHT LT GRN/RED
RED/WHT LT GRN/RED
See SRS See
SRS
RED/WHT
LT GRN/RED
2 C454 2) C453
GRN/RED RED/WHT PHOTO 76 (Type SH, A/T 14) PHOTO 76
VIEW 63 See VIEW 2
PGM-FI, LT GRN/RED See A/T
LT GRN/RED
RED/WHT
ATTS Controls,
ATTS
1 LT GRN/RED
SERVICE CHECK 6
CONNECTOR See DATA LINK
PHOTO 72 PGM-FI CONNECTOR (DLC)
PHOTO 72
2 VIEW 56
13 12 See Ground
GRN/BLK
BRN/BLK BLK Distribution,
C479 See Ground page 14-7.
(Terminals Distribution,
See Brake 11-13) page 14-1.
System GRN/BLK PHOTO 77
Indicator VIEW 65
11 D
Light BRN/
BLK BLK BLK BLK (SG2)
ENGINE
BLK BLK
Sensor CONTROL
ground MODULE
(ECM) G101 G471
VIEW 85
C456
GRN/RED
(Terminals 17-20)
PHOTO 82
7 C302 GRN/RED VIEW 64
PHOTO 55
GRN/RED VIEW 47
C309 13
GRN/RED PHOTO 20
DAYTIME
BRAKE FLUID Brake indicator RUNNING
LEVEL SWITCH output LIGHTS
Closed with low Parking brake CONTROL
fluid level. switch input UNIT
PHOTO 20 VIEW 52
Canada
BLK 6
C310
PHOTO 20 GRN/RED)
BLK
(Canada GRN/WHT)
See Ground 20 C454
page 14-3. GRN/RED VIEW 63
PARKING
BLK
BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with parking
brake applied.
G404 G403 G301 PHOTO 87

44-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
ABS FUSE/RELAY
ABS CONTROL FUSE 40
BOX
fail-safe
relay control
UNIT
PHOTO 83
( +B
ABS
) PHOTO 5
(FSR) VIEW 79 20A
21 B 7 C251
YEL/GRN PHOTO 7
WHT/GRN VIEW 38
* = ‘97-‘98 Models
5)
(* 3) 2
ABS
FAIL-SAFE
RELAY
PHOTO 53
(* 5)
3) 1
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
See Ground BRN/BLK

BLK Distribution,
page 14-6.
11 C301
PHOTO 55
VIEW 46
BRN/BLK
G402
PHOTO 84 10 C314
PHOTO 17
VIEW 32
BRN/BLK
10
Left Left Right Right Left Left

Front Front Front Front Rear Rear
ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS ABS
Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid
(Out) (In) (Out) (In) (Out) (In)
8 4 5 1 6 2
YEL/BLU RED/BLU YEL/BLK RED/BLK YEL/WHT RED/WHT
8 4 5 1 6 2 C314
PHOTO 17
YEL/BLU RED/BLU YEL/BLK RED/BLK YEL/WHT RED/WHT VIEW 32
6 3 4 2 1
5 C301
PHOTO 55
YEL/BLU RED/BLU YEL/BLK RED/BLK YEL/WHT RED/WHT
VIEW 46
4 9 6 11 5 10 A
(FL-OUT) (FL-IN) (FR-OUT) (FR-IN) (RL-OUT) (RL-IN)
Left front ABS Right front ABS Left rear ABS

solenoid control solenoid control solenoid control

44-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-
HOOD
FUSE 31 FUSE/
(ABS MOTOR)
RELAY
30A BOX
PHOTO 5
BRN/BLK
C251
PHOTO 7
8 VIEW 38
ABS
PUMP
MOTOR
RELAY
PHOTO 6
FUSE 48
(ABS UNIT)
7.5A
6 C252 9 C251 3 C254

YEL/RED PHOTO 7 PHOTO 7 PHOTO 7
WHT/BLU
YEL/RED
Type SH See
ATTS
10 C301
PHOTO 55
ABS VIEW 46
MODULATOR
Right UNIT
Right PHOTO 17 WHT/BLU
Rear Rear VIEW 36
ABS ABS
Solenoid Solenoid
(Out) (In) 1
ABS
YEL/RED GRN/ORN PUMP
M
MOTOR
7 PHOTO 17
3
BLK/ORN YEL
2
7 C314
3 PHOTO 17
BLK/ORN YEL VIEW 32
BLK
14 7 C301
YEL
PHOTO 55
BLK/ORN VIEW 46
3 8 12 A 16 B
ABS
(RR-OUT) (RR-IN) (PMR) (MCK) CONTROL
Pump Motor UNIT
Right rear ABS motor check PHOTO 83
solenoid control relay VIEW 79
control
G302
PHOTO 16

44-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
HOT IN ON OR START WARNING

SRS
FUSE To avoid accidental deployment and possible injury,
FUSE 23 FUSE 24 BLOCK always disconnect the driver’s and front passenger’s
(FUEL PUMP) (SRS) PHOTO 51
15A 10A airbag connectors (automatically shorted) before
See Power Distribution, working near any SRS wiring.
page 10-10.
CAUTION: Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or
1 C801 has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be
2 PHOTO 51
careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could
accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
GRY GRY
or GRN or GRN
GRY or GRN
7 3 6
SRS
Ignition Ignition SRS indicator UNIT
input input light control PHOTO 70
(VA) (VB) VIEW 57
Driver’s Passenger’s Service MES

airbag airbag DLC check connector
control control input/ connector input Ground
output input
1 13 10 14 15 9 8 18 17 16
GRY GRY GRY
GRY GRY or GRN or GRN or GRN
or GRN or GRN 3 2 C416
PHOTO 61
1 C806 RED/WHT GRY
2 (Has built-in or GRN
short contact)
PHOTO 74 RED/
GRY GRY RED RED
WHT
or GRN or GRN
1 2
See SRS MEMORY
ABS ERASE SIGNAL
LT GRN/RED (MES) CONNECTOR
PHOTO 61
FRONT LT GRN/
PASSENGER’S RED
AIRBAG
PHOTO 74
2 C804 LT GRN/RED RED/WHT GRY GRY
1 (Has built-in short contact) or or
GRY GRY PHOTO 62 GRN GRN
or BLK or BLK
2) C453 2 C454
CABLE (Type SH or A/T 14) PHOTO 76 PHOTO 76
REEL VIEW 2 VIEW 63
PHOTO 63 LT GRN/RED RED/WHT
STEERING LT GRN/
GRY GRY RED
or BLK or BLK
WHEEL LT GRN/RED RED/
1 C7 WHT
2 See A/T See
(Has built-in
short contact) Controls, PGM-FI,
RED RED PHOTO 63 ATTS ATTS
6 1
DATA LINK SERVICE
CONNECTOR CHECK
(DLC) CONNECTOR
PHOTO 72 PHOTO 72
DRIVER’S AIRBAG VIEW 56
G801
PHOTO 70

47
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER BOX
(CRUISE PHOTO 51
CONTROL)
15A
See Power Distribution,
page 10-7.
4 C551
PHOTO 51
YEL VIEW 54
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
YEL
4 C
GRY
or GRN
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
SRS VIEW 84
Indicator
1 C416 Circuit
PHOTO 61
SRS INDICATOR
LIGHT
BLU
See
Indicators
14 C402 5 C 4 A
PHOTO 65
VIEW 53
BLU BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-5.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

47-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Multiplex Control System
HOT WITH HEADLIGHT

SWITCH IN PARK OR HEAD HOT IN ON OR START HOT AT ALL TIMES
FUSE/RELAY FUSE 43 FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 10 FUSE 13
BOX CLOCK BOX
TAIL LIGHT METER RADIO
15A (CRUISE PHOTO 51 PHOTO 5
7.5A
CONTROL)
See Headlight 15A
Switch, 4 C254
page 100-2. PHOTO 7
VIEW 20
1 C432
PHOTO 57
VIEW 49 WHT/YEL
See Power
Distribution, YEL
page 10-7. WHT/YEL
To B on
page 50-2.
WHT/YEL
To C on
page 50-3.
To A on
page 50-2.
See Power Door

WHT/YEL
See Rear Locks (’99-’01 Models)
Window
Defogger
GRN/ORN RED/WHT
BRN/
YEL
C431
6 PHOTO 57
8 VIEW 48
See Rear See Power

Window Distribution,
Defogger page 10-12.
2 13 10 3 12
A 9 B
Lights ON Ignition Rear defogger Battery Unlock – Lock –
input input relay control input
Unlock/lock input
Power window Driver’s door Rear window

relay control OPEN input Ground defogger ON input
1 A
14 7 9
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-5.
16 C551 6 C551
(Not 9 7 C434 (Not 16 4 C433

Used) PHOTO 57 Used) PHOTO 57
VIEW 62 VIEW 69
WHT/RED GRN YEL/WHT
BLK See Ground

Distribution,
See See Ignition Key page 14-4. See Rear
Power Reminder, Entry Window
Windows Light Control System, Defogger
Door Courtesy Lights
G401
PHOTO 56

50
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
UNDER-
FUSE 41 FUSE 44 HOOD
STOP HORN DOOR FUSE/
15A LOCK RELAY
10A
BOX
PHOTO 5
10 C251 5 C254
WHT/YEL PHOTO 7 PHOTO 7
See Power VIEW 38 VIEW 20
Distribution,
page 10-11. WHT/YEL WHT
5 C410
PHOTO 60
WHT/YEL VIEW 1
7 B
See Interlock
System
Ignition
Key
Light
5 B STEERING
WHT LOCK
See Wiper/washer PHOTO 62
1 C410 VIEW 78
To page 50-2. WHT/ PHOTO 60
BLK VIEW 1
WHT/
BLK WHT WHT
BLU/WHT GRN/RED GRN BLK/YEL
’99-’00
C437 C980 PNK LT GRN WHT/BLK Models
C436 PHOTO 57
15 PHOTO 51 See Ceiling
4 PHOTO 57 4 VIEW 25 14 VIEW 67 Light
See
Wiper/
washer
5 6 12 11 A 7 6 2 3 C
1 B
Park Intermittent Intermittent Washer A-D D-A Ignition key/ceiling
input wiper control ON ON line line light control
input input Battery input
Multiplex Door lock (Door lock)
control in- Engine oil actuator control
spection con- Engine Key in Driver’s pressure Ground
nector input Door running ignition seat belt switch (Door
D-line input input switch input input Lock + Unlock + locks)
13 B 5 C DRIVER’S
8 2 3 14 7 8 4
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
LT BLU BRN WHT/BLU BLU/YEL RED/ YEL/ WHT/ LT GRN/ BLK UNDER-DASH
BLU RED RED RED FUSE/RELAY
2 BOX
PHOTO 51
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT See See See See
INSPECTION Charging Ignition Key Seat Belt Engine Oil See Power
To D on System Reminder Reminder Pressure
CONNECTOR Door Locks
page 50-3. Indicator
PHOTO 59 ’97-’98
1 Light ’99-’00
BLK See Ground
Distribution, See Ground BLK
page 14-6. Distribution,
page 14-6.
BLK BLK
G402
PHOTO 84
50-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
HOT WITH POWER WINDOW

RELAY ENERGIZED
FUSE 16
P/W ASSISTANT
20A
7 C431
PHOTO 57
VIEW 48
BLU/BLK
BLU/BLK
See Power
Windows
From A on See From B on

See From page 50-1. Interlock See Dash
page 50. page 50. and Console
Wiper/washer System
Lights
PASSENGER’S
YEL GRN/WHT GRN/YEL PNK LT GRN GRN/YEL WHT/GRN WHT/YEL BLU/BLK RED MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
(B (A UNIT
10 3 1 2 13 9 12 10 PHOTO 83
7 (D in S/M) 15 (E in S/M) VIEW 80
Ignition A-D D-A Shift lock Shift lock Battery Power Brightness
input Intermittent line line solenoid circuit input window control
dwell timer control input relay input
input
Passenger’s
Power door lock and Passen-
window Passenger’s Dash lights key cylinder ger’s
Ground Park main power window brightness switch input door
(Inter- Ground position switch motor control control OPEN
lock) (Dash lights) Ground input input Unlock Lock input
14 (A 9 (B
19 20 16 11 2 1 8 5 4 11
(E in (D in
S/M) S/M)
BLK BLK BLK BLK/ BLU/ BLU/ BLU RED/ WHT/ BLU/ BLK/ GRN/
BLU RED YEL WHT RED ORN WHT ORN
See To G See Entry Light

Interlock on page See Power See Dash See Power Control System,
System 50-3. Windows and Console Door Locks Power Windows
A/T Lights
’97-’98
Models
page 14-6. page 14-4.
BLK BLK
BLK
BLK
G402 G401
PHOTO 84 PHOTO 56

50-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 15 BOX
P/W DRIVER PHOTO 51
20A
13 C433
PHOTO 57
VIEW 69 From C on From D on From G on
page 50. page 50-1. page 50-2.
GRN/WHT WHT/YEL
C456
(Terminals 7-10)
PHOTO 82
VIEW 64
WHT/YEL BRN BLU/RED

See Dash and
See Power Console Lights
Distribution,
page 10-12.
4 1 2
5 C430 RED/
PHOTO 97 BLK
GRN/WHT WHT/YEL BRN BLU/RED VIEW 73
16 4 11 20
19 (F in S/M)
DOOR
Power window Battery Door Main + MULTIPLEX
relay input input D-line switch CONTROL
output Power win- UNIT
dow master PHOTO
VIEW 68
94
Driver’s door Driver’s door switch illu-

Driver’s mination
lock knob lock switch door key Driver’s power
switch input input cylinder window motor Ground Ground
switch control (Main (Power
Ground Unlock Lock Unlock Lock input switch) windows) –
14 (F in S/M)
8 18 7 17 6 9 2 5 1 12 10
BLK BLK/WHT PNK GRN/RED GRN/BLU BLU RED/YEL RED/BLU RED/WHT BLK BLK RED
See Dash and

See Power Door Locks See Power Windows Console Lights
’97-’98
’99-’00

page 14-4. page 14-6.
BLK BLK
22 C430 21 C430
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97
VIEW 73 VIEW 73
BLK BLK BLK BLK
BLK BLK
G401 G402
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 84

50-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Blower Controls
HOT IN ON HOT AT ALL TIMES
FUSE 9 FUSE/RELAY FUSE 35 FUSE/RELAY
R/C MIRROR BOX HEATER BOX
(ABS, ATTS) PHOTO 51 MOTOR PHOTO 5
7.5A 40A
3 C253
PHOTO 7
See Power
Distribution, WHT/BLK
page 10-4.
C436
2 PHOTO 57
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
PHOTO 54
See Ground Distribution, page 14-5.

16 C433 11 C432
PHOTO 57 YEL/BLK
PHOTO 57
VIEW 69 VIEW 49
1 C401
PHOTO 65
YEL/BLK
1 C570
PHOTO 71
YEL/BLK
1
BLOWER
MOTOR
M PHOTO 81
BLU/RED
BLU/RED
5
BLOWER
BLK MOTOR
RESISTOR
PHOTO 73
BLU/RED
1
2 3
BLU/ BLU/
BLU
YEL BLK
5 1 2 3
HEATER
See Ground 3 FAN
2 SWITCH
Distribution, 4
page 14-4. 1 VIEW 13
6 GRN See A/C
OFF
Compressor
Controls
4
BLK BLK See Ground

Distribution,
page 14-9.
G401 G901
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 75

60
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Air Delivery
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ON
UNDER-HOOD UNDER-DASH
CLOCK BOX R/C MIRROR BOX
RADIO PHOTO 5 (ABS, ATTS) See Power PHOTO 51
7.5A 7.5A Distribution,
page 10-4.
4 C254 8 C432
PHOTO 7 YEL/BLK PHOTO 57
WHT/YEL VIEW 20 VIEW 49 See Power
Distribution,
See Power page 10-5.
YEL/BLK
Distribution,
page 10-12. 4 C403
PHOTO 65
YEL/BLK VIEW 60
WHT/YEL YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
8 3 C569
PHOTO 71
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK VIEW 28
YEL/BLK
See Power YEL/BLK

5
Distribution,
page 10-5. RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
MOTOR
M PHOTO 73
See Dash YEL/BLK

and Console
Lights REC
FRESH REC
FRESH
1
RED/BLK 2
GRN/RED GRN/WHT
6 8 4 11
20
Dimming Circuit
and 5V Regulator
See Rear
See A/C Window Defogger,
HEATER Compressor A/C Compressor
CONTROL Controls Controls
PANEL
LIGHT
Fresh/
Recirculate
A/C A/C REC FRESH
ON OFF and A/C
Switches
5 2
RED GRN
See Dash and See Fans, A/C

Console Lights Compressor Controls

61
s

s
t
+ –
Air Delivery
MODE
CONTROL
VENT + DEF + MOTOR
M PHOTO 68
VIEW 37
VENT B/L HEAT H/D DEF
2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
LT GRN/WHT GRN/BLK GRN/YEL LT GRN/BLK BLU/GRN BLU/BLK BLU/WHT LT GRN/RED BLU
7 14 15 16 17 18 19 9 3
HEATER
CONTROL
PANEL
Driving Circuit VIEW 71
Vent BI-LEV Heat H/DEF Defrost

Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
13
BLK BLK See Ground

Distribution,
page 14-9.
G901
PHOTO 75

61-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Air Delivery
Mode Selection
Mode selection is controlled by the mode switches in

the heater control panel and the mode control motor.
When you select a specific mode, voltage is applied
through the dimming control circuit to the LED, which
comes on, indicating the mode selected. Ground is
provided to the mode control motor through that
mode switch. The motor then runs until the air control
door reaches the proper position.
Fresh/Recirculation Selection
When you press the fresh/recirculation button, a

ground signal is sent from the heater control panel to
the recirculation control motor. The motor then runs
until the recirculation door reaches the opposite
position. When the fresh/recirculation button is in the
REC position, battery voltage is applied through the
dimming control circuit to the recirculate LED, and
the LED comes on.
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 22, Heater
and Air Conditioning) for specific tests or
troubleshooting procedures.

61-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
A/C Compressor Controls
R/C MIRROR BOX CONDENSER FAN
BOX
(ABS, ATTS) PHOTO 51 20A PHOTO 5
7.5A
page 10-4.
8 C432 1 C251
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 7
YEL/BLK VIEW 49 VIEW 38
See Power YEL/BLK

To A on
Distribution, WHT
facing page.
page 10-5.
YEL/BLK
11 13 C302
PHOTO 55
WHT VIEW 47
C306
(Terminals 11-13)
YEL/BLK WHT WHT PHOTO 58
VIEW 59
See Power
Distribution,
1 page 10-13.
2
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY
PHOTO 15
4 3
PNK/BLU
14 C302
PHOTO 55
PNK/BLU VIEW 47
4 C454 RED
PHOTO 76
VIEW 63
PNK/BLU
17 A
ENGINE C322
(ACC) PHOTO 14
Compressor CONTROL RED
A/C clutch MODULE
request (ECM) THERMAL
(ACS) control PROTECTOR
PHOTO 80
VIEW 85 PHOTO 39
5 C
BLU/ORN
RED
3 C454 C15
PHOTO 39
PHOTO 76
VIEW 63 RED/BLK
BLU/ORN
BLU/ORN A/C
See Fans COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
BLU/ORN
BLK
To B on
facing page.

62
s

s
t
+ –
HOT AT ALL TIMES From B on From A on

facing page. facing page.
UNDER-
FUSE 43 HOOD
CLOCK FUSE/
RADIO RELAY BLU/ORN
7.5A
BOX YEL/BLK
PHOTO 5 7 C201
PHOTO 75 4 C403
BLU/ORN
VIEW 39
4 C254 1
PHOTO 65
PHOTO 7 VIEW 60
WHT/ YEL/BLK
VIEW 20 A/C PRESSURE
YEL SWITCH
LOW HIGH Low: Open below
200 kPa (28 psi).
See Power High: Open above YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
Distribution, 2 3200 kPa (455 psi).
page 10-12. YEL/BLU
PHOTO 1 8 3 C569
PHOTO 71
6 C201 VIEW 28
PHOTO 75 YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
YEL/BLU VIEW 39
YEL/BLK See Power
Distribution,
14 C403 page 10-5.
PHOTO 65
YEL/BLU VIEW 60
6 C569 YEL/BLK
PHOTO 71
YEL/BLU YEL/BLK
VIEW 28
1 3
WHT/
YEL A/C
THERMOSTAT
Off below 3_C (37_F).
PHOTO 78
2
THERMISTOR
BLU/RED
1 8
20
HEATER
CONTROL
PANEL
Dimming Circuit VIEW 71
and 5V Regulator
See Air Delivery,
Rear Window
Defogger
A/C On
See Air Indicator
Delivery
A/C
REC FRESH A/C A/C
Switch See Air
ON OFF Delivery
2
GRN 13
6
HEATER
2
1 3
FAN
SWITCH
VIEW 13
OFF 4 BLK
4
BLK
G901
PHOTO 75

62-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Battery voltage is supplied through fuse 45 to the
A/C compressor clutch relay contacts at all times.
With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is applied
to the coil of the A/C compressor clutch relay
through fuse 9. When you push the A/C switch ON,
and the heater fan switch is in position 1, 2, 3, or 4,
a “ground” input is provided to the engine control
module (ECM) through the A/C thermostat and the
A/C pressure switch.
The A/C compressor clutch relay is grounded by the
ECM. When energized, the A/C compressor clutch
relay allows battery voltage to turn on the A/C
compressor clutch.
A/C Thermostat
The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator

housing. The A/C thermostat turns off the A/C
compressor clutch if the temperature at the
evaporator goes below 3_C (37_F). This prevents
condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins
and blocking the air delivery into the passenger
compartment. The blower motor will keep running
when the thermostat turns off the compressor.
A/C Pressure Switch
The A/C pressure switch is located in the condenser

outlet line where refrigerant is in a high
temperature/high pressure liquid state. The switch
will sense abnormally high or low pressure, and
open the circuit. This removes ground, and the
compressor will stop running.
Thermal Protector
The thermal protector is located on the A/C

compressor. If this protector senses high
temperature in the compressor, its switch will open,
turning the compressor off. Once the compressor
cools, the switch will close and the compressor will
begin running again.
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 22,
Air Conditioning) for specific tests or

62-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Fans
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
HOT IN ON BOX HOT AT ALL TIMES
PHOTO 51
FUSE 9 UNDER-
HOOD
R/C MIRROR
(ABS, ATTS) FUSE 45 FUSE 47 FUSE/
7.5A CONDENSER COOLING RELAY
See Power FAN FAN BOX
20A 20A PHOTO 5
Distribution,
page 10-4.
1 C251
PHOTO 7
8 C432 VIEW 38
PHOTO 57 WHT
YEL/BLK VIEW 49 YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK
YEL/ See Power
BLK Distribution,
YEL/BLK
page 10-5. YEL/BLK
10 C302
13 PHOTO 55
VIEW 47
To A on
facing page. WHT C306
(Terminals 11-13) C252
PHOTO 58 PHOTO 7
YEL/WHT
VIEW 59 4 VIEW 29
WHT WHT
See Power
1 Distribution,
2 page 10-13.
CONDENSER RADIA-
FAN RELAY TOR
PHOTO 15 FAN
RELAY
PHOTO 6
4 3
GRN
12 C302 6 C254 8 C252

GRN VIEW 20 VIEW 29
GRN VIEW 47 GRN
BLU/BLK
GRN
GRN 1 C201
15 C454 PHOTO 75
PHOTO 76 VIEW 39
2 GRN VIEW 63
A/C
DIODE
PHOTO 76 GRN BLU/BLK
BLU/YEL
27 A
1 (FANC) ENGINE
GRN
Fan CONTROL
BLU/ORN MODULE
control
(ECM)
PHOTO 80
VIEW 85 2 C207
1 C144 PHOTO 13
PHOTO 8 BLU
2 C323 To B on GRN VIEW 45
PHOTO 38 facing page. 2 RADIATOR
BLU/BLK FAN
RADIATOR M MOTOR
CONDENSER FAN PHOTO 12
See Ground FAN SWITCH
Distribution, M MOTOR Closed above
PHOTO 12 BLK
page 14-3. 95C (203F). 1 C207
1 PHOTO 23 PHOTO 13
BLK
BLK
1 C323 See Ground See Ground
BLK Distribution,
page 14. BLK page 14-2.
C306
(Terminals 1-10)
PHOTO 58 BLK
BLK VIEW 59
G301 G101 G201


63
s

s
t
+ –
Fans
HOT AT ALL TIMES From B on From A on

UNDER-
FUSE 43 HOOD
CLOCK FUSE/
RADIO RELAY ENGINE
7.5A
BLU/ORN BLU/ORN 5 (ACS) CONTROL
BOX A/C YEL/BLK
PHOTO 5 MODULE
request (ECM)
BLU/ORN C 4 C403
4 C254 7 C201 PHOTO 80 PHOTO 65
BLU/ORN PHOTO 75 YEL/BLK
WHT/ VIEW 20 VIEW 39
1
YEL
A/C PRESSURE
SWITCH
See Power LOW HIGH Low: Open below YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
Distribution, 200 kPa (28 psi).
page 10-12. High: Open above 8 3 C569
2 3200 kPa (455 psi). PHOTO 71
PHOTO 1 VIEW 28
YEL/BLU YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
6 C201 YEL/BLK See Power
YEL/BLU page 10-5.
VIEW 39
14 C403
PHOTO 65 YEL/BLK
YEL/BLU VIEW 60
YEL/BLK
6 C569
YEL/BLU PHOTO 71
WHT/ VIEW 28 3
YEL 1
A/C
THERMOSTAT
Off below 3C (37F).
PHOTO 78
2
THERMISTOR
BLU/RED
1 8
20
HEATER
CONTROL
PANEL
Dimming Circuit VIEW 71
and 5V Regulator
See Air Delivery,
Rear Window
Defogger
A/C On
See Air Indicator
Delivery
A/C
REC FRESH A/C A/C
Switch See Air
ON OFF Delivery
2
GRN 13
6
HEATER
2
1 3
FAN
SWITCH
VIEW 13
OFF 4 BLK
4
BLK
G901
PHOTO 75

63-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Fans
Voltage is provided at all times to the radiator fan
relay contacts through fuse 47 and to the condenser
fan relay through fuse 45. With the ignition switch in
ON (II), voltage is provided to the coils of the relays
through fuse 9.
The relays are grounded through the radiator fan
switch, by the engine control module (ECM), or
when you push the A/C switch ON and put
theheater fan switch to 1, 2, 3, or 4.
The radiator fan switch grounds the relays when the
engine coolant temperature exceeds 95C (203F).
The switch reopens when the coolant temperature
decreases 2-7C (4-13F).
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 10, Cooling)

63-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Rear Window Defogger
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ON HOT IN ON
UNDER- UNDER-DASH
FUSE 34 HOOD FUSE 11 FUSE 9 FUSE/RELAY
REAR FUSE/ REAR DEFROSTER RELAY R/C MIRROR BOX
DEFROSTER 7.5A (ABS, ATTS)
40A RELAY 7.5A See Power PHOTO 51
BOX Distribution,
PHOTO 5 page 10-4.
1 C433
2 C253 (Not 8 C432
PHOTO 7 YEL/BLK PHOTO 57
Used) VIEW 49

page 10-5.
YEL/BLK
8
HEATER
CONTROL
PANEL
Dimming Circuit and 5V Regulator VIEW 71
(see page 61 for details)
See Air Delivery,

WHT/GRN A/C Compressor Controls
On Rear
Indicator Defogger
OFF
Switch
ON
See
Air Delivery
12 10 13
BRN/YEL YEL/WHT BLK
2 C569
5 PHOTO 71 BLK See Ground
BRN/YEL YEL/WHT VIEW 28 Distribution,
16 15 C403 page 14-9.
PHOTO 65 G901
VIEW 60 PHOTO 75
BRN/YEL YEL/WHT
C431 C433
C436 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57
1 PHOTO 57 8 VIEW 48 4 VIEW 69
UNDER-DASH
9 A FUSE/RELAY
REAR DRIVER’S BOX
Rear defogger MULTIPLEX PHOTO 51
WINDOW switch ON input
DEFOGGER CONTROL
RELAY Rear defogger UNIT
PHOTO 54 relay control PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
10 A
16 C434
PHOTO 57
BLK/GRN VIEW 62
15 C462
PHOTO 83
BLK/GRN VIEW 70
A
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
COIL
PHOTO 104
1 B
2
BLK/GRN A B BLK
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
64
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Rear Window Defogger

Voltage is applied at all times through fuse 34 to the
rear window defogger relay. With the ignition switch
in ON (II), voltage is applied through fuse 11 to the
rear window defogger relay and the defogger ON
indicator.
When you push the defogger switch once, a path to
ground is provided for the rear window defogger
relay and the defogger ON indicator through the
driver’s multiplex control unit. The defogger ON
indicator light comes on and the rear window relay
contacts close. Voltage is applied to the defogger
grid on the inside surface of the rear window, and the
grid heats the rear window to remove any fog from
the glass.
You can turn the defogger off by pushing the switch
a second time or by turning the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). A timer in the driver’s multiplex control
unit will automatically turn the defogger off after it
has been on continuously for 20 to 30 minutes.

64-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Brake System Indicator Light
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER BOX
(CRUISE CONTROL) See Power PHOTO 51
15A
Distribution,
page 10-7.
4 C551
YEL PHOTO 51
VIEW 54
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
YEL
9 C
GAUGE
See Indicators ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
VIEW 84
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LIGHT
! P
USA Canada
Type SH
1 C 5 A
WHT/BLU GRN/RED ABS IMMOBI- ATTS
Brake/ CONTROL Brake/ LIZER Brake/ CONTROL
See Charging 1 C403 park UNIT park CONTROL park UNIT
input PHOTO 83 input UNIT input PHOTO 80
System, PHOTO 65 VIEW 79 VIEW 82
VIEW 60 PHOTO 61
page 22. VIEW 76
4 B 7 A 6 B
WHT/BLU GRN/RED
3
GRN/RED GRN/RED GRN/RED 3 C453
L
PHOTO 76
VIEW 2
GRN/RED
ALTERNATOR C456
PHOTO 82
GRN/RED VIEW 64
GRN/RED
7 C302
PHOTO 55
GRN/RED VIEW 47
13
C309
PHOTO 20 DAYTIME
GRN/RED RUNNING
LIGHTS
BRAKE FLUID See CONTROL
LEVEL SWITCH Headlights UNIT
Closed with VIEW 52
low fluid level. Canada
PHOTO 20 6
BLK
C310 GRN/RED)
PHOTO 20 (Canada GRN/WHT)
BLK
20 C454
PHOTO 76
See Ground VIEW 63
Distribution, GRN/RED
page 14-3.
PARKING BRAKE
BLK SWITCH
Closed with
parking brake
G301 applied.
PHOTO 16 PHOTO 87

71
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Brake System Indicator Light

The brake system indicator light comes on to alert
the driver that the parking brake is applied, or that
the brake fluid level is low. It also comes on as a
bulb test when the engine is cranked.
Parking Brake

voltage is applied through fuse 13 to the brake
system indicator light. When you apply the parking
brake, the switch closes and provides a ground for
the light, and the light comes on to remind the driver
that the parking brake is applied.
Brake Fluid Level

system indicator light. If the brake fluid level is low,
the brake fluid level switch closes, providing ground
to the circuit. The brake system indicator light then
comes on, alerting the driver to a low brake fluid
level in the master cylinder. (Check brake pad wear
before adding fluid.)
Bulb Check
With the ignition switch in START (III), battery

system indicator light. The alternator provides
ground, which turns on the indicator light until the
engine begins running. The light comes on while the
engine is cranking to test the brake system indicator
light bulb. See Charging System for further details.

71-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-
DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/
METER RELAY
(CRUISE BOX
CONTROL) PHOTO 51
15A
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
4 C551
ALTERNATOR PHOTO 51
YEL VIEW 54
VOLTAGE REGULATOR PHOTO 37
C559
(Terminals 7-10)
L PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
YEL
See Power
3 Distribution,
page 10-7.
WHT/BLU YEL
9 C142 9 C
PHOTO 8 GAUGE
VIEW 44 See Indicators ASSEMBLY
WHT/BLU
PHOTO 66
LOW ENGINE VIEW 84
8) C482 OIL PRESSURE
(*9) PHOTO 71 INDICATOR
VIEW 34 LIGHT
WHT/BLU
WHT/BLU
See Charging
System
7 C
WHT/BLU
YEL/RED
16 C402
PHOTO 65 1 C482
WHT/BLU VIEW 53 PHOTO 71
VIEW 34
YEL/RED
13 A 2 B
DRIVER’S
Ignition Engine MULTIPLEX
input running CONTROL
input UNIT * = Type SH and all
PHOTO 58 ’99-’01 Models
VIEW 81
5 YEL/RED
6 YEL/RED
Engine oil
pressure
switch input C C454
PHOTO 76
VIEW 63 YEL/
RED
2 C144
PHOTO 8
YEL/ VIEW 45
RED
All Except
Type SH Type SH
YEL/RED YEL/RED
T103
ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE PRESSURE
SWITCH SWITCH
Open above Open above
29 kPa (4.3 psi). 29 kPa (4.3 psi).
PHOTO 43

72
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light

The low engine oil pressure indicator light works in
two ways: it flashes continuously following a
momentary loss of pressure, or it goes on and stays
on with a complete loss of engine oil pressure.
When the engine first starts, before its oil pressure
rises above 4.3 psi, voltage is applied to the closed
and grounded engine oil pressure switch, and the
light comes on to test the bulb.
With the engine running, voltage is applied at the
WHT/BLU wire of the driver’s multiplex control unit.
With normal engine oil pressure, the engine oil
pressure switch is open and the low oil pressure
indicator light does not come on. If the engine oil
pressure switch closes momentarily (more than 0.5
second) but then opens again, the YEL/RED wire at
the driver’s multiplex control unit will sense ground
through the switch. The driver’s multiplex control
unit will then provide and remove ground for the low
engine oil pressure indicator light through the
YEL/RED wire. The light will flash on and off until
you turn the ignition switch off. The flashing feature
will not work until 30 seconds after initial voltage is
applied to the WHT/BLU wire of the oil pressure
indicator flasher circuit. This delay keeps the low oil
pressure indicator light from coming on during
engine warmup.
If engine oil pressure falls below 4.3 psi and does
not increase, the engine oil pressure switch will stay
closed. The low oil pressure indicator light will then
come on and stay on.
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 8, Engine
Lubrication and Section 23, Electrical) for specific
tests or troubleshooting procedures.

72-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Seat Belt, Lights-on, and Ignition Key Reminders
HOT WITH HEADLIGHT SWITCH

HOT IN ON OR START IN HEAD OR PARK HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 13 FUSE 10 FUSE 43 FUSE/RELAY
METER TAIL LIGHT CLOCK BOX
(CRUISE 15A RADIO PHOTO 5
CONTROL) 7.5A
15A
See Power See Headlight 4 C254
Distribution, Switch, PHOTO 7
page 10-7. page 100-2. VIEW 20
WHT/YEL
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-12.
WHT/YEL
C431
PHOTO 57
6 VIEW 48

2 3 page 10-12.
13 A
Ignition Lights Battery
input ON input input
Key in
ignition
Ground input
7 A 3 B
page 14-5.
16 C433 BLU/YEL
PHOTO 57
VIEW 69
BLU/
YEL
BLU/YEL
C410
2 PHOTO 60
BLK BLU/WHT VIEW 1
3 B 1
STEERING SECURITY
Ignition LOCK CONTROL
Key Switch PHOTO 62 UNIT
VIEW 78 Page 133
Closed with
key in ignition. VIEW 40
Canada
4 B
BLU/WHT
6 C410
PHOTO 60
BLK VIEW 1
BLK See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-4.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

73
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Seat Belt, Lights-on, and Ignition Key Reminders
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 14 FUSE/RELAY
ECU BOX
EAT ECU PHOTO 51
15A
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-8.
8 C551
PHOTO 51
BLK/YEL VIEW 54
9 B
GAUGE
See Indicators ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
SEAT BELT VIEW 84
REMINDER
LIGHT
13 A
RED/BLU
10 C403
PHOTO 65
RED/BLU VIEW 60
RED/BLU
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
14 B PHOTO 51
DRIVER’S
Driver’s seat MULTIPLEX
belt switch RED/BLU
CONTROL
input UNIT
PHOTO 58
VIEW 81 4 C461
Driver ’s door (Canada, Type SH 3) PHOTO 83
OPEN input VIEW 26
14 A RED/BLU
6 C551
7 C434 (Not
PHOTO 57 Used) 1 C506
VIEW 62 PHOTO 100
RED/BLU
DRIVER’S
GRN SEAT BELT
SWITCH
Closed with
seat belt
BLK unbuckled.
See Door 2 C506
Courtesy PHOTO 100
Lights
BLK
GRN GRN
14 C462 8 BLK See Ground

PHOTO 83 SECURITY Distribution,
VIEW 70 CONTROL page 14-8.
GRN
UNIT
Page 133-1
VIEW 40
DRIVER’S
BLK
DOOR Canada
SWITCH
Closed with
door open.
PHOTO 98
G501
PHOTO 99

73-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Low Fuel Indicator Light
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER BOX
(CRUISE CONTROL) PHOTO 51
15A
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
4 C551
PHOTO 51
YEL VIEW 54
C559
(Terminals 7-10)
PHOTO 67
YEL VIEW 66
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
YEL
9 C
GAUGE
See Gauges, ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
Indicators
VIEW 84
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
11 C
LT GRN/RED
15 C402
PHOTO 65
VIEW 53
LT GRN/RED
6 C462
PHOTO 83
LT GRN/RED VIEW 70
3
FUEL
TANK
UNIT
Thermistor PHOTO 107
See
Gauges
1
See Ground
Distribution
page 14-8.
BLK
G501
PHOTO 99

74
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Low Fuel Indicator Light

WARNING
Do not smoke while working on the fuel system.
Keep open flame away from the work area.
Drain fuel only into an approved container.
A thermistor is mounted in the fuel tank unit. When
the thermistor is cool, its resistance is very high.
When the thermistor is warm, its resistance
decreases. Fuel in the fuel tank transfers heat away
from the thermistor fast enough to keep it cool so
the thermistor’s resistance stays high and the low
fuel indicator light does not come on. When the fuel
level drops below about 2.4 gallons, the thermistor
is no longer immersed in fuel. Without the fuel to
cool it, the thermistor’s resistance decreases,
allowing current to flow through the low fuel indicator
light and the thermistor to ground, and the low fuel
indicator light comes on.
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 11, Fuel and
Emissions) for specific tests or troubleshooting
procedures.

74-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Indicators
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 14 FUSE 13 BOX
ECU METER
PHOTO 51
EAT ECU (CRUISE CONTROL)
15A 15A
See Power See Power

page 10-8. page 10-7.
8 C551
4 PHOTO 51
YEL VIEW 54
C559
(Terminals 7-10)
PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
BLKYEL YEL
YEL
See Power YEL

Distribution,
page10-7. YEL
To B on
YEL page 80-2.
9 B 9 C
See Gauges
MALFUNCTION CHARGING BRAKE

INDICATOR SYSTEM SYSTEM
SEAT LIGHT (MIL) INDICATOR INDICATOR ATTS LOW
BELT LIGHT LIGHT INDICATOR ENGINE
REMINDER LIGHT OIL
INDICATOR – + PRESSURE
LIGHT (USA) INDICATOR
(USA) LIGHT
! P
(Canada) (Canada)
13 A 16 B 1 C 5 A 12 C
7
RED/
GRY/RED WHT/BLU GRN/RED PNK YEL/RED
BLU
See Seat See PGM-FI See See Brake See ATTS See Engine
Belt Reminder Charging System Oil Pressure
System Indicator Light Type Indicator Light
SH

80
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Indicators
YEL GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
3 C VIEW 84
To A on
page 80-2.
LOW FUEL DOOR OPEN TRUNK DRL

INDICATOR INDICATOR OPEN INDICATOR
LIGHT LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT
LIGHT
(Canada Only)
11 C 14 15 12 B 2 C
GRN GRN/ORN ORN C402
PHOTO 65 BLU/BLK
LT GRN/ 2 1 11
VIEW 53
RED
GRN/ORN ORN
GRN See Door

See Low Courtesy See
Fuel Indicator Lights ORN Daytime
Light ORN Running
8 C462 Lights
ORN
PHOTO 83 7
VIEW 70 ORN See
Trunk
GRN GRN/ORN Light
ORN
14 5 C462 8 C517
PHOTO 83 PHOTO 106
GRN GRN/ORN VIEW 70 ORN
VIEW 35 SECURITY
2 CONTROL
DRIVER’S PASSEN- TRUNK UNIT
DOOR GER’S LATCH Page 133-1
SWITCH DOOR SWITCH VIEW 40
Closed SWITCH Closed with Canada
with door Closed trunk open.
open. with door 1 PHOTO 109
PHOTO 98 open. BLK
PHOTO 98
See Ground
Distribution,
BLK
page 14-9.
G601
PHOTO 111

80-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Indicators
From B on
page 80. See Dash
and Console
See SRS Lights
YEL RED/BLK
BLU
4
5 C 11 B
From A on
page 80-1.
See
Dash
Lights
ABS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
SRS Indicator ABS Indicator Cruise Control
Circuit Circuit Dimming Circuit
(USA)
ABS CRUISE
SRS CONTROL
INDICATOR INDICATOR See
LIGHT (Canada) LIGHT Dash
Lights
See
Gauges
6 C 4 A 10 B
11
BLU/WHT BLK BLU/BLK RED
See ABS See See Dash

Cruise and Console
Control Lights
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-5.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

80-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Indicators
See Turn Signal

and Hazard See
Warning Lights See Dash and See Immobilizer
Console Lights Headlights System
GRN/BLU GRN/YEL RED/BLK RED/YEL WHT/YEL

GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
7 PHOTO 66
6 A 1 A 1 B 10 A VIEW 84
LEFT TURN RIGHT TURN GAUGE HIGH BEAM IMMOBILIZER

SIGNAL SIGNAL LIGHT INDICATOR INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR (X2) LIGHT LIGHT
LIGHT LIGHT
2 A 2 B 9 A
RED ORN/WHT PNK
See Dash and See See

Console Lights Headlights Immobilizer
System

80-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Gauges
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-
FUSE 13 DASH
METER
FUSE/
(CRUISE RELAY
CONTROL) BOX
15A PHOTO 51
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
4 C551
PHOTO 51
YEL VIEW 54
C559
(Terminals 7-10)
PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
YEL
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
YEL
9 C
See Indicators
ENGINE COOLANT
FUEL TEMPERATURE
GAUGE GAUGE
E F C H
12 A 10 C
YEL/BLU YEL/GRN
2 C403 9) C482
PHOTO 65 PHOTO 71
(*10) VIEW 34
VIEW 60
YEL/BLU YEL/GRN
7 C462 8 C142
PHOTO 83 PHOTO 8
VIEW 70 VIEW 44
YEL/BLU YEL/GRN
2
FUEL
TANK
Fuel Gauge UNIT
PHOTO 107 * = Type SH and all ’99-01 Models
Sending Unit
See Low
Fuel Indicator
Light
1
BLK ENGINE
See Ground COOLANT
Distribution, TEMPERATURE
page 14-8. SENDING UNIT
PHOTO 27
G501
PHOTO 99

81
s

s
t
+ –
Gauges
DISTRIBUTOR
IGNITION ASSEMBLY Type SH, A/T
Engine CONTROL PHOTO 24 ATTS CONTROL
Speed MODULE UNIT
output (ICM) RPM PHOTO 80
input VIEW 82 (Type SH)
or
BLU 5) A TRANSMISSION
1 C136 CONTROL
BLU PHOTO 24 (Type SH 20) MODULE (TCM)
10 C140 PHOTO 80
PHOTO 8 BLU VIEW 83
BLU
VIEW 31
BLU C454
11 PHOTO 76
VIEW 63 BLU 2 TEST
BLU
TACHOMETER
C432 CONNECTOR
BLU PHOTO 57 PHOTO 9
9 VIEW 49
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
3 C438 20 C433 3 C432 PHOTO 51
9 C551 (Not (Not (Not

PHOTO 51 Used) Used) Used)
VIEW 54
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
BLU PHOTO 66
5 B VIEW 84
ODOMETER/
Tachometer Drive TRIPMETER
Drive Circuit M STEPPER
Circuit MOTOR
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
See Indicators 6 B
8 B 4 A 3 B (Not
BLU/WHT Used) * = Type SH and all
’99-01 Models
7) C482
PHOTO 71
(*8) VIEW 34 See Vehicle Speed
Sensor (VSS)
BLK BLK BLU/WHT
See A/T C479

Gear Position (Terminals 14-16)
Indicator
PHOTO 77
VIEW 65
BLK BLU/WHT
9 C144
PHOTO 8
See Ground BLU/WHT VIEW 45
Distribution,
page 14-5. 3
VEHICLE
Vehicle SPEED
BLK speed SENSOR
output (VSS)
PHOTO 22
G401
PHOTO 56

81-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Gauges
When the ignition switch is on ON (II) or START (III), The resistance of the sending unit for the fuel gauge
battery voltage is supplied through fuse 13 to the varies from about 2-5 ohms at full, to about 110
gauges in the gauge assembly. The gauge circuit is ohms at empty. When you turn the ignition switch to
grounded at G401. LOCK (0), the gauge remains at the last reading
until you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or START
(III) again.
Speedometer and Odometer
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 10, Cooling
The odometer and speedometer drive circuits and Section 11, Fuel and Emissions) for specific
receive pulses from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). tests or troubleshooting procedures.
The pulse rate increases as the car accelerates.
The frequency and duration of these input pulses
are measured and displayed by the speedometer,
odometer, and tripmeter.
Tachometer
The tachometer drive circuit receives pulses from

the ignition control module (ICM) in the distributor
assembly. The solid-state tachometer then displays
these pulses as engine speed. For each 200 pulses
per minute from the ignition control module (ICM),
the tachometer displays 100 RPM.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge and Fuel

Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge has two

intersecting coils wound around a permanent
magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through
fuse 13, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic
field, controlled by the engine coolant temperature
sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the
gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the
sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils
changes, pulling the gauge needle toward the coil
with the stronger magnetic field. The fuel gauge
works the same way.
The resistance of the sending unit for the engine
coolant temperature gauge varies from about 137
ohms at low engine temperature to between
30-46 ohms at high temperature (radiator fan
running).
WARNING
Do not smoke while working on the fuel system.

Keep open flame away from the work area.
Drain fuel only into an approved container.

81-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
A/T Gear Position Indicator
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER See Power BOX
See Automatic (CRUISE CONTROL)
15A Distribution, PHOTO 51
Transmission page 10-7.
Controls, See Automatic
PGM-FI 4 C551 Transmission
YEL PHOTO 51 Controls
VIEW 54

page 10-7.
LT GRN BLU/RED
YEL
7 9 3 D
A/T Gear
Dimming Circuit Position
Indicator
P R N D4 D3 2 1
6 15 D
5 4 2 1 16
BLK/BLU WHT RED GRN BLU BRN
11 12 5 4 2 3 C483
PHOTO 71
BLK/BLU WHT GRN BLU VIEW 41
GRN
BLK/
BLU BLU
See See Automatic See Automatic

Interlock Transmission Transmission
System WHT RED Controls GRN BLU BRN Controls BLK
BRN
BLK/BLU RED YEL BRN
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C141
PHOTO 8
BLK/BLU WHT RED YEL GRN BLU BRN VIEW 43
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 C119
PHOTO 30
BLK/BLU WHT RED YEL GRN BLU BRN VIEW 30
D4 A/T GEAR
N D3 POSITION
R 2 SWITCH
PHOTO 33
P 1
See Ground
RED/WHT Distribution,
3 C119 page 14-5.
PHOTO 30
RED/WHT VIEW 30
10 C141
BLK PHOTO 8
VIEW 43 See Ground BLK
Distribution,
BLK page 14-7.
G471 G401
PHOTO 77 PHOTO 56

89
s

s
t
+ –
See Dash
and Console
Lights
RED/BLK
14 D
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
VIEW 84
Shift
Indicator
Circuit
13 12 11 10 D
BLU/YEL BLU/GRN BLU/BLK
RED
7 8 9 C483
PHOTO 71
BLU/YEL BLU/GRN BLU/BLK VIEW 41
21 20 19 A
See Dash TRANSMISSION
and Console (LED A) (LED B) (LED C)
CONTROL
Lights MODULE
Shift indicator control (TCM)
Mode
Shift switch input PHOTO 80
switch VIEW 83
input
(T-MODE) (T-M-) (T-M+)
13 15 16 B
BLK/RED BLU/YEL WHT/BLU
6 5 4 C486
PHOTO 87
ORN BLU/YEL WHT/BLU VIEW 27
MODE
Mode Shift SWITCH
Switch Switch
– +
BLK
1 C486
PHOTO 87
BLK VIEW 27
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-7.
BLK
G471
PHOTO 77

89-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator
through fuse 13. The A/T gear position switch
provides a ground for each position. As an input is
grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select
R, for example, ground will be applied to the input of
the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator
will come on.
With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage
is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This
changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed
to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input
through the RED wire.
When the transmission control module (TCM)
detects an abnormality in the automatic
transmission control system, or when you request
diagnostic trouble codes through the service check
connector, the TCM will make the D4 indicator
light blink.
When the transmission is in the sequential
sportshift, the shift switch sends “shift down” and
“shift up” inputs to the TCM. The TCM in turn
controls the shift indicator to display the proper gear
selected.
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 14,
Automatic Transmission) for specific tests or

89-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Wiper/Washer
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 13 BOX
METER PHOTO 51
(CRUISE
CONTROL)
15A
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7. From A on From B on
GRN/WHT GRN/YEL GRN/BLK
(D in S/M) BLU/WHT
10 3 B
PASSENGER’S
MULTIPLEX
Intermittent CONTROL WHT
dwell timer UNIT
input PHOTO 83
VIEW 80 3 2
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
A-D D-A INTERMITTENT
line line RELAY
PHOTO 20
1 B 6 1 4 VIEW 19
2 (D in S/M)
GRN/RED BLK BLU/WHT
To D on
facing page.
BLU/WHT WHT
PNK LT GRN 5 1
4 C303
PHOTO 55
VIEW 21
GRN/RED BLU/WHT WHT
C437
4
PHOTO 57
4 C436
VIEW 25 PHOTO 57
13 A 1 7 B 6 5 A
Ignition A-D D-A Intermittent Park
input line line wiper input
control

91
s

s
t
+ –
Wiper/Washer
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 17 FUSE/RELAY
WIPER BOX
30A PHOTO 51
17 C434
GRN/BLK
(Not Used) GRN/BLK
6 GRN/BLK
5 C436 16 C980
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51
VIEW 67
C303
PHOTO 55
GRN/BLK
VIEW 21
4
WINDSHIELD
RUN WIPER
PARK MOTOR
M PHOTO 19
LOW HIGH
5 3 2 1
BLU/WHT BLK BLU BLU/YEL GRN/BLK
3 2 C303
PHOTO 55
VIEW 21
BLU BLU/YEL
2 1 C408
To C on BLU BLU/YEL
PHOTO 60
same page.
3 4 7 A
WINDSHIELD
WIPER/
Mist WASHER
Intermittent MIST Switch SWITCH
Dwell Time OFF MIST OFF VIEW 75
Controller
OFF Washer
WASH Switch
HI
HI OFF HI
OFF OFF
INT LO INT LO INT LO
Wiper Switch
BLK WHT 2 5 8 1 A
1 2 B
GRN BLU/WHT
GRN/WHT WHT/YEL
See Ground
1 5 C412 Distribution,
4 C408
PHOTO 60 PHOTO 60 page 14-5.
GRN/WHT GRN/YEL VIEW 33 BLK BLK/YEL BLK/YEL
WHT 7 C303
BLK
To A on To B on PHOTO 55
facing page. facing page. BLK/YEL VIEW 21
WHT C980 C433

PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57
14 17 15 VIEW 67 15 VIEW 69
12 11 A 1
DRIVER’S WIND-
Intermittent Wash MULTIPLEX SHIELD
ON input ON CONTROL M WASHER
Ground input UNIT MOTOR
PHOTO 58 PHOTO 4
See Ground Distribution, 7 A VIEW 81 2
page 14-5. BLK
16 C433 BLK BLK

PHOTO 57 From C on From D on
BLK same page. facing page.
See Ground VIEW 69
Distribution, BLK BLK
page 14-4. See Ground
Distribution,
G401 page 14-3. G301
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 16
91-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Wiper/Washer
Low Speed Washer
With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), When you pull the wiper/washer lever toward you,
battery voltage is applied to the windshield wiper battery voltage is applied to the windshield washer
motor. When you move the wiper switch to LO, the motor and the driver’s multiplex control unit. The
low speed winding of the motor is grounded through control unit grounds the coil of the intermittent wiper
the low contact of the wiper/washer switch, and the relay. The relay, in turn, provides ground to the low
wipers run at low speed. speed windings of the wiper motor. The washer
motor pumps washer fluid onto the windshield and
the wipers run at low speed until you release the
Park/Off
lever. The wipers make one more sweep after the
When you turn off the wiper switch, ground is lever is released.
provided for the low speed winding of the Refer to the Service Manual (Section 23, Electrical)
windshield wiper motor. The ground is provided for testing and troubleshooting procedures.
through the wiper switch, intermittent wiper relay,
and the cam switch on the motor to G301. The
wipers run at low speed until the cam switch on the
motor moves to PARK, removing the ground. The
wipers then stop in the park position.
High Speed
When you move the wiper switch to HI, the high

speed windings of the windshield wiper motor are
grounded through the HI contact of the wiper/
washer switch, and the wipers run at high speed.
Intermittent
When you move the wiper switch to INT, battery

voltage is applied through fuse 17 to the driver’s
multiplex control unit. The control unit grounds the
coil of the intermittent wiper relay. The relay, in turn,
provides ground to the low speed windings of the
wiper motor, and the wipers make a single sweep at
low speed (see low speed operation). When the
wipers return to the park position, the park switch
applies battery voltage to the control unit through
the BLU/WHT wire. This tells the control unit that
the wipers have parked. The control unit uses this
information to start the delay timer.
Mist
When you push the wiper/washer lever down and

hold it, the high speed winding of the windshield
wiper motor is grounded through the MIST contact
in the wiper/washer switch. The wipers sweep at
high speed until you release the lever. The
PARK/OFF function then takes over and the wipers
stop in the PARK position.

91-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Headlight Switch
HOT AT ALL TIMES
See Power FUSE 32

Distribution, BATTERY
100A
page 10.
HEADLIGHT
RELAY
PHOTO 6
FUSE 51 FUSE 50
L HEAD
LIGHT
20A
R HEAD
LIGHT
20A
9 C252
5 PHOTO 7
VIEW 29
RED/YEL
RED/YEL RED/GRN RED/GRN
USA Canada Canada USA

RED/YEL RED/YEL
8 C402
PHOTO 65
VIEW 53 RED/YEL RED/YEL RED/GRN RED/GRN
5 6 C302 5 4 C201
PHOTO 55 PHOTO 75
VIEW 47 VIEW 39
RED/YEL RED/YEL RED/WHT

LT GRN/RED RED/GRN
1 B 3 A 3 B 3 5 3 B 3 A
High Low High Left low Right low High Low

beam beam beam beam beam beam beam
indicator input input
GAUGE LEFT HEADLIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING RIGHT HEADLIGHT

ASSEMBLY Pages 110 LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT Pages 110
Page 110 and 110-2 Page 110-2 and 110-2
PHOTO 66 VIEW 52
VIEW 84
USA

100
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Headlight Switch
UNDER-
HOOD
FUSE/
RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 5
See See
Headlights Headlights FUSE 42
SMALL
LIGHT
20A
DIMMER
RELAY
PHOTO 6
5 C251 7 C254 3 C252 2 C251

VIEW 38 VIEW 20 BLU/RED VIEW 29 RED/GRN VIEW 38
See Ground Canada
Distribution, BLU/RED
RED/GRN
page 14-6.
RED/BLU BLK 8
DAYTIME 4
RUNNING
BLU/RED LIGHTS
CONTROL
UNIT
G402 C437 Page 110-4
PHOTO 84 PHOTO 57 VIEW 52 SECURITY
5 7 VIEW 25 CONTROL
UNDER-DASH UNIT
FUSE/RELAY RED/GRN Page 133
BOX VIEW 40
PHOTO 51
5 C408
9 20 C980 PHOTO 60
PHOTO 51
RED/BLU
VIEW 67 COMBINATION
RED/BLU BLU/RED RED/GRN
LIGHT SWITCH
8 3 2 4 VIEW 50
Dimmer Flash- Head-

Switch to- OFF
OFF light
ON ON pass Switch
HI Switch HEAD HEAD
LOW OFF OFF PARK PARK
9 11
BLK
RED/BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-5.
To A
BLK on page
100-2.
G401
PHOTO 56

100-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Headlight Switch
From A on
page 100-1.
C980
RED/BLK PHOTO 51
10 VIEW 67
FUSE 10 FUSE 20
TAIL LIGHT (NOT USED)
15A
10 13 C431 12 C980
20 C434 12 14 C431 (Not (Not 11 C434 (Not
VIEW 62 RED/BLK VIEW 48
Used) Used) VIEW 62
Used)
RED/BLK
RED/ 11 C464
BLK PHOTO 97 9 C462
RED/BLK VIEW 74 PHOTO 83
2 VIEW 70
RED/BLK
9 C430
PHOTO 97
VIEW 73 2 C517
PHOTO 106
RED/ VIEW 35
RED/BLK
BLK Canada PASSENGER’S
SEAT
HEATER
SWITCH RED/
Page 114-2 BLK
VIEW 14
2 C605
PHOTO 92
RED/BLK
BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK
2
3 4 C607 4 C604
PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111
RED/BLK
TRAILER VIEW 5 VIEW 4
LIGHTING RED/BLK RED/BLK
CONNECTOR
LICENSE Page 110-11
DRIVER’S PLATE PHOTO 110
SEAT LIGHT VIEW 16
HEATER Page 110-11 RED/ RED/ RED/
SWITCH
BLK BLK BLK
Page 114-2
VIEW 11
RED/BLK RED/BLK LEFT LEFT LEFT

TAIL- REAR BRAKE
3 C302 LIGHT SIDE LIGHT/
PHOTO 55 2 C201 Page MARKER TAIL-
RED/ RED/ RED/BLK VIEW 47 PHOTO
RED/BLK 75 110-11 LIGHT LIGHT
BLK BLK
VIEW 39 Page Page
C306 110-11 110-11
(Terminals
14-17)
PHOTO 58
(F in RED/ RED/
VIEW 59
RED/ RED/
S/M) 11 RED/ RED/ RED/
20 BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
2 2 2 2
DOOR SECURITY LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT

MULTIPLEX CONTROL FRONT FRONT FRONT FRONT TAIL- REAR BRAKE
CONTROL UNIT PARKING SIDE PARKING SIDE LIGHT SIDE LIGHT/
UNIT Page 133-1 LIGHT MARKER LIGHT MARKER Page MARKER TAIL-
Page 114-2 VIEW 40 Page LIGHT Page LIGHT 110-11 LIGHT LIGHT
PHOTO 94 110-10 Page 110-10 Page Page Page
VIEW 68
110-10 110-10 110-11 110-11
100-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Headlight Switch
* = ‘97-‘98 Models
** = Type SH and all ‘99-‘01 Models
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 51
2 A DRIVER’S MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
Page 114-1
PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
7 C551 C983
PHOTO 51 OPTION
VIEW 54
CONNECTOR
PHOTO 52
RED/BLK
C559
(Terminals
17-20)
RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
9)
(*3) 3 2 6 3 2
AUDIO CLOCK MOONROOF HAZARD CRUISE DASH LIGHTS

UNIT Page 154 SWITCH WARNING CONTROL BRIGHTNESS
Page 150 Page 114-2 SWITCH MAIN CONTROLLER
VIEW 55 Page 114-2 SWITCH Page 114-1
5 C482 VIEW 12 Page 114-2 VIEW 10
PHOTO 71
(**6) VIEW 34 VIEW 9
RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK
2 C570 1 C569
PHOTO 71 PHOTO 71
VIEW 28
RED/BLK RED/ RED/BLK RED/BLK

BLK
2 C487 7 C486
PHOTO 88 PHOTO 87
VIEW 27
RED/BLK RED/ RED/ RED/ RED/ RED/BLK

BLK BLK BLK BLK
14 D 11 B 1 A 6
ASHTRAY A/T GEAR

LIGHT POSITION GAUGE HEATER
Page 114-3 CONSOLE ASSEMBLY CONTROL
LIGHT Page 114-3 PANEL
Page 114-3 PHOTO 66 Page 114-3
VIEW 84 VIEW 71
A/T
100-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Headlights
USA
HOT AT ALL TIMES
FUSE 32
BATTERY
100A
See Power
Distribution,
page 10.
HEADLIGHT
RELAY
PHOTO 6
FUSE 51 FUSE 50
L HEAD
LIGHT
20A
R HEAD
LIGHT
20A
9 5 C252
PHOTO 7
VIEW 29
RED/YEL
RED/GRN RED/GRN
RED/YEL RED/YEL RED/YEL
6 C302 8 C402 5 4 C201
5 PHOTO 55 PHOTO 65 PHOTO 75
RED/YEL LT GRN/RED RED/GRN VIEW 39
RED/WHT RED/YEL VIEW 47 VIEW 53
3 B 3 A 1 B 3 B 3 A
LEFT GAUGE RIGHT
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAM ASSEMBLY HEADLIGHT
INDICATOR PHOTO 66
HIGH LOW LIGHT VIEW 84 HIGH LOW
2 B 2 A 2 B 2 B 2 A
ORN/WHT BLK page 14-3. ORN/ ORN/WHT BLK page 14-2.
WHT
4 C302 9 C402 3 C201

C306
(Terminals
1-10)
PHOTO 58
ORN/WHT BLK VIEW 59 ORN/ ORN/WHT
WHT
G301 G201
PHOTO 16 PHOTO 10
C456
(Terminals 14-16)
ORN/WHT C252 PHOTO 82
PHOTO 7 VIEW 64
7 VIEW 29
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 5
To A on
facing page.

110
s

s
t
+ –
Headlights
USA
(Not Used)
UNDER-HOOD
1 C252
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 5
From A
on facing page.
DIMMER
RELAY
PHOTO 6
5 C251 7 C254 3 C252

VIEW 38 BLK VIEW 20 See Ground BLU/ VIEW 29
RED/BLU Distribution, RED
page 14-6. C437
G402 PHOTO 57
5 PHOTO 84 7 VIEW 25
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 51
See Headlight
9 20 C980 Switch,
PHOTO 51
VIEW 67
page 100-1.
RED/BLU RED/BLU BLU/RED
RED/GRN COMBINATION
3 2 4 LIGHT SWITCH
8 VIEW 50
Dimmer Flash-to- Headlight

Switch pass Switch Switch
OFF
OFF
ON ON
HEAD HEAD
LO HI OFF OFF PARK PARK
W
9
11
BLK
RED/BLK
See Ground
Distribution, See Headlight
page 14-5. Switch,
page 100-1.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

110-1
s

s
t
Headlights
Canada
HOT AT ALL TIMES
FUSE 32
BATTERY
100A
See Power
Distribution,
page 10.
HEADLIGHT
RELAY
PHOTO 6
FUSE 51 FUSE 50
L HEAD
LIGHT
20A
R HEAD
LIGHT
20A
9 5 C252
RED/ PHOTO 7
RED/GRN
YEL VIEW 29
DAYTIME
RED/YEL RED/GRN RUNNING LIGHTS
5 CONTROL UNIT
3 VIEW 52
Left low Right low

beam input beam input
Right
RED/ Left high High high RED/GRN
YEL beam beam beam
control request control
1
RED/WHT 10 11
LT GRN/
RED
RED/WHT
C302 RED/WHT
C402 5 C201
5 4 PHOTO 75
RED/ 6 PHOTO 55 8 PHOTO 65 ORN/WHT LT GRN/
VIEW 47 RED/GRN VIEW 39
YEL RED/WHT RED/YEL VIEW 53 RED
3 A 3 B 1 B 3 B 3 A
LEFT GAUGE RIGHT
HEAD- ASSEMBLY HEAD-
LIGHT HIGH BEAM PHOTO 66 LIGHT
LOW HIGH INDICATOR VIEW 84 HIGH LOW
LIGHT
2 A 2 B 2 B 2 A
ORN/WHT 2 B ORN/WHT
ORN/WHT
4 C302 9 C402 3 C201
BLK ORN/WHT ORN/WHT ORN/WHT BLK
C456
(Terminals
See Ground C252 14-16) See Ground
ORN/WHT PHOTO 82
Distribution, PHOTO 7 Distribution,
7 VIEW 29 VIEW 64
page 14-3. page 14-2.
C306 UNDER-HOOD
(Terminals 1-10) FUSE/RELAY
PHOTO 58 BOX
VIEW 59 PHOTO 5
BLK
To B on
facing page.
G301 G201
PHOTO 16 PHOTO 10

110-2
s

s
t
+ –
Headlights
Canada
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 5
From B on From C on
facing page. following page.
DIMMER
RELAY
PHOTO 6
5 C251 7 C254 3 C252

PHOTO 7 PHOTO 7 BLU/ PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 BLK VIEW 20 See Ground RED VIEW 29 BLU/RED
From D on
RED/BLU Distribution, BLU/ following page.
G402 page 14-6. RED C437
PHOTO 84 PHOTO 57
5 7 VIEW 25
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 51
See Headlight
9 20 C980 Switch,
PHOTO 51
VIEW 67
page 100-1.
RED/BLU RED/BLU BLU/RED
RED/GRN COMBINATION
3 2 4 LIGHT SWITCH
8 VIEW 50
Dimmer Flash-to- Headlight

Switch pass Switch Switch
OFF
OFF
ON ON
HEAD HEAD
LO HI OFF OFF PARK PARK
W
9
11
BLK RED/BLK
See Ground
Distribution, See Headlight
page 14-5. Switch,
page 100-1.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

110-3
s

s
t
Headlights
Canada
HOT IN ON OR START HOT IN ON HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE 12 FUSE 8 FUSE/RELAY
METER (DAY LIGHT UNIT) (DAY LIGHT) BOX
(CRUISE 7.5A 7.5A PHOTO 51
CONTROL)
15A
4 C551 12 C433 4 C431

YEL VIEW 54 VIEW 69 VIEW 48
C559
(Terminals 7-10)
PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
YEL
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-7.
YEL
3 C
GAUGE
DRL ASSEMBLY
PHOTO 66
INDICATOR VIEW 84
LIGHT
See Brake
System
Indicator Light
2 C
BLU/BLK GRN/RED YEL RED/BLU
7 C402
PHOTO 65
BLU/BLK VIEW 53
9 13 12 2
DAYTIME
Indicator Brake Ignition Battery RUNNING
control indicator input input LIGHTS
control CONTROL
Lights ON UNIT
VIEW 52
Parking request High beam
brake input Ground input OFF input
6 4 8 7
GRN/WHT BLU/RED ORN
C252
PHOTO 7
20 C454 1 VIEW 29
PHOTO 76 UNDER-HOOD
VIEW 63
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 5
To D on To C on
GRN/RED BLK previous page. previous page.
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-6.
PARKING
BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with
parking brake
applied.
PHOTO 87 G402
PHOTO 84

110-4
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Headlights
Headlights applying the parking brake will not turn them off.
When you switch to low beam, high beam, or
Low Beams (USA) flash-to-pass operation, ground is provided to the
daytime running light control unit through the
The headlight relay receives battery voltage at all
BLU/RED wire. The daytime running light control unit
times. When you turn the headlight switch to the
then turns off the daytime running lights mode.
HEAD position with the dimmer switch in LO, ground
is applied at the BLU/RED wire to the coil of the
Low Beams (Canada)
headlight relay. The relay is then energized, applying
battery voltage to the left and right high and low The headlight relay receives battery voltage at all
beam headlights through fuses 50 and 51. The low times. When you turn the headlight switch to the
beam bulbs come on because the opposite terminal HEAD position with the dimmer switch in LO,
is tied to ground. The high beam bulbs and indicator ground is applied at the BLU/RED wire to the coil of
remain off because the ground path to these bulbs is the headlight relay. This energizes the relay,
interrupted by the deactivated dimmer relay. applying battery voltage to the left and right low
beam headlights and to the daytime running lights
High Beams (USA) control unit through fuses 50 and 51. The low beam
bulbs come on because the opposite terminal is tied
When you pull the dimmer switch to HI with the low
to ground. When the daytime running lights control
beams already on, a ground signal is applied to the
unit receives battery voltage through fuses 50 and
dimmer relay from the dimmer switch. This
51, it removes voltage from between the high beam
energizes the dimmer relay, applying ground to the
RED/WHT and LT GRN/RED wires, turning off the
high beam bulbs and high beam indicator, which
high beam headlights.
turns on the high beams and indicator light. The low
beam headlights stay on (see Low Beams).
High Beams (Canada)
Flash-to-Pass (USA) With the low beams already on, battery voltage is
applied to the daytime running lights control unit
When you hold the flash-to-pass switch in the ON
through the RED/YEL and RED/GRN wires. The
position, ground is applied to the BLU/RED wire to
control unit then supplies battery voltage from the
the coil of the headlight relay and at the RED/BLU
RED/WHT and LT GRN/RED wires to the high
wire of the dimmer relay. This energizes the
beam headlights. When you pull the dimmer switch
headlight relay, applying battery voltage to the low
to HI, ground is applied to the dimmer relay. This
and high beam bulbs and to the dimmer relay. As
energizes the dimmer relay, applying ground to the
the low beam bulbs receive battery voltage, the
high beam headlights and high beam indicator
dimmer relay is energized, applying ground at the
which turns on the high beams and indicator light.
ORN/WHT wire to the high beam bulbs and high
The low beams stay on (see Low Beams).
beam indicator which turns on the high beams and
indicator light.
Flash-to-Pass (Canada)
Daytime Running Lights (Canada) When you hold the flash-to-pass switch in the ON
position, ground is applied to the BLU/RED wire to
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (ll) with the
the coil of the headlight relay and at the RED/BLU
parking brake released, the daytime running lights
wire of the dimmer relay. This energizes the
control unit supplies battery voltage through the
headlight relay, applying battery voltage to the low
RED/WHT and LT GRN/RED wires to the high beam
and high beam bulbs and to the dimmer relay. As
headlights in series. Each high beam headlight
the low beam bulbs receive battery voltage, the
receives less than battery voltage causing them to
dimmer relay is energized, applying ground at the
come on at reduced brightness. If you apply the
ORN/WHT wire to the high beam bulbs and high
parking brake, ground is applied to the daytime
beam indicator which turns on the high beams and
running lights control unit at the GRN/WHT wire. If
indicator light.
you apply the parking brake when the ignition switch
is first switched to ON (II), the high beam headlights
will remain off until you release the parking brake.
Once the high beam headlights are in daytime mode,
110-5
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lights
UNDER-HOOD FUSE 13 UNDER-DASH

FUSE 39 FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY
METER
HAZARD BOX (CRUISE See Power BOX
10A PHOTO 5 CONTROL) Distribution, PHOTO 51
15A page 10-7.
2 C252
PHOTO 7 5 C980
WHT/GRN VIEW 29 PHOTO 51
C437 GRN/RED VIEW 67
PHOTO 57
8 VIEW 25 2
UNDER-DASH TURN SIGNAL
FUSE/RELAY LIGHT DIODE
See Dash and BOX
Console Lights PHOTO 52
PHOTO 51
5 C434
WHT/GRN PHOTO 57 1
RED/ VIEW 62
RED
BLK 13 C402
WHT/GRN PHOTO 65 13
6 5 VIEW 53 COMBINATION
HAZARD Turn LIGHT SWITCH
Signal VIEW 50
HAZARD WARNING
WARNING SWITCH LEFT RIGHT
Switch
ON
SWITCH OFF VIEW 12
LIGHT
3 4 2 12
RED BLU/YEL BLU/GRN 14
2 C401 6 C402
PHOTO 65 PHOTO 65 GRN/BLU GRN/YEL
BLU/ BLU/GRN VIEW 53
See Dash YEL C434 C980
and Console PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51
Lights 10 13 VIEW 62 2 19 VIEW 67
UNDER-
DASH
FUSE/
5 3 1 RELAY
BOX
TURN PHOTO 51
SIGNAL/
Left Control Right HAZARD
Control RELAY
Flasher PHOTO 53
VIEW 17
Left Battery Right
input/ input input/
control control
Ground
6 4 2
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-5.
To E on facing page. To F on facing page.
16 C433
PHOTO 57
VIEW 69 See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-4.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

110-6
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lights
UNDER-DASH
From Turn Signal/Hazard FUSE/RELAY
Relay on facing page. BOX
PHOTO 51
2 C433 15 C551 6 C434 6 C433

GRN/BLU VIEW 69 VIEW 54 GRN/YEL VIEW 62 GRN/YEL VIEW 69
18 C462
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
GRN/ GRN/BLU GRN/BLU GRN/YEL GRN/YEL

BLU
9 C302 19 C462 3 C403 12 C201 6 C517

PHOTO 55 PHOTO 83 PHOTO 65 PHOTO 75 PHOTO 106
VIEW 47 VIEW 70 VIEW 60 GRN/YEL VIEW 39 VIEW 35
GRN/ GRN/BLU GRN/YEL
BLU GAUGE
GRN/BLU
ASSEMBLY
7 PHOTO 66
7 C517 6 A VIEW 84
PHOTO
106
2 VIEW 35 2
LEFT TURN RIGHT TURN
LEFT FRONT SIGNAL SIGNAL RIGHT FRONT
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR INDICATOR TURN SIGNAL
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
1 1
GRN/BLU GRN/YEL
GRN/ 6
BLU See Indicators
GRN/YEL TRAILER
GRN/BLU
4 A LIGHTING
1 C607 CONNECTOR
PHOTO 110
1 C604 PHOTO 110
1 PHOTO 111 VIEW 16
GRN/YEL VIEW 5
GRN/YEL VIEW 4
TRAILER
LIGHTING
CONNECTOR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
PHOTO 110 TURN SIGNAL TURN SIGNAL
VIEW 16 LIGHT
LIGHT
BLK BLK
page 14-9. page 14-9.
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
3 C607 3 C604
PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111
BLK VIEW 5 BLK VIEW 4
BLK
See Ground See Ground See Ground

Distribution, Distribution, Distribution,
page 14-3. page 14-5. page 14-2.
C306
(Terminals
1-10)
BLK
PHOTO 58 BLK
VIEW 59
BLK
G301 G401 G201 G601


110-7
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Back-up Lights
A/T
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER BOX
(CRUISE
CONTROL) See Power PHOTO 51 * =
15A Distribution, ** =

page 10-7. *** =

3 C431
PHOTO 57
VIEW 48
YEL
YEL
5)
(* 3) 2
A/T
REVERSE
RELAY
PHOTO 53
(* 5) 1
3) GRN/BLK
’97-’98 Models ’99-’01 Models
WHT
5 C453
PHOTO 76
VIEW 2 (** 6) C461 1 C462
(*** 9) PHOTO 83 PHOTO 83
VIEW 26 VIEW 70
WHT
GRN/BLK
See A/T Gear
Position Indicator, 1 C517
A/T Controls PHOTO 106
WHT GRN/BLK VIEW 35
6 C141
PHOTO 8
WHT VIEW 43
9 C119
PHOTO 30 GRN/BLK GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
WHT VIEW 30
5 C607 5 C604
PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111
D4 A/T GEAR GRN/BLK VIEW 5 GRN/BLK VIEW 4
N D3 POSITION
SWITCH 5
R 2 PHOTO 33
LEFT TRAILER RIGHT
P 1 BACK-UP LIGHTING BACK-UP
LIGHT CONNECTOR LIGHT
PHOTO 110
VIEW 16
BLK BLK
RED/WHT See Ground

Distribution,
3 C119 page 14-9.
PHOTO 30 BLK BLK
RED/WHT VIEW 30
10 C141 3 C607 3 C604

PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111
VIEW 43 BLK BLK
BLK See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-7.
BLK BLK
G471 G601
PHOTO 77 PHOTO 111
110-8
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Back-up Lights
M/T
HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 13 FUSE/RELAY
METER BOX
(CRUISE PHOTO 51
CONTROL) See Power
15A Distribution,
page 10-7.
4 C551
YEL PHOTO 51
VIEW 54

page 10-7.
YEL
C126
PHOTO 26
YEL
BACK-UP LIGHT
SWITCH
Closed with
transmission in reverse.
PHOTO 26
GRN/BLK
C127
PHOTO 26
GRN/BLK
C143
5 PHOTO 8
GRN/BLK VIEW 24
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
4) C453
(Type SH 12) PHOTO 76 5 A
VIEW 2
GRN/ ATTS
’97-’98 Models BLK ’99-’01 Models CONTROL
UNIT
PHOTO 80
VIEW 82
Type SH
*6) C461 1 C462
(** 9) PHOTO 83 PHOTO 83
VIEW 26 VIEW 70
GRN/BLK
1 C517
PHOTO 106
GRN/BLK
VIEW 35
* =

GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
** =

5 C607 5 C604
PHOTO 110 GRN/BLK PHOTO 111
GRN/BLK VIEW 5 GRN/BLK VIEW 4
5
LEFT TRAILER LIGHTING RIGHT
BACK-UP CONNECTOR BACK-UP
LIGHT PHOTO 110 LIGHT
VIEW 16
BLK BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-9.
BLK BLK
3 C607 3 C604
PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111
BLK
G601
PHOTO 111
110-9
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
License, Parking, Side Marker Lights, and Taillights
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 42 FUSE/RELAY
SMALL BOX
LIGHT
20A PHOTO 5
2 C251
PHOTO 7
RED/GRN VIEW 38
RED/
RED/GRN GRN RED/BLK
5 C408 4
PHOTO 60
RED/GRN
4
COMBINATION
Headlight LIGHT SWITCH
Switch VIEW 50 SECURITY
OFF HEAD CONTROL
UNIT
PARK Page 133
VIEW 40
11 Canada
RED/BLK C980 C434
PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57
10 VIEW 67 11 VIEW 62
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 10 FUSE/RELAY
See Headlight TAIL BOX
LIGHT
Switch, 15A PHOTO 51
page 100-2.
14 C431
RED/BLK PHOTO 57
VIEW 48
Canada
RED/
BLK
RED/ RED/BLK
11
BLK
SECURITY
CONTROL 3 C302 2 C201
PHOTO 55 PHOTO 75
UNIT VIEW 47 VIEW 39
Page 133-1
RED/ RED/BLK
VIEW 40
BLK
C306
RED/BLK RED/BLK (Terminals 14-17) RED/BLK RED/BLK
PHOTO 58
2 2 VIEW 59 2 2
LEFT FRONT LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT RIGHT FRONT
PARKING LIGHT SIDE MARKER PARKING LIGHT SIDE MARKER
LIGHT LIGHT
1 1 1 1
page 14-3. page 14-2.
BLK BLK BLK BLK
C306
(Terminals
1-10)
PHOTO 58
VIEW 59
BLK
G301 G201
PHOTO 16 PHOTO 10
110-10
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
License, Parking, Side Marker Lights, and Taillights
RED/BLK
9 C462
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
RED/BLK
2 C517
PHOTO 106
VIEW 35
RED/BLK
RED/BLK
RED/BLK RED/BLK 3 TRAILER RED/BLK

LIGHTING
2 C605 4 C607 CONNECTOR 4 C604
RED/BLK RED/BLK
See Brake See Brake

BLK Lights Lights
RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK GRN/ RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK GRN/

WHT WHT
LICENSE LEFT LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT

PLATE TAIL- REAR BRAKE TAIL- REAR BRAKE
LIGHT LIGHT SIDE LIGHT/ LIGHT SIDE LIGHT/
MARKER TAIL- MARKER TAIL-
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
BLK
RED/
BLK See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-9.
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
1 C605
PHOTO 92
BLK BLK
3 C607 3 C604
PHOTO PHOTO 111
110 VIEW 4
BLK VIEW 5 BLK
BLK
BLK
G601
PHOTO 111
110-11
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Brake Lights
NOTE: For cars equipped with optional spoiler, see page 110-13 for brake lights schematic.
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 41 FUSE/RELAY
STOP BOX
HORN
15A PHOTO 5
10 C251
WHT/YEL PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 See Power
Distribution,
WHT/YEL page 10-11.
4
BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with brake
pedal depressed.
PHOTO 64
3
WHT/BLK
See ABS,
Cruise Control
WHT/BLK
C438 (Not
4 PHOTO 57 Used)
3 C434 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
13 C432 BOX
PHOTO 51
14 C432 (Not
WHT/BLK PHOTO 57 Used)
VIEW 49 WHT/BLK See PGM-FI,
A/T Controls
WHT/BLK
C462
4 PHOTO 83
WHT/BLK VIEW 70
WHT/BLK C517
5 PHOTO 106
VIEW 35
WHT/BLK
Type SH
WHT/ WHT/BLK TRAILER WHT/BLK WHT/

BLK WHT/BLK LIGHTING 1 C602 BLK
2 C607 2 C604 4 CONNECTOR PHOTO 108
PHOTO 110 GRN/WHT PHOTO 111 PHOTO 110 WHT/BLK
VIEW 5 VIEW 4 VIEW 16 Bulb
See See Type
GRN/ RED/ RED/
WHT BLK
Taillights BLK Taillights C632
GRN/WHT PHOTO 112
2
LEFT RIGHT HIGH HIGH
BRAKE BRAKE MOUNT MOUNT
LIGHT LIGHT/ BRAKE BRAKE
TAILLIGHT TAILLIGHT LIGHT LIGHT

page 14-9. page 14-8.
BLK 1
BLK BLK
C633
PHOTO 112 BLK
BLK
BLK BLK
3 C607 3 C604 2 C602
PHOTO 110 BLK PHOTO 111 PHOTO 108
VIEW 5 VIEW 4
BLK BLK BLK
BLK
G601 G501
PHOTO 111 PHOTO 99

110-12
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Brake Lights
With Optional Spoiler
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 41 FUSE/RELAY
STOP
HORN BOX
15A PHOTO 5
10 C251
WHT/YEL PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 See Power
Distribution,
WHT/YEL page 10-11.
4
BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with brake
pedal depressed.
PHOTO 64
3
WHT/BLK
See ABS,
Cruise Control
WHT/BLK
C438 (Not
4 PHOTO 57 Used)
3 C434 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
13 C432 BOX
PHOTO 51
14 C432 (Not
WHT/BLK PHOTO 57 Used)
VIEW 49 WHT/BLK
See PGM-FI,
A/T Controls
WHT/BLK
4 C462
PHOTO 83
WHT/BLK
VIEW 70
WHT/BLK WHT/BLK
HIGH MOUNT
5 C517 2 BRAKE LIGHT
PHOTO 106 CONNECTOR
VIEW 35 WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK 4 TRAILER C2
LIGHTING PHOTO 112
CONNECTOR GRN/WHT
WHT/ PHOTO 110
WHT/BLK VIEW 16
BLK HIGH
2 C607 2 C604 MOUNT
PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111 BRAKE
VIEW 5 VIEW 4 LIGHT
See See
GRN/ RED/ Taillights GRN/ RED/ Taillights
WHT BLK WHT BLK
RIGHT
LEFT BRAKE
BRAKE LIGHT/
TAILLIGHT BLK
LIGHT
TAILLIGHT C3
PHOTO 112 See Ground
BLK Distribution,
See Ground page 14-8.
BLK Distribution, BLK 1 HIGH MOUNT
page 14-9. BRAKE LIGHT
BLK CONNECTOR
BLK BLK
3 C607 3 C604
PHOTO 110 PHOTO 111 BLK
BLK
G601 G501
PHOTO 111 PHOTO 99
110-13
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Fog Lights
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 36 FUSE 42 FUSE/RELAY
FUSE BOX SMALL BOX
50A LIGHT PHOTO 5
20A
1 C254 2 C251
PHOTO 7 PHOTO 7
VIEW 20 RED/GRN VIEW 38
WHT/RED
C435 5 C408
1 RED/GRN PHOTO 60
PHOTO 57
UNDER-DASH 4
See Power See FUSE/RELAY COMBINATION
Distribution, Headlight BOX Headlight LIGHT
page 10. Switch PHOTO 51 OFF HEAD Switch SWITCH
VIEW 50
C981 10 C980
OPTION PHOTO 51 PARK
CONNECTOR RED/BLK VIEW 67
WHT PHOTO 52
RED/BLK 10 RED/BLK 11
FOG LIGHT C980

PHOTO 51
IN-LINE FUSE RED/BLK VIEW 67 RED/BLK
15A HOLDER
PHOTO 116
FOG
LIGHT
DIODE 2
PHOTO 118
WHT
RED/YEL
2 3
FOG LIGHT
RELAY 1
PHOTO 117
5 6 9 UNDER-
RED/BLU RED See DASH
WHT/ORN Headlight FUSE/
C980 Switch RELAY
RED/BLU FOG PHOTO 51 B0X
LIGHT VIEW 67 PHOTO 51
DIODE 1
PHOTO 118
9 C980
PHOTO 51
To A on VIEW 67
facing page.
RED/BLU
RED/BLU
8 3
Dimmer Flash-to-
Switch ON
pass Switch
ON
LOW HI OFF OFF
9
BLK
NOTE: Wires that look like this See Ground
are part of the optional Fog Light Switch Distribution,
page 14-5.
harness installed between factory
harness connectors. BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

110-14
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Fog Lights
RED/BLK RED/BLK
4 1
FOG FOG
LIGHT LIGHT
DIODE 3 SWITCH ORN
PHOTO 116 OFF ON
BLK
3 2 See Ground
BLK BLK
17 BLK Distribution,
page 14-5.
BLK C980 C980
PHOTO 51 PHOTO 51
17 VIEW 67 VIEW 67
UNDER-DASH From A on
RED/YEL See Ground facing page.
Distribution, FUSE/RELAY
page 14-5. BOX
PHOTO 51
16 C433
PHOTO 57
BLK VIEW 69 WHT/ORN
G401
2 PHOTO 56 1
FOG LIGHT
RELAY 2
PHOTO 117
4 3
BLU/RED
BLU/RED ORN
20 C980 C305
BLU/RED PHOTO 51 ORN PHOTO 52
2 VIEW 67 C317
COMBINATION ORN PHOTO 4
LIGHT
Headlight SWITCH ORN ORN
OFF HEAD Switch VIEW 50
C980 2 C8 2 C9
PHOTO 51 BLU/ PHOTO 4 BLU/RED PHOTO 1
20 VIEW 67 RED
PARK UNDER- LEFT RIGHT
DASH FOG FOG
FUSE/ LIGHT LIGHT
RELAY
See BOX
Headlight BLK BLK
PHOTO 51
Switch 1 C8 1 C9
PHOTO 4 PHOTO 1
BLK BLK
BLK
G3
PHOTO 2 Optional Fog
Light Harness
110-15
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Courtesy and Trunk Lights
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 46 FUSE/RELAY
INTERIOR BOX
LIGHTS PHOTO 5
(*15A)
10A
6 C251
PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 * = ‘97-‘98 Models
WHT/BLU
C456
(Terminals 1-3)
PHOTO 82
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU VIEW 64
3 C462
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
C406 WHT/BLU
PHOTO 59
WHT/BLU See Power
VIEW 61
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
Distribution,
page 10-13.
10 C430 2 C464
WHT/BLU VIEW 73 WHT/BLU PHOTO 97 WHT/BLU
VIEW 74
2 2 1
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S TRUNK
DOOR DOOR LIGHT
COURTESY COURTESY
LIGHT LIGHT
1 1 2
GRN/ORN GRN ORN
23 C430 21 C464
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97
GRN VIEW 73 GRN/ORN VIEW 74
Canada ORN
See
SECURITY Indicators
CONTROL UNIT
Page 133-1 ORN
VIEW 40
See Indicators, See Indicators,
Ceiling Light Ceiling Light 8 C517
PHOTO 106
VIEW 35
ORN
8 2
2
TRUNK
GRN GRN/ORN
LATCH
SWITCH
Closed with
trunk open.
GRN GRN/ORN 1 PHOTO 109
14 5 C462 BLK
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
GRN GRN/ORN See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-9.
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S
DOOR DOOR BLK
SWITCH SWITCH
Closed with Closed with
door open. door open. G601
2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.7

114
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Dash and Console Lights
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 42 FUSE/RELAY
SMALL LIGHT
BOX
PHOTO 5
20A
2 C251
PHOTO 7
RED/GRN
VIEW 38
RED/GRN Canada
RED/GRN
4
SECURITY
CONTROL
5 C408 UNIT
PHOTO 60 Page 133
RED/GRN
VIEW 40
4
COMBINATION
Headlight LIGHT From C on
Switch SWITCH page 114-2.
VIEW 50
OFF HEAD
PARK
11
RED/BLK
UNDER-DASH
RED/BLK C980 FUSE/RELAY
PHOTO 51 BOX
10 VIEW 67 PHOTO 51 2
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
DASH LIGHTS CONTROLLER
FUSE 10 FUSE 20 BRIGHTNESS VIEW 10
TAIL LIGHT
15A
(NOT USED) CONTROLLER
To A on LIGHT
page 114-2.
2 A 3 4 1
DRIVER’S RED
Lights MULTIPLEX
ON input CONTROL
A-D D-A UNIT
PHOTO 58
Ground line line VIEW 81 RED/ WHT/RED To D on
WHT page 114-2.
7 A See Ground 1 B
7
Distribution, From B on
page 14-5. page 114-2.
16 C433 5
PHOTO 57
4 C402
PHOTO 65
VIEW 69 PNK LT GRN
RED/WHT WHT/RED VIEW 53
RED
(B (A
1 2 9 8 (D in S/M) 10 (E in S/M)
PASSENGER’S
A-D D-A Brightness MULTIPLEX
line line Dash lights control CONTROL
brightness UNIT
Ground controller input PHOTO 83
BLK VIEW 80
20 (A
BLK
(E in S/M)
BLK See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-4.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

114-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

UNDER-DASH
From A on FUSE/RELAY
page 114-1. BOX
PHOTO 51
20 C434 12 C431 7 C551

PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 RED/BLK PHOTO 51
RED/BLK
RED/
RED/
BLK
BLK
9 C430 11 C464
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97
VIEW 73 VIEW 74
To C on
RED/
page 114-1.
BLK
Canada
RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/ RED/BLK RED/BLK

BLK
RED/
BLK
20 (F in S/M) 2 2 6 3 2
+
DOOR DRIVER’S PASSEN- HAZARD CRUISE MOON-
MULTIPLEX SEAT GER’S WARNING CONTROL ROOF
CONTROL HEATER SEAT SWITCH MAIN SWITCH
Power UNIT SWITCH HEATER VIEW 12 SWITCH
window PHOTO 94 VIEW 11 SWITCH VIEW 9
master VIEW 68 VIEW 14
switch
illumination
10 (F in S/M) 1 1 3 5 1
RED
RED RED RED RED RED
From D on
RED page 114-1.
7 C430 16 C464
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97
VIEW 73 VIEW 74
RED
To B on
page 114-1.
RED
5 C403
PHOTO 65
RED RED
RED VIEW 60
RED C406
(Terminals 8-10)
PHOTO 59
VIEW 61

114-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
* = ‘97-‘98 Models
** = Type SH and all ’99-’01 Models
C559
(Terminals 17-20)
RED/BLK RED/BLK PHOTO 67
RED/BLK 9) RED/BLK RED/BLK VIEW 66
(*3) RED/
RED/BLK
BLK
AUDIO
UNIT 3 1 C569 2 C570
5) C482 VIEW 55 PHOTO 71 PHOTO 71
(** 6) PHOTO 71 RED/
VIEW 28
VIEW 34 BLK
19 RED/BLK
RED HEATER
RED/BLK CLOCK CONTROL
RED/BLK PANEL
’99-’01 Models 6 VIEW 71
To E on
this page.
HEATER
Dimming CONTROL
Circuit PANEL
LIGHT
RED/BLK
RED/
BLK 5
RED/BLK RED/BLK RED/BLK RED
2 C487 7 C486
PHOTO 88 PHOTO 87
VIEW 27
RED/ RED/ 14 D 11 B 1 A
BLK BLK MODE
SWITCH
A/T GEAR Cruise

Control GAUGE
ASHTRAY POSITION LIGHTS
LIGHT CONSOLE Dimming
Circuit (x2)
LIGHT
GAUGE
RED RED LIGHTS RED
(x2)
1 C487 2 C486 Shift A/T Gear
PHOTO 88 PHOTO 87 Indicator Position
VIEW 27 Circuit Indicator
See Ground RED
Distribution, From E on
BLK page 14-7. this page.
12) C482
PHOTO 71 13 D 10 B 2 A GAUGE
(*4)
VIEW 34 ’99-’01
RED
ASSEMBLY
RED RED RED
PHOTO 66 Models
VIEW 84
RED
BLK
RED 4 C569
G471 PHOTO 71
PHOTO 77 RED VIEW 28
C559
(Terminals 1-6)
PHOTO 67
A/T
VIEW 66

114-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Entry Light Control System
UNDER-HOOD
INTERIOR STOP HORN BOX
LIGHTS 15A PHOTO 5
(*15A)
10A
6 10 C251
PHOTO 7
WHT/BLU VIEW 38
* = ‘97-‘98 Models WHT/YEL
C456 See Power

(Terminals 1-3) Distribution,
PHOTO 82 page 10-11.
WHT/BLU VIEW 64
WHT/YEL
3 C463 See Power
VIEW 3 page 10-13. 5 C410
WHT/BLU
PHOTO 60
VIEW 1
1 C702 WHT/YEL
PHOTO 101
RED
7 B
CEILING STEERING
LIGHT/ See Interlock LOCK
SPOTLIGHTS System PHOTO 62
RED WHT YEL VIEW 78
LEFT RIGHT CEILING

SPOT- SPOT- LIGHT Ignition
LIGHT LIGHT Key Light
RED WHT YEL
5 B
OFF ON OFF ON
BLK
OFF WHT
ON
DOOR
BLK BLK GRN BLU 1 C410
PHOTO 60
VIEW 1
BLK BLK GRN BLU
C702
3 PHOTO 101
4
(Not
Used)
WHT/BLK
BLK WHT/BLK
6 5 C463
PHOTO 75
VIEW 3
BLK WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK
BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
BLK page 14-4.
G401
PHOTO 56
To facing page.
115
s

s
t
+ –
From facing page.
WHT/BLK
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PHOTO 51
6 C
DRIVER’S
Ignition key/ceiling MULITPLEX
light control CONTROL
Key in
ignition Driver’s door A-D D-A UNIT
input OPEN input line line PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
3 B 14 A 1 B
7
6 C551
(Not Used) 7 C434
PHOTO 57 PNK LT GRN
VIEW 62 (D in S/M)
BLU/YEL GRN 1 2 (B
PASSENGER’S
A-D D-A MULTIPLEX
line line CONTROL
Passenger’s UNIT
door OPEN PHOTO 83
BLU/YEL GRN input VIEW 80
1 8
11 (B
See Door (D in S/M)
BLU/YEL GRN Courtesy GRN/ORN
Lights
See Door
Courtesy
SECURITY GRN/ Lights
CONTROL UNIT ORN
Pages 133
and 133-1 2
VIEW 40
Canada
2 C410
PHOTO 60 SECURITY
VIEW 1 CONTROL
BLU/WHT
UNIT
Page 133-1
3 B VIEW 40
STEERING
Ignition Key LOCK Canada
Switch PHOTO 62
VIEW 78
Closed with
GRN/ORN
key in ignition.
4 B 14 5 C462
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
BLU/WHT GRN GRN/ORN
6 C410 DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S

PHOTO 60 DOOR SWITCH DOOR
VIEW 1 Closed with SWITCH
BLK door open. Closed with
PHOTO 98 door open.
BLK
PHOTO 98
See Ground
Distribution,
BLK page 14-4.
G401
PHOTO 56

115-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Voltage is applied at all times to the ignition key light
in the steering lock through fuse 41 and to the
ceiling light through fuse 46. When you open either
door, the driver’s multiplex control unit provides a
ground for the ignition key light and ceiling light (in
DOOR position) and the lights come on. The lights
remain on, then fade out in about 10 seconds after
both doors are closed.
for specific tests and troubleshooting procedures.

115-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Trailer Lighting Connector
HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ON OR START
UNDER-
FUSE 41 HOOD FUSE 13
FUSE 42 METER
SMALL STOP FUSE/ (CRUISE
LIGHT HORN RELAY CONTROL)
20A 15A BOX 15A
PHOTO 5 See Power
2 C251 Distribution,
RED/ 10 PHOTO 7 page 10-7.
GRN VIEW 38
WHT/
Canada YEL
4 C551 3 C431 UNDER-
PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57 DASH
YEL
VIEW 54 VIEW 48
FUSE/
RED/GRN See Power RELAY
YEL
4 Distribution, BOX
RED/ PHOTO 51
page 10-7.
GRN WHT/
YEL See Power YEL
Distribution, C126 YEL
5 C408 page 10-11. PHOTO 26
5)
PHOTO 60 SECURITY YEL (**3)
4 2
CONTROL BRAKE SWITCH BACK-UP A/T
RED/ UNIT
GRN Closed with brake LIGHT REVERSE
Page 133 pedal depressed. SWITCH RELAY
VIEW 40 PHOTO 64 Closed with PHOTO 53
4 transmission
3 GRN/BLK in reverse 1
3)
Headlight PHOTO 26
WHT/ (**5)
HEAD Switch BLK C127
PHOTO 26 WHT
GRN/BLK 5 C453
OFF PARK 5 C143 PHOTO 76
PHOTO 8 VIEW 2
WHT/ VIEW 24 GRN/BLK
BLK GRN/BLK WHT
11 COMBINATION See Cruise See A/T Gear
RED/
LIGHT SWITCH Control, ABS GRN/BLK
See Position Indicator,
VIEW 50
BLK C980 ATTS A/T Controls
PHOTO 51 C438 (Not GRN/BLK
10 VIEW 67 4 PHOTO 57 Used)
3 C434 4) C453
(Type PHOTO 76
FUSE 10 VIEW 2
TAIL SH 12)
LIGHT See Headlight WHT
15A Switch, GRN/
page 100-2. 13 C432 BLK 6 C141
PHOTO 8
VIEW 43
11 C434 14 C432 (Not UNDER-
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57 Used)
VIEW 62
WHT/BLK
VIEW 49
DASH M/T A/T
FUSE/
WHT/BLK
See PGM-FI, RELAY GRN/ WHT
RED/ A/T Controls BOX BLK
WHT/BLK PHOTO 51 9 C119
BLK
9 4 (*6) C461 PHOTO 30
C462 (**9) PHOTO 83 WHT
VIEW 30
PHOTO 83 VIEW 26
WHT/
VIEW 70 (***1) D4
RED/ BLK C462 (***) N D3
BLK PHOTO 83
GRN/BLK VIEW 70 R 2
WHT/ WHT/BLK
2 C517 BLK
PHOTO 106 1 C517 P 1
RED/ VIEW 35 PHOTO 106
BLK
5 C517 VIEW 35
See WHT/
PHOTO 106 GRN/BLK
A/T GEAR
Headlight VIEW 35 See See RED/WHT
BLK
Brake Back-up POSITION
Switch, SWITCH
RED/ page 100-2. WHT/
Lights LIghts GRN/BLK PHOTO 33
BLK BLK
4 5 3 C119
3 RED/WHT PHOTO 30
VIEW 30
TRAILER LIGHTING CONNECTOR
PHOTO 110 10 C141
VIEW 16 2 PHOTO 8
See Ground BLK VIEW 43
BLK
See Ground * = All ’97-98 Models
except Type SH Distribution,
Distribution, page 14-7.
page 14-9. ** = All ’97-’98 Type SH
BLK BLK
and Canada
G601 *** = All ’99-’01 Models G471
PHOTO 111 PHOTO 77

118
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Trailer Lighting Connector
BOX METER BOX
HAZARD (CRUISE
10A PHOTO 5 See Power PHOTO 51
CONTROL)
15A Distribution,
2 C252 page 10-7.
PHOTO 7
VIEW 29
WHT/GRN 5 C980
C437 PHOTO 51
PHOTO 57 GRN/RED VIEW 67
8 VIEW 25
UNDER- 2
DASH
See Dash and FUSE/ TURN SIGNAL
Console Lights RELAY LIGHT DIODE
5 C434 PHOTO 52
PHOTO 57
BOX
WHT/GRN PHOTO 51
VIEW 62
RED/ 13 C402 1
BLK WHT/GRN PHOTO 65 RED
VIEW 53
5 13
6
HAZARD COMBINATION
HAZARD WARNING Turn LIGHT SWITCH
Signal VIEW 50
WARNING ON SWITCH
SWITCH OFF
VIEW 12
LEFT RIGHT
Switch
LIGHT
3 4 2
RED BLU/YEL BLU/GRN
12
2 C401 6 C402 14
PHOTO 65 PHOTO 65
See Dash BLU/ BLU/GRN VIEW 53 GRN/BLU GRN/YEL
and Console YEL C434 C980
Lights 13 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51
2 19
10 VIEW 62 VIEW 67
UNDER-
DASH
FUSE/
RELAY
5 3 1 BOX
TURN PHOTO 51
SIGNAL/
Left Control Right HAZARD
Control RELAY
Flasher PHOTO 53
VIEW 17
Left Battery Right
input/ input input/
control control
Ground
6 4 2
See Ground See Turn Signal
Distribution, and Hazard
page 14-5. Warning Lights
2 16 6 C433
GRN/BLU PHOTO 57
GRN/YEL VIEW 69
GRN/BLU 18 C462
C462 PHOTO 83
19 BLK GRN/
VIEW 70
PHOTO 83 See Ground YEL
GRN/BLU VIEW 70 Distribution, 6 C517
7 C517 page 14-4. PHOTO 106
PHOTO 106 VIEW 35
GRN/BLU VIEW 35 GRN/YEL
See Turn GRN/YEL See Turn
GRN/BLU Signal and Signal and
Hazard Hazard
GRN/BLU Warning GRN/YEL Warning
1 Lights 6 Lights
TRAILER LIGHTING TRAILER LIGHTING
CONNECTOR G401 CONNECTOR
VIEW 16 VIEW 16
118-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Power Windows
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 37 BOX
POWER PHOTO 5
WINDOW
40A
From A on
page 120-2. 2 C254
PHOTO 7
VIEW 20
WHT/BLU
WHT/RED
C431
PHOTO 57 C435
1 VIEW 48 3 PHOTO 57
UNDER-DASH
See Power FUSE/RELAY
Distribution, BOX
PHOTO 51
page 10.
POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
PHOTO 54
To B on
See Ground page 120-1.
Distribution,
page 14-5. FUSE 16 FUSE 15
P/W ASSISTANT P/W DRIVER
20A 20A
16 C433 7 C431 13 C433

BLU/BLK GRN/WHT
To C on
page 120-3.
BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-4.
G401
PHOTO 56

120
s

s
t
+ –
Power Windows
From D on
page 120-2.
See Dash
From E on From F on and Console
page 120-2. page 120-3. Lights
WHT/YEL
C456
(Terminals 11-13)
PHOTO 82 See Power
BRN WHT/YEL VIEW 64 Distribution, BLU/RED RED/BLK
page 10-12.
1 4 2 C430 DOOR
PHOTO 97 MULTIPLEX
BRN WHT/YEL BLU/RED VIEW 73 CONTROL UNIT
PHOTO 94
4 16 11 20 (F in S/M) VIEW 68
Door
D-line Power
Window
Driver’s Passenger’s Main Master
Switch Switch Switch POWER Switch
WINDOW
MASTER
UP AUTO UP DN SWITCH
LIGHT
DN
Control Unit
From B on
page 120.
19 2 9 5 14 12 1 10 (F in S/M)
GRN/WHT RED/BLU RED/YEL RED/WHT
RED
5 C430
PHOTO 97
GRN/WHT VIEW 73
2 1 3 C653 BLK BLK BLK See Dash

PHOTO 96 and Console
RED/YEL RED/BLU BLU
Lights
DRIVER’S
WINDOW
M Pulser MOTOR
BLK
4 C653
PHOTO 96
BLK
page 14-4. BLK BLK page 14-6.
C430
22 21 PHOTO 97
BLK VIEW 73
BLK BLK BLK
BLK
BLK
G401 G402
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 84

120-1
s

s
t
Power Windows
METER BOX CLOCK BOX
(CRUISE PHOTO 51 RADIO PHOTO 5
CONTROL) 7.5A
15A
4 C254
PHOTO 7
VIEW 20
1 C432 WHT/YEL
See Power PHOTO 57
VIEW 49
Distribution,
page 10-7. YEL WHT/YEL WHT/YEL
To D on
page 120-1.
YEL
WHT/YEL
UNDER-DASH
C431 FUSE/RELAY
PHOTO 57 BOX
6 VIEW 48 PHOTO 51
See Power
Distribution,
13 3 A page 10-12.
DRIVER’S
Ignition Battery MULTIPLEX
input input CONTROL
UNIT
Driver’s door Power window Door A-D D-A PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
OPEN input relay control D-line line line
14 1 A 8 B
1 7
6 16 C551
7 C434 (Not (Not 9 C434
PHOTO 57 Used) Used) PHOTO 57
VIEW 62 VIEW 62 PNK LT GRN
GRN
WHT/RED BRN
See Door
Courtesy
Lights
To A on To E on
page 120. page 120-1.
Canada
GRN GRN
14 C462 8
PHOTO 83
VIEW 70 SECURITY
GRN CONTROL
UNIT
Page 133-1
DRIVER’S VIEW 40
DOOR
SWITCH
Closed with
door open.
PHOTO 98

120-2
s

s
t
+ –
Power Windows
From C on
page 120.
BLU/BLK
WHT/YEL BLU/BLK BLU/BLK
YEL
(B (A
7 (D in S/M) 9 12 (E in S/M)
PASSENGER’S
Ignition Battery Power window MULTIPLEX
input input relay input CONTROL
UNIT
PHOTO 83
Passenger’s VIEW 80
Passenger’s Main power window
D-A A-D door OPEN switch motor control
line line input input
2 (B 11 2 1 (A
1 11 (D in S/M) (E in S/M)
LT GRN PNK GRN/ORN BLU/RED BLU/YEL BLU
17 12 4 C464
PHOTO 97
VIEW 74
BLU/YEL BLU BLU/BLK

To F on
page 120-1.
5 2 1
PASSEN-
Canada GER’S
UP DOWN WINDOW
See Door OFF OFF SWITCH
Courtesy
Lights
GRN/ 4
ORN 3
GRN/
ORN BLU/RED BLU/WHT
2
SECURITY 5 C462 2
CONTROL PHOTO 83 1 C683
PHOTO 96
UNIT GRN/
VIEW 70 BLU/WHT BLU/RED
Page 133-1 ORN PASSENGER’S
VIEW 40 WINDOW
PASSENGER’S M MOTOR
DOOR
SWITCH
Closed with
door open. Motor has a self-resetting
PHOTO 98 circuit breaker.

120-3
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Windows
CAUTION: Disconnect the window switch unit. When the window reaches the fully down
connector before you start. You could position, the pulsing signal stops and the door
unintentionally switch the window to “automatic multiplex control unit removes power from
down” while working in the driver’s door with the the motor.
power on. The moving glass could injure your
arms, hands, or fingers. Passenger Window
System Description Once you turn on the main switch in the master
panel, the passenger window can be operated from
The operation of the power windows is controlled by the passenger’s door switch or from the master
the main switch in the master power window switch. panel.
When the main switch is in OFF, only the driver’s When you open or close the passenger’s window
door window can be opened or closed. With the main from the master power window switch, the door
switch ON, the passenger’s window can be opened multiplex control unit sends a signal to the driver’s
or closed by its master switch in the driver’s door or multiplex control unit through the BRN wire. The
by its own switch in the passenger’s door. The driver’s multiplex control unit sends this request to
driver’s window switch has an automatic down mode the passenger’s multiplex control unit and turns on
which is turned on when you momentarily hold the the window motor by supplying voltage to the motor
driver’s window switch in the DOWN position. in the proper direction.
The power windows are driven by reversible motors. When you move the passenger’s power window
Each motor is protected by a built-in circuit breaker. switch to UP, voltage is applied to the passenger’s
If the window switch is held on too long (with the power window motor. The motor is grounded
window obstructed, or after the window is fully up or through the contacts in the passenger’s power
down) the circuit breaker opens the circuit. The window switch and the passenger multiplex control
circuit breaker resets automatically as it cools. unit. The window then moves up as long as you
When the ignition switch is in ON (II) (and for 10 hold the switch in the UP position. If you move the
minutes after it is switched to LOCK (0) and as long passenger’s door window switch to DOWN, voltage
as both doors remain closed), the driver’s multiplex is applied in the opposite direction, and the window
control unit provides voltage to the coil of the power moves down as long as you hold the switch in the
window relay. The contacts of the power window DOWN position.
relay close and voltage is applied to the master Refer to the Service Manual (Section 23, Electrical)
power window switch and the passenger’s power for specific tests and troubleshooting procedures.
window switch.

The driver’s power window master switch is part of

the door multiplex control unit. When you hold the
driver’s window switch in the UP or DOWN
position, the door multiplex control unit applies
power to the driver’s window motor in the direction
requested.

The driver’s window is equipped with an AUTO

DOWN feature. When you momentarily hold the
driver’s window switch in the DOWN position, the
door multiplex control unit applies power to the
driver’s window motor. As the window moves down,
the pulser in the driver’s window motor sends a
pulsing ground signal to the door multiplex control

120-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Moonroof
UNDER- UNDER-
FUSE 13 DASH FUSE 43 HOOD
METER
FUSE/ CLOCK FUSE/
(CRUISE RELAY RADIO RELAY
CONTROL) BOX 7.5A BOX
15A PHOTO 5
4 C254
See Power PHOTO 7
Distribution, VIEW 20
page 10-7. 1 C432 WHT/YEL
PHOTO 57
VIEW 49
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL See Power

Distribution,
page 10-12.
WHT/YEL YEL WHT/YEL
C431
PHOTO 57
6 VIEW 48
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-12. (B (A
13 3 A 7 (D in S/M) 9 (E in S/M)
Ignition Battery MULTIPLEX Ignition Battery MULTIPLEX
input input CONTROL input input CONTROL
UNIT UNIT
PHOTO 58 PHOTO 83
Driver’s door Power window A-D D-A VIEW 81 D-A A-D Passenger’s door VIEW 80
OPEN input relay control line line line line OPEN input
14 A 1 7 B 2 1 11 (B
1 (D in S/M)
6 16 C551
7 C434 (Not (Not 9 C434
PHOTO Used) Used) PHOTO
57 57 LT GRN
VIEW 62 VIEW 62
GRN WHT/RED GRN/ORN
PNK
See Door To A on SECURITY See Door

Courtesy facing page. CONTROL Courtesy
Lights UNIT Lights
Page 133-1
Canada VIEW 40
8 2
GRN GRN/ORN
GRN GRN/ORN
5
14 C462
PHOTO 83
GRN GRN/ORN VIEW 70
DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH
door open. door open.
PHOTO 98 PHOTO 98

122
s

s
t
+ –
Moonroof
HOT AT ALL TIMES
From A UNDER-HOOD
on facing page. FUSE 37 FUSE/RELAY
POWER BOX
A WINDOW PHOTO 5
40A
2 C254
WHT/RED PHOTO 7
VIEW 20
WHT/BLU
C431
PHOTO 57 C435
1 VIEW 48 3 PHOTO 57
UNDER-
See Power DASH
Distribution, FUSE/
page 10. RELAY
BOX
POWER FUSE 7 PHOTO 51
WINDOW (SUN ROOF)
RELAY 30A
PHOTO 54
See Ground See Power

Distribution, Windows
page 14-5.
MOONROOF MOONROOF
OPEN CLOSE
RELAY RELAY
PHOTO 54 PHOTO 54
16 C433 1 C551 14 C434 2 C551 15 C434

PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57 PHOTO 51 PHOTO 57
VIEW 69 VIEW 54 VIEW 62 VIEW 54 VIEW 62
GRN/YEL GRN/RED
2 C463 GRY/RED 1 C463
PHOTO 75 PHOTO 75
VIEW 3 VIEW 3
See Dash
GRN/YEL GRN/RED and Console
MOONROOF Lights
2 C703 MOTOR 1 C703
BLK GRY/YEL YEL RED
M
RED/BLK
5 3 2
MOONROOF
SWITCH
MOONROOF
OPEN CLOSE SWITCH
LIGHT
4
1
BLK RED
See Ground See Ground See Dash and

Distribution, Distribution, Console Lights
page 14-4. page 14-5.
BLK
G401 G401
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 56

122-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Moonroof
With the ignition switch in ON (II) (and for 10
minutes after it is switched to LOCK (0) and as long
as both doors remain closed), the driver’s multiplex
control unit provides voltage to the coil of the power
window relay. The contacts of the power window
relay close, and voltage is applied to the coil of the
moonroof relays.
When you move the moonroof switch to OPEN
position, ground is provided to the coil of the
moonroof “open” relay. The coil contacts then close,
providing voltage to the motor, the motor runs, and
the roof opens. The motor is grounded through the
contacts of the moonroof “close” relay.
When you move the moonroof switch to the CLOSE
position, ground is provided to the coil of the
moonroof “close” relay. The contacts then close,
providing voltage to the motor, the motor runs and
the roof closes. The ground path for the motor is
through the contacts of the moonroof “open” relay.

122-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Door Locks/Keyless Entry

’97-’98 Models
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 44 FUSE/RELAY
DOOR LOCK BOX
10A PHOTO 5
5 C254 To A on
PHOTO 7 page 130-4.
VIEW 20
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
WHT BRN PNK LT GRN BOX
PHOTO 51
2 C 8 1 7 B
DRIVER’S
Battery input Door A-D D-A MULTIPLEX
(Door lock) D-line line line CONTROL
UNIT
Lock/unlock output PHOTO 58
VIEW 81
Ground
Lock + Unlock + (Door locks)
7 C
8 4
WHT/RED LT GRN/RED BLK
C406
(Terminals 11-12)
WHT/RED WHT/RED PHOTO 59
VIEW 61
16 C430 5 C464
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97
WHT/RED VIEW 73 WHT/RED VIEW 74
4 C654 2 C684
PHOTO 95 PHOTO 95
WHT/RED VIEW 6
WHT/RED
DRIVER’S
Driver’s DOOR LOCK PASSENGER’S
Door Lock ASSEMBLY DOOR LOCK
M M ACTUATOR
Actuator
YEL/RED
YEL/RED
5 C654 1 C684
PHOTO 95 PHOTO 95
VIEW 6
LT GRN/RED
LT GRN/RED
17 C430 BLK See Ground
PHOTO 97
VIEW 73 Distribution,
LT GRN/RED 10 C464 page 14-6.
PHOTO 97
VIEW 74
2 C426
PHOTO 52 LT GRN/RED BLK
LT GRN/RED
C406
(Terminals
1-2)
PHOTO 59 G402
VIEW 61 PHOTO 84

130
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

’97-’98 Models
LT GRN PNK
(B
2 1 (D in S/M)
PASSENGER’S
D-A A-D MULTIPLEX
line line CONTROL
Passenger’s door lock and UNIT
key cylinder switch input PHOTO 83
VIEW 80
Lock Unlock
4 (B
5 (D in S/M)
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
Canada USA Canada
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
BLU/
BLK/WHT 1 C407
2 PHOTO 59 ORN
SECURITY SYSTEM BLU/

3 10
BLK/WHT CONNECTOR ORN
(OPTION)
15 14 C464
PHOTO 97
VIEW 74
SECURITY BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
SECURITY
CONTROL CONTROL
UNIT UNIT
VIEW 40 VIEW 40
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
3 C686
1 PHOTO 95
3 BLU/WHT BLK/RED
1
PASSENGER’S PASSENGER’S
DOOR LOCK DOOR KEY
LOCK UN- SWITCH LOCK UN- CYLINDER
LOCK LOCK SWITCH
2 BLK
2 C686
BLK PHOTO 95
BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
BLK
page 14-6.
18 C464
PHOTO 97
VIEW 74
BLK
G402
PHOTO 84

130-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

’99-’01 Models
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY To C on
FUSE 44 facing page.
DOOR LOCK BOX
10A PHOTO 5
To B on
facing page.
5 C254
PHOTO 7
WHT VIEW 20 To A on
page 130-4.
WHT WHT WHT PNK LT GRN BRN
3 7 8
2 C 1 B
DRIVER’S
Battery input Battery input A-D D-A Door MULTIPLEX
(Door lock) (Door lock) line line D-line CONTROL
UNIT
PHOTO 58
Lock/unlock output Unlock/lock input VIEW 81
Ground
Relay (Door
control Lock + Unlock + locks) Unlock – Lock –
1 C 9 B
7 8 4 12
RED UNDER-DASH
WHT/RED LT GRN/RED BLK GRN/ RED/ FUSE/RELAY
2 5 ORN WHT BOX
PHOTO 51
DOOR
LOCK
RELAY
PHOTO 53
C406 GRN/ RED/
1 (Terminals ORN WHT
4 3 11-12) USA
See Ground PHOTO 59
LT GRN/ BLK BLK Distribution, VIEW 61
RED 1 2 C407
page 14-6.
PHOTO 131
BLK GRN/ RED/ GRN/ RED/

WHT/ ORN WHT ORN WHT
17 C430
RED PHOTO 97
C406 G402 VIEW 73
(Terminals 1-2) PHOTO 84 LT GRN/RED
PHOTO 59 See Security
VIEW 61 System
2 (Canada)
WHT/RED WHT/RED 3 (*10) (USA)
(*11) C461
5 C464 16 C430 PHOTO 83
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97 GRN/ RED/ VIEW 26
WHT/RED VIEW 74 WHT/RED VIEW 73 ORN WHT
4 C654 5 6
2 C684 PHOTO 95
WHT/RED VIEW 6
PHOTO 95
WHT/RED Unlock Lock
output output
PASSENGER’S Driver’s
DOOR LOCK Door
M M
ACTUATOR Lock
Actuator
YEL/RED
DRIVER’S
1 C684 DOOR LOCK BLK See Ground
PHOTO 95
ASSEMBLY Distribution,
YEL/RED
LT GRN/RED page 14-6.
10 C464 5 C654 BLK

PHOTO 97 PHOTO 95 * = Type SH
LT GRN/RED VIEW 74 LT GRN/RED VIEW 6
and Canada
G402
PHOTO 84

130-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

’99 Model
* = Type SH and Canada
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 22 FUSE FUSE 46 FUSE/RELAY
10A HOLDER INTERIOR BOX
PHOTO 132 LIGHTS PHOTO 5
10A
From C on From B on
6 C251 facing page. facing page.
PHOTO 7
YEL/GRN WHT/BLU VIEW 38
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-13. PNK LT GRN
1) C461 (B
2 (D in S/M)
(*12) PHOTO 83 1
VIEW 26
PASSENGER’S
A-D D-A MULTIPLEX
line line CONTROL
Passenger’s door lock and UNIT
key cylinder switch input PHOTO 83
VIEW 80
Lock Unlock
(B
YEL/GRN WHT/BLU 4 5 (D in S/M)
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
15 14 C464
PHOTO 97
VIEW 74
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
BLK/WHT BLU/ORN
3 C686
1 PHOTO 95
3 BLU/WHT BLK/RED
1
PASSENGER’S PASSENGER’S
DOOR LOCK DOOR KEY
LOCK UN- SWITCH LOCK UN- CYLINDER
LOCK LOCK SWITCH
3 8
2 BLK
Ignition Battery 2 C686

PHOTO 95
BLK BLK
Ground
7 KEYLESS See Ground
RECEIVER UNIT Distribution,
PHOTO 129
BLK
page 14-6.
BLK VIEW 86
18 C464
PHOTO 97
See Ground VIEW 74
Distribution, BLK
page 14-8.
BLK
G402
PHOTO 84
G501
PHOTO 99

130-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

All Models
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 43 FUSE/RELAY
CLOCK BOX
RADIO PHOTO 5
7.5A
From A on 4 C254
page 130 PHOTO 7
(’97-’98 Models) WHT/YEL VIEW 20
or page 130-2
(’99-’01 Model)
WHT/YEL
C456
BRN (Terminals
WHT/YEL 7-10)
PHOTO 82
4 VIEW 64
1 C430
PHOTO 97
VIEW 73
BRN WHT/YEL page 10-12.
16
4 (F in S/M)
DOOR
Door Battery MULTIPLEX
D-line input CONTROL
UNIT
Driver’s door Driver’s door PHOTO 94
VIEW 68
lock switch lock knob
Driver’s door input switch input
key cylinder
switch input Lock Unlock Lock Unlock
6 (F in S/M)
17 7 18 8
BLU GRN/BLU GRN/RED PNK BLK/WHT
6 2 C654
1 C656 PHOTO 95
PHOTO 95
VIEW 6
BLU/WHT BLU/RED
BLK/RED
3
1 DRIVER’S
DRIVER’S DRIVER’S Knob DOOR LOCK
DOOR KEY DOOR LOCK Switch ASSEMBLY
LOCK UN- CYLINDER LOCK UN- SWITCH LOCK UN-
LOCK SWITCH LOCK LOCK
2
BLK
BLK
2 C656
PHOTO 95 BLK 3 C654
BLK PHOTO 95
VIEW 6
BLK

page 14-4. BLK BLK page 14-6.
22 C430
21 PHOTO 97
BLK BLK VIEW 73 BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
G401 G402
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 84

130-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Immobilizer System
CLOCK BOX ACG-S BOX
RADIO PHOTO 5 10A PHOTO 51
7.5A
4 C254 4 C432
PHOTO 7 PHOTO 57
WHT/YEL VIEW 20 VIEW 49
WHT/GRN
WHT/GRN
See Power
STEERING Distribution,
LOCK page 10-12.
IMMOBILIZER PHOTO 62
RECEIVER VIEW 78
WHT/YEL
10 A
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
IMMOBILIZER PHOTO 66
1 B VIEW 84
2 INDICATOR
LIGHT
WHT/GRN
9 A
PNK
11 C403
PHOTO 65
ORN WHT BLK VIEW 60
PNK
3 1 2 B 5 1 A
Shield Immobilizer Battery
Immobilizer ground indicator input
receiver input Immobilizer control
Parking brake
signal output switch input
6 7 A
See Brake System
Indicator Light
BRN/YEL GRN/RED
C456
3 C453 (Terminals 17-20)
VIEW 2 GRN/RED GRN/RED PHOTO 82
VIEW 64
7 C302
PHOTO 55
BRN/YEL GRN/RED VIEW 47 13
DAYTIME
C309 RUNNING
GRN/RED PHOTO 20
LIGHTS Canada
BRAKE FLUID See CONTROL
22 C LEVEL SWITCH Headlights UNIT
ENGINE Closed with VIEW 52
(IMOCODE)
CONTROL low fluid level. 6
Immobilizer MODULE PHOTO 20
signal input (ECM) BLK
(Canada GRN/WHT)
GRN/RED)
PHOTO 80 C310
VIEW 85 PHOTO 20 20 C454
BLK PHOTO 76
VIEW 63
See Ground GRN/RED
Distribution,
page 14-3.
PARKING
BLK BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with parking
brake applied.
G301 PHOTO 87
PHOTO 16

132
s

s
t
+ –
Immobilizer System
UNDER- STEERING
FUSE 14 DASH IGNITION LOCK
ECU FUSE/ LOCK SWITCH PHOTO 62
EAT ECU RELAY (0) VIEW 78
See Power 15A START
BOX (III)
Distribution, PHOTO 51 ACC (I) ON (II)
page 10-8.
7 C432 1 A
PHOTO 57 BLK/WHT
BLK/YEL
VIEW 49 1 C411
WHT/RED PHOTO 60
WHT/RED
See Power
Distribution, WHT/RED
page 10-8.
WHT/GRN C433
PHOTO 57
18 VIEW 69
7 UNDER-
PGM-FI Early FUSE 2 DASH
MAIN Production STARTER See Power FUSE/
RELAY ‘97 Model SIGNAL Distribution, RELAY
7.5A
PHOTO 59 page 10-2. BOX
See VIEW 22 PHOTO 51
PGM-FI
BLK/YEL
19 C433
6 BLU/RED PHOTO 57 See Power
VIEW 69 BLU/RED Distribution,
YEL/BLK
page 10-2.
BLU/RED
YEL/BLK 3
See 4
PGM-FI STARTER
YEL/BLK
CUT
RELAY
PHOTO 61
All except Early Early Prod. 2
Prod. ’97 Model ’97 Model LT BLU
1
4 3 A BLK/WHT
IMMOBILIZER
ON or Starter CONTROL
START cut control UNIT All except BLK/
input PHOTO 61 Early WHT
Park/neutral VIEW 76
Ground input Production See Starting
‘97 Model System
8 2 A
GRY
M/T A/T BLK/WHT
2 C139
PHOTO 9
GRY BLK/WHT
6 C453
PHOTO 76
GRY VIEW 2
GRY STARTER
8 C141 SOLENOID
PHOTO 8
GRY VIEW 43
1 C119
BLK PHOTO 30
GRY
2 VIEW 30
CLUTCH A/T STARTER
INTERLOCK D4 GEAR PHOTO 36
D3
SWITCH N POSITION
Closed with R 2 SWITCH
clutch pedal PHOTO 33
1 P
depressed. 1
BLK
PHOTO 64
RED/WHT
See Ground BLK
page 14-4. PHOTO 30
RED/WHT
VIEW 30
10 C141
BLK PHOTO 8
BLK
VIEW 43 See Ground
Distribution,
BLK
page 14-7.
G401 G471
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 77

132-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system is designed to prevent the
car from being started without the owner’s ignition
key. If an attempt is made to start the car without
the correct key, the immobilizer system will disable
the car.
The immobilizer system consists of the immobilizer
control unit, ignition key, immobilizer receiver,
immobilizer indicator light, starter cut relay, engine
control module (ECM), parking brake switch, clutch
interlock switch (M/T), and the A/T gear position
switch (A/T).
The immobilizer control unit receives battery voltage
through fuse 4 at all times. With the ignition switch
in ON (ll) and the clutch pedal depressed (M/T) or
the gear selector in neutral or park (A/T), the
immobilizer control unit receives an “ignition on”
signal through fuse 2 and sends power to the
ignition key transponder through the immobilizer
receiver. The transponder then sends a coded
signal back to the control unit through the receiver.
If the signal is correct, the control unit energizes the
starter cut relay and sends a “fuel enable” signal to
the ECM. The immobilizer indicator light flashes a
code to indicate that the correct key is inserted. If
the ignition key signal is not correct, the immobilizer
control unit disables the starter cut relay and does
not send a “fuel enable” signal to the ECM. The
immobilizer indicator light then flashes a code to
indicate that an incorrect key is inserted.
The ignition key must be programmed to the
immobilizer control unit with the special ignition
switch key (learning key).

132-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Security System
Canada
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 14 FUSE/RELAY
ECU BOX
EAT ECU PHOTO 51 FUSE 42 FUSE 43
15A
See Power SMALL CLOCK
Distribution, LIGHT RADIO
20A 7.5A
page 10-8.
7 C432 2 C251 4 C254

BLK/YEL RED/GRN WHT/YEL
See Power See Power See Power

Distribution, Distribution, Distribution,
page 10-8. page 10-12. page 10-12.
BLK/YEL RED/GRN WHT/YEL
12 4 5
Ignition Ignition Battery Battery
Unlock Lock
input input Ground Key-in-ignition input
3 10 6 1
BLU/YEL
GRN/ORN) RED/WHT)
(*BLK/WHT) (*BLU/ORN) BLU/YEL See Ignition
Key Reminder
GRN/ORN RED/WHT
(*BLK/WHT) (*BLU/ORN) BLK BLU/YEL
2 C410
PHOTO 60
BLU/YEL VIEW 1
3 B
See Power STEERING
Door Locks LOCK
(’97-’98) RED/WHT) Ignition Key PHOTO 62
GRN/ORN) VIEW 78
(*BLK/WHT) (’99-’00) (*BLU/ORN) Switch
Closed with
6) ) key in ignition.
5)
(*4) (*5) (*B)
Unlock Lock 4 B
output output BLU/WHT
6 C410
See Ground PHOTO 60
PASSENGER’S MULTIPLEX Distribution, BLK VIEW 1
CONTROL UNIT page 14-5. BLK
(’97-’98 Models) See Ground
VIEW 80 BLK BLK page 14-4.
or KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
(’99-'01 Models)
PHOTO 129
* = ’97-’98 Models G401 G401
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 56
VIEW 86

133
s

s
t
+ –
Security System
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD * = ’97-’98 Models

FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 41 BOX
STOP HORN PHOTO 5
15A
10 C251
PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 See Power
Distribution,
WHT/YEL
page 10-11.
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL
5)
(* 3) 2
HORN
RELAY
PHOTO 53
(* 5) 1
3) BLU/RED
LT GRN/BLU
LT GRN/BLU
See Horns
LT GRN/BLU
9
SECURITY
Horn CONTROL
control UNIT
VIEW 40
Control
Driver’s door Passenger’s door Trunk lid flash
OPEN input OPEN input OPEN input lights
8
2 7 11
GRN GRN/ORN ORN RED/BLK

See
Trunk
See Courtesy Light Light
GRN GRN/ORN ORN EXTERIOR

LIGHTS
GRN GRN/ORN ORN
5
14 C462 8 C517
PHOTO 83 PHOTO 106
VIEW 70 ORN VIEW 35
2
TRUNK LATCH
GRN GRN/ORN SWITCH
Closed with
trunk open.
PHOTO 109
1
BLK
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S See Ground

DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH Distribution,
Closed with Closed with page 14-9.
BLK
door open. door open.
PHOTO 98 PHOTO 98 G601
PHOTO 111

133-1
s

s
t
Security System
USA
NOTE: Wires that look like HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ON OR START
this are part of UNDER- UNDER-
the optional Security System FUSE 41 FUSE 43 HOOD FUSE 14 DASH
harness installed between STOP
HORN
CLOCK
RADIO
FUSE/ ECU
EAT ECU
FUSE/
RELAY See Power RELAY
factory harness connectors. 15A 7.5A
BOX
15A
Distribution, BOX
PHOTO 5 page 10-8. PHOTO 51
10 C251 4 C254
See Power WHT/YEL PHOTO 7 WHT/YEL PHOTO 7
Distribution, VIEW 38 VIEW 20 8 C551
page 10-11. PHOTO 51
VIEW 54 See Power
See Power
Distribution, BLK/YEL Distribution,
WHT/YEL page 10-8.
WHT/YEL page 10-12.
5)
(* 3) 2 WHT/YEL
WHT/YEL BLK/YEL
HORN 3 C402
RELAY PHOTO 65 3 C402 8 C551
PHOTO 53 VIEW 53 PHOTO 65 PHOTO 51
WHT/YEL VIEW 53 BLK/YEL VIEW 54
WHT/YEL
(* 5) 1 SECURITY SECURITY
3) IN-LINE IN-LINE
LT GRN/BLU BLU/RED
3A FUSE 3A FUSE
3 C409 HOLDER 2 HOLDER 1
PHOTO BLU/RED
LT GRN/BLU PHOTO 115 PHOTO 115
60 10 C201
11 PHOTO 75 WHT/YEL
WHT/YEL WHT/YEL VIEW 39
3 C409 2 LEFT 2 RIGHT WHT/YEL
PHOTO BLK/YEL
BLU/ 60 HORN HORN 1 C16
RED PHOTO 3 PHOTO 1
PHOTO 114
WHT
SECURITY
1 1 INDICATOR
BLU/RED BLU/RED ANTENNA
See C201
Horns 8 9
PHOTO 75
BLK BLK VIEW 39
RED WHT/YEL
LT GRN/BLU See Ground 2 C16
BLK Distribution, PHOTO 114
RED
G401 page 14-4.
18
PHOTO 56 14 10 11
Horn control Security Battery Ignition Antenna

Glass indicator input
Disarm/valet Breakage control Ignition key
Ground switch input Microphone switch input
13 5 15
BLU BLU/YEL 2
BLU/YEL BLU/YEL
1 C17 See Ground See Ignition
BLU PHOTO 118 Distribution, Key Reminder
BLU/YEL
page 14-5. C410
DISARM/ 2 C410 PHOTO 60
BLK VALET PHOTO 60 VIEW 1
SWITCH BLU/WHT VIEW 1
PHOTO 114 BLK 3 B
BLK
STEERING
10 C551 Ignition LOCK
3 C17 PHOTO 51 Key Switch PHOTO 62
PHOTO 118 BLK VIEW 54 VIEW 78
BLK Closed with
key in ignition.
BLK C551
PHOTO 51 4 B
10 VIEW 54 BLU/WHT
UNDER-DASH 6 C410
See Ground FUSE/RELAY PHOTO 60 * = ’97-’98 Models
Distribution, BLK VIEW 1
BOX
page 14-5. PHOTO 51 6 C410
PHOTO 60
16 C433 BLK VIEW 1 BLK
PHOTO 57
BLK VIEW 69 See Ground See Ground
BLK page 14-4.
page 14-4.
G401 G401
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 56

133-2
s

s
t
+ –
Security System
NOTE: Wires that look like this

’99-’01 Models
are part of the optional Security System
harness installed between factory KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
PHOTO 129
harness connectors. VIEW 86
Unlock Lock
output output
’97-’98 Models 5 6
GRN/ORN RED/WHT
PASSENGER’S MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT 2)
PHOTO 83 (Type SH 10)
VIEW 80
33 C461
(Type SH 11) PHOTO 83
VIEW 26
Unlock Lock
input input GRN/ORN RED/WHT
5 4 (B See Power
(D in S/M) Door Locks
BLU/ORN BLK/WHT
GRN/ RED/
See Power ORN WHT
Door Locks
GRN/ORN RED/WHT
BLU/ BLK/
ORN WHT 2
1 C407
PHOTO 131
GRN/ORN RED/WHT
BLU/ORN BLK/WHT
1 2 C407
PHOTO 116 GRN/ GRN/ GRN/ RED/ RED/
BLU/ORN BLK/WHT ORN ORN ORN WHT WHT
8 6 8 7 1 6 22
Unlock output Lock output

Unlock input Lock input
Siren control Hood
switch input
9 21 4 SECURITY
CONTROL
RED WHT YEL/RED UNIT
REMOTE PHOTO 113
3 1 2 C18 TRANSMITTER VIEW 72
WHT YEL/RED
1 C19 2 C20
WHT YEL/RED
SIREN HOOD
SWITCH
RED
RED BLK
C19 1 C20
BLK
G301
PHOTO 16
Optional
133-3
s

s
t
Security System
USA
NOTE: Wires that look like this are part of the optional Security System harness installed
between factory harness connectors.
SECURITY
CONTROL
UNIT
Door open input Trunk open input PHOTO 113
VIEW 72
2
3
ORN
ORN 11 ORN
See
BLK/WHT Indicators
C402
PHOTO 65
VIEW 53
ORN
SECURITY 11 C402
DIODES PHOTO 65
PHOTO 117 VIEW 53
ORN
8 C462
GRN GRN/ORN PHOTO 83
VIEW 70
ORN
ORN See
GRN GRN/ORN
Trunk
Light
2 1 C402
PHOTO 65
VIEW 53
GRN GRN/ORN ORN
GRN GRN/ORN
See Indicators 8 C517

PHOTO 106
VIEW 35
2 1 C402
PHOTO 65 ORN
VIEW 53
GRN GRN/ORN
2
See Door TRUNK LATCH
Courtesy SWITCH
Lights Closed with
trunk open.
GRN GRN/ORN PHOTO 109
1
14 5 C462
PHOTO 83 BLK
VIEW 70
GRN GRN/ORN See Ground

Distribution,
page 14-9.
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S BLK

DOOR DOOR
SWITCH SWITCH
door open. door open. G601

133-4
s

s
t
+ –
Security System
HOT AT ALL TIMES

NOTE: Wires that look like this
are part of the optional Security System
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 42
SMALL LIGHT BOX harness connectors.
20A PHOTO 5
2 C251
PHOTO 7
RED/GRN VIEW 38
5 C408
PHOTO 60
RED/GRN
’97-’98 Models
RED/GRN
To A on
page 133-6.
SECURITY
IN-LINE
FUSE RED/GRN
15A
HOLDER 2
PHOTO 114 5 C408
PHOTO 60
RED/GRN RED/GRN
RED/GRN
1 2 4
LIGHT COMBINATION
FLASHER LIGHT
RELAY SWITCH
PHOTO 115 VIEW 50
4 3
RED/BLK
7
RED/BLK RED/BLK See Headlight
BLU/RED Switch,
C551 page 100-3.
RED/BLK PHOTO 51
C551 VIEW 54
PHOTO 51
17 7 VIEW 54
SECURITY UNDER-DASH
Light CONTROL See Headlight FUSE/RELAY
flash UNIT Switch, BOX
control PHOTO 113 page 100-3. PHOTO 51
VIEW 72
RED/BLK
See Headlight
Switch, pages
100-1 and 100-2.
RED/BLK
EXTERIOR
and
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
See Ground
Distribution

133-5
s

s
t
Security System
’97-’98 USA Models Only
From A on NOTE: Wires that look like this
page 133-5. are part of the optional Security System
harness connectors.
RED/GRN
SECURITY
IN-LINE
7.5A FUSE
HOLDER 3
PHOTO 114
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK
6 1
DRIVER’S ONLY
UNLOCK RELAY
PHOTO 115
VIEW 18
3 2 4
LT GRN/RED
LT GRN/RED
2 C426
PHOTO 52
2 C426 LT GRN/RED
PHOTO 52
LT GRN/RED
C406
(Terminal 1-2)
17 C430 PHOTO 59
PHOTO 97 LT GRN/RED
VIEW 61
VIEW 73
LT GRN/RED
10 C464
PHOTO 97
5 C654 VIEW 74
LT GRN/RED
PHOTO 95
VIEW 6
GRN/RED YEL/RED 1 C684
PHOTO 95
DRIVER’S YEL/RED
Driver’s DOOR
Door LOCK PASSENGER’S
M ASSEMBLY
Lock DOOR LOCK
Actuator M
ACTUATOR
WHT/RED WHT/RED LT GRN/RED
4 C654 2 C684
PHOTO 95 PHOTO 95
VIEW 6
WHT/RED WHT/RED
16 C430 5 C464
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97
VIEW 73 VIEW 74
WHT/RED WHT/RED
C406
(Terminals 11-12)
PHOTO 59
VIEW 61
WHT/RED
7 7 8 C
Driver’s SECURITY DRIVER’S
CONTROL Lock + Unlock + MULTIPLEX
only
unlock UNIT CONTROL
PHOTO 113 UNIT
relay VIEW 72 PHOTO 58
control VIEW 81
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PHOTO 51

133-6
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Security System
The security system control unit has a 3 position At the end of the alarm cycle, the system will
switch: Manual, Auto, and Auto Lock. Here’s what automatically rearm.
happens when you arm the system, regardless of
switch position:
Disarming the Security System
D The parking lights will flash once.
There are two ways to disarm the security system:
D The security indicator will flash once per second
after the system is armed. D With the transmitter
With the switch in the Manual position, the security D With the disarm/valet switch
system can only be armed by using the remote When the system is disarmed, regardless of the
control transmitter. After you remove the key from method used, the parking lights will flash two times.
the ignition and close both doors, the trunk, and the To disarm the system with the transmitter, press the
hood (optional), press the lock button on the unlock button (if the system is in the beep sound
transmitter and the system will arm (if the system is mode, the horn or optional siren will sound two times
in the beep sound mode, the horn or optional siren if the alarm has not been triggered, however, will
will sound once). The doors will automatically lock sound three times if the alarm has been triggered.
when the system is armed. The driver’s door will unlock (pressing the unlock
With the switch in the AUTO position, the security button twice will unlock all doors).
system will arm itself within about 20 seconds after To disarm the security system using the
you turn the engine off, remove the key from the disarm/valet switch, enter the car and turn the
ignition, and close the trunk, hood (optional) or last ignition switch to ON (ll) then press the disarm/valet
door. If a door is opened during the 20-second exit switch button. If you open the door when the control
delay time, the timer will reset itself. The remote unit switch is in Auto or Auto Lock, a 20-second
control transmitter can still be used to arm the entry delay will give you time to disarm the system.
system with the switch in AUTO position (see However, when the system is armed by the
manual for details). transmitter, the entry delay time is changed to zero
With the switch in Auto Lock position, the security seconds, and the alarm is triggered as soon as you
system will arm itself and lock the doors about 20 open the door.
seconds after you turn the engine off, remove the
key from the ignition, and close the trunk, hood Identifying Tripped Sensors
(optional) or last door. If a door is opened during the
20-second exit delay time, the timer will reset. The The system will indicate the sensor which triggered
remote control transmitter can still be used to arm the alarm through the security indicator LED. With
the system in the Auto Lock position. the key out of the ignition switch, press the
disarm/valet switch three times in five seconds
when the system is disarmed. The status LED will
Triggering the Alarm
blink according to the following code:
After the security system is armed, the sound of Sensors Number of Flashes
breaking glass or the opening of either door, trunk, Door 1 blink, pause, repeat
or hood (optional) will trigger the alarm, and cause Trunk 2 blinks, pause, repeat
the following: System Switches 3 blinks, pause, repeat
D The horn or optional siren will sound for one Glass Breakage 4 blinks, pause, repeat
alarm duration (30 seconds for horn or 60 Hood 5 blinks, pause, repeat
seconds for siren).
D The parking lights will flash. For further operating instructions and
troubleshooting, see the security system owner’s
D The security indicator LED will flash twice per manual.
second.

133-7
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Interlock System
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 41 FUSE/RELAY
STOP HORN BOX
15A PHOTO 5
10 C251
WHT/YEL PHOTO 7
VIEW 38 See Power
Distribution,
WHT/YEL page 10-11.
WHT/YEL
5 C410 4
PHOTO 60 THROTTLE
WHT/YEL VIEW 1 BRAKE SWITCH
Closed with brake POSITION
7 B pedal depressed. Sensor (TP) SENSOR
STEERING output PHOTO 47
PHOTO 64
See Entry Light LOCK
Timer System PHOTO 62 3 2
VIEW 78 WHT/BLK
Key Interlock See ABS, RED/BLK
Switch Cruise
Closed with Control 5 C140
key pushed. WHT/BLK PHOTO 8
C438 RED/BLK VIEW 31
4 PHOTO 57 (Not Used)
3 C434 UNDER- RED/BLK
See
2 C DASH PGM-FI
Key FUSE/
Interlock RELAY
13 C432 BOX
Solenoid
14 C432 PHOTO 51
(Not Used)
PHOTO 57
WHT/BLK
1 C VIEW 49
6 B WHT/BLK See
Brake
BLK/RED WHT/ WHT/BLK
Lights RED/BLK
BLU
13 C454
WHT/RED PHOTO 76
WHT/BLK VIEW 63
WHT/BLU WHT/BLK
See
C410 PGM-FI
3 4 PHOTO 60
VIEW 1
WHT/BLK
(Not
WHT/RED Used) 12 4 B
(STOP SW) (TPS)
8 C486 Brake TP
PHOTO 87
WHT/BLK VIEW 27 switch sensor
input input
MODE
WHT/ SWITCH
BLK
PARKING
PIN SWITCH
Closed with
shift lever in park.
PHOTO 85
BLK/
WHT
BLK/WHT
3 C486
PHOTO 87
VIEW 27
BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-7.
BLK
G471
PHOTO 77

138
s

s
t
+ –
Interlock System
UNDER-DASH
HOT IN ACC OR ON HOT IN ON OR START FUSE/RELAY BOX
PHOTO 51
FUSE 14
FUSE 18 ECU
ACC EAT ECU
7.5A 15A
page 10-8.
3 C433 C984 7 C432
YEL/RED PHOTO 57 OPTION PHOTO 57
VIEW 69 BLK/YEL VIEW 49
CONNECTOR
PHOTO 52
See Power See Power
page 10-3. page 10-9.
YEL/RED
BLK/YEL
1
SHIFT
LOCK
SOLENOID
PHOTO 86
2
GRN/YEL
2 C485
PHOTO 85
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL 2 6
C453
10 PHOTO 76 SHIFT
VIEW 2 LOCK
GRN/YEL RELAY
(A (E in S/M) PHOTO 85
15 VIEW 15
PASSENGER’S 4
Shift lock MULTIPLEX 3
solenoid control Park GRN/
Shift lock position CONTROL
UNIT WHT BLK
circuit input Ground input PHOTO 83
VIEW 80 2
13 14 16 (A SHIFT
WHT/GRN (E in S/M) LOCK
BLK/BLU
DIODE
9 C453 PHOTO 79
PHOTO 76 4 C453
VIEW 2 PHOTO 76 1
WHT/GRN BLK/BLU VIEW 2
RED
See A/T See A/T
Controls, BLK/BLU Controls,
22 A
A/T Gear A/T Gear
(ILU) Position Position
BLK/BLU RED
Shift lock Indicator Indicator
circuit 7 5 C141
PHOTO 8
control RED VIEW 43
BLK/BLU
8 C119
10
PHOTO 30
BLK/BLU RED VIEW 30
TRANSMISSION A/T GEAR
CONTROL D4 POSITION
MODULE N D3 SWITCH
(TCM) R 2
PHOTO 33
PHOTO 80 See Ground
VIEW 83 Distribution, P 1
page 14-6.
BLK
RED/WHT
3 C119
PHOTO 30
RED/WHT VIEW 30
10 C141
PHOTO 8
BLK VIEW 43
See Ground
Distribution,
BLK page 14-7.
BLK
G402 G471
PHOTO 84 PHOTO 77

138-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Interlock System

Voltage is supplied at all times to the key interlock

switch through fuse 41. When you push the key
while it is in the ignition, battery voltage is provided
to the key interlock solenoid. When the A/T shift
lever is in PARK, the parking pin switch provides
ground to the key interlock solenoid, the solenoid is
energized, and the key can then be turned to the
LOCK (0) position.

Battery voltage is supplied at all times through fuse

41 to the brake switch. With the ignition in ON (II) or
START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse
18 to the shift lock solenoid. When you push the
brake pedal, battery voltage is applied through the
WHT/BLK wire to the transmission control module
(TCM). If, at the same time, you do not push the
accelerator pedal, a low voltage signal is sent
through the RED/BLK wire to the TCM. The TCM
then applies voltage through the WHT/GRN wire to
the shift lock circuit in the passenger’s multiplex
control unit. If the shift lever is in the PARK position,
the shift lock circuit provides ground to the shift lock
solenoid. The solenoid is then energized and the
shift lever can be moved from the PARK position.
Refer to the Service Manual (Section 14, Automatic
Transmission) for specific tests or troubleshooting
procedures.

138-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Power Mirrors
USA
NOTE: The power mirror switch contains three switches (designated 1, 2, and 3). The three switches are not
mechanically connected, but operate independently or together depending on the mirror direction selected (up,
down, left, right). Refer to the table below for internal switch positions according to the mirrror direction selected.
HOT IN ON
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 9 FUSE/RELAY
R/C MIRROR See Power BOX
(ABS, ATTS) PHOTO 51
7.5A Distribution,
page 10-4. Internal Switch Positions
8 C432 Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3

YEL/BLK PHOTO 57 UP A B B
VIEW 49 See Power
Distribution, Mirror DOWN B A A
YEL/BLK pages 10-4 direction
and 10-5. selected LEFT A A B
8 C430
PHOTO 97 RIGHT B B A
YEL/BLK VIEW 73
9 A
POWER
MIRROR
SWITCH
A B A B A B VIEW 77
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3
Mirror Selector Switch
5 7 4 6 3 10 A
BLU/WHT
BLK
YEL/WHT BLU/WHT LT GRN

BLK
14 C430
13 15 22 PHOTO 97
VIEW 73
BLU/WHT LT GRN
YEL/WHT
BLK
C406 C406 C406

(Terminals (Terminals (Terminals
15-16) 19-20) 17-18)
BLU/GRN BLU/WHT BLU/ORN YEL/WHT BLU/WHT LT GRN BLK BLK
8 7 9 C464
PHOTO 97
VIEW 74
2 C657 2 C687
1 3 PHOTO 93 1 3 PHOTO 93
See Ground
YEL/RED YEL/WHT YEL/BLK BLU/GRN YEL/WHT BLU/BLK
Distribution,
page 14-4.
LEFT RIGHT
UP/DOWN POWER UP/DOWN POWER
M MIRROR M MIRROR
LEFT/RIGHT LEFT/RIGHT
M M
G401
PHOTO 56

141
s

s
t
+ –
Power Mirrors
Canada
NOTE: The power mirror switch contains three switches (designated 1, 2, and 3). The three switches are not
mechanically connected, but operate independently or together depending on the mirror direction selected (up,
down, left, right). Refer to the table below for internal switch positions according to the mirrror direction selected.
HOT IN ON
UNDER-DASH
FUSE 9 FUSE/RELAY
R/C MIRROR See Power BOX
(ABS, ATTS) Distribution, PHOTO 51 Internal Switch Positions
7.5A page 10-4.
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3
8 C432 UP A B B
PHOTO 57
YEL/BLK VIEW 49 See Power Mirror
Distribution, DOWN B A A
direction
pages 10-4 selected LEFT A A B
YEL/BLK and 10-5.
8 C430 RIGHT B B A
PHOTO 97
YEL/BLK VIEW 73
POWER
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
MIRROR
SWITCH
2 B 9 A VIEW 77
Mirror Mirror Control Switch

Defogger
Switch
A B A B
A B
ON Switch
2 Switch 3
OFF Switch
1 Mirror Selector Switch
1 B 5 7 4 6 3 10 A
ORN/ BLU/WHT
WHT
ORN/WHT
BLK
18 14 C430
13 15 PHOTO 97
ORN/
YEL/WHT BLU/WHT LT GRN VIEW 73
WHT
C406 C406 C406 C406

(Terminals (Terminals (Terminals (Terminals
13-14) YEL/ 15-16) 19-20) 17-18)
PHOTO 59 PHOTO 59
ORN/ BLU/GRN BLU/ BLU/ ORN/WHT VIEW 61 WHT BLU/WHT LT GRN VIEW 61
WHT WHT ORN
8 7 9
25 C464
PHOTO 97
ORN/WHT
VIEW 74
1 5 C657 1 5 4 6 C687
4 6 PHOTO 93 PHOTO 93
VIEW 7 VIEW 8
UP/DOWN UP/DOWN
DEFOG- M
DEFOG- M
GER GER
LEFT/RIGHT LEFT/RIGHT
M M
See Ground
Distribution,
LEFT POWER RIGHT POWER page 14-4.
2 C657 MIRROR 2 C687 MIRROR
PHOTO 93 PHOTO 93
BLK BLK
VIEW 7 VIEW 8 See Ground
Distribution, page 14-6.
BLK
C430 page 14-6. BLK BLK
C464
21 PHOTO 97 18 PHOTO 97 BLK
VIEW 73 BLK BLK BLK VIEW 74
G401
G402 PHOTO 56
PHOTO 84
141-1
s

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Power Mirrors
The two outside mirrors are controlled by the power Mirror Right
mirror switch. Each mirror has two reversible motors:
one motor moves the mirror up and down and the With the power mirror switch in the right position,
other motor moves the mirror left and right. switch 3 is moved to the A position. Switch 3 applies
battery voltage through the mirror selector switch to
The power mirror switch contains three switches to the left or right left/right motor. The motor is grounded
control mirror direction, and two switches to select the through the mirror selector switch and switch 2 in the
left or right mirror. With the ignition switch in ON (II), B position to G401.
battery voltage is supplied to the power mirror switch.
The mirror selector switch directs voltage from two of Refer to the Service Manual (Section 23, Electrical)
the direction switches to either the left or the right for specific tests or troubleshooting procedures.
mirror. Each direction switch is used for more than
one function.
Mirror Up
With the power mirror switch in the up position, switch

1 is moved to the A position. Switch 1 applies battery
voltage to both the left and right power mirror up/down
motors. If the mirror selector switch is in the left
position, the left up/down motor is grounded through
the mirror selector switch and switch 2 in the B
position to G401. If the right mirror up/down motor is
selected, it is also grounded through switch 2 in the
B position.
Mirror Down
With the power mirror switch in the down position,

switches 2 and 3 are moved to the A position. Switch
2 applies battery voltage to the left or right power
mirror up/down motor as determined by the mirror
selector switch. The selected mirror motor is
grounded through switch 1 in the B position to G401.
When switch 2 is moved to position A, it also applies
battery voltage to the selected mirror left/right motor.
With switch 3 in the A position, battery voltage is
supplied to both sides of the left/right motor so it does
not move.
Mirror Left
With the power mirror switch in the left position,

switches 1 and 2 are moved to the A position. Switch 2
applies battery voltage to the left or right power mirror
left/right motor as determined by the mirror selector
switch. The selected mirror motor is grounded through
switch 3 in the B position to G401. When switch 2 is
moved to position A, it also applies battery voltage to
the selected mirror up/down motor. With switch 1 in the
A position, battery voltage is supplied to both sides of
the up/down motor so it does not move.

141-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Seat Heaters (Canada)
UNDER-DASH
R/C MIRROR BOX
(ABS, ATTS) See Power (HEATED SEAT)
15A PHOTO 51
7.5A Distribution,
page 10-4.
8 C432 2 C431
PHOTO 57 PHOTO 57
YEL/BLK
VIEW 49 See Power VIEW 48
Distribution, WHT/BLK
YEL/BLK page 10-4.
5)
(** 3) 2
SEAT
HEATER
RELAY
(** 5)
3) 1 BLK/GRN
BLK/GRN
See Dash and C406
Console Lights (Terminals 5-7)
PHOTO 59
BLK/GRN
VIEW 61
BLK RED/BLK 12 C430
PHOTO 97
BLK/GRN
VIEW 73
2 6
DRIVER’S
SEAT
HIGH HEATER
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW
SWITCH
VIEW 11
SEAT INDICATOR
HEATER LIGHTS
SWITCH
LIGHT
1
4 5 3
GRN/BLU GRN/RED BLK
See Ground
Distribution, 6 C430 See Ground
page 14-6. 11 PHOTO 97
GRN/BLU GRN/RED VIEW 73
Distribution,
page 14-4.
RED (*8) (*5)
BLK
7) 1)
C461
PHOTO 83
See Dash GRN/BLU GRN/RED VIEW 26
G402 and Console 3 2 G401
Lights C505 PHOTO 56
PHOTO 84
DRIVER’S
SEAT- SEAT SEAT
BACK CUSHION HEATER
1 C505
BLK BLK
See Ground
BLK Distribution,
page 14-8.
** = All except Type SH
G501 ** = 97-‘98 Models
PHOTO 99

147
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Seat Heaters (Canada)
BLK/GRN
See Dash
and Console
Lights 1 C464
PHOTO 97
VIEW 74
BLK/GRN
RED/BLK
2 6
PASSENGER’S
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH
HIGH VIEW 14
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW
SEAT INDICATOR
HEATER LIGHTS
SWITCH
LIGHT
1
4 5 3
WHT/BLU WHT/BLK BLK
RED 3 6 C464
PHOTO 97 See Ground
WHT/BLU WHT/BLK VIEW 74 Distribution,
(*6) page 14-6.
(*7)
6) 2) C461
See Dash PHOTO 83
and Console WHT/BLU WHT/BLK
VIEW 26
Lights BLK
2
3 C503 G402
PHOTO 84
PASSENGER’S
SEAT- SEAT SEAT HEATER
BACK CUSHION
1 C503
BLK
* = All except Type SH

147-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Stereo Sound System
HOT IN ACC OR ON HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER- UNDER-HOOD
FUSE 18 DASH FUSE/RELAY
ACC FUSE/ FUSE 46 BOX
RELAY FUSE 43 PHOTO 5
7.5A INTERIOR
LIGHTS CLOCK
BOX RADIO
PHOTO 51 (*15A)
10A 7.5A
3 C433 C984 6 C251 4 C254

PHOTO 57 OPTION WHT/BLU PHOTO 7 WHT/YEL PHOTO 7
VIEW 69 CONNECTOR VIEW 38 VIEW 20
YEL/RED
PHOTO 52 C456
YEL/RED (Terminals
1-3)
PHOTO 82
VIEW 64
See Power REAR

YEL/RED WHT/BLU
Distribution, See Power Distribution, Radio WINDOW
5 page 10-3. page 10-13. Window
(*3) 2 Antenna
ACCESSORY
POWER See Power
SOCKET Distribution,
RELAY page 10-12.
PHOTO 53
(*5) 1
3 ANTENNA
WHT/RED LEAD
BLK
WHT/YEL
18 C454
See Ground PHOTO 76
WHT/RED VIEW 63
Distribution,
page 14-5. See Dash and
Console Lights
(**6) C482
(***7) PHOTO 71
BLK VIEW 34
WHT/RED
WHT/RED
See Accessory
Power Socket RED/BLK RED RADIO
G401 WHT/RED ANTENNA
PHOTO 56
SHIELD
2) 10) 9) GROUND
(*5) (*4) (*3) 19
Power Battery (memory) Lights Dim Antenna

(ignition ON) ON control input
Driver’s speaker Passenger’s speaker input
+ – + – Ground
(*2) (*10) (*1) (*9) (*14)
8) 18) 7) 17) 20)
BLU/GRN GRY/BLK RED/GRN BRN/BLK
* = ’97-’98 Models
9 20 8 19 C403 ** =
PHOTO 65

BLU/GRN GRY/BLK RED/GRN BRN/BLK VIEW 60
*** = 1
25 C430 20 C464
24 19
PHOTO 97 PHOTO 97 BLK
VIEW 73 VIEW 74
RED/GRN BRN/BLK BLU/GRN GRY/BLK
BRN/BLK GRY/BLK
1 C658 1 C688
BLK PHOTO 93 PHOTO 93
2 2 BLK
DRIVER’S LEFT PASSENGER’S RIGHT
DOOR TWEETER DOOR TWEETER
SPEAKER SPEAKER
1 BLK/WHT 1 BLK/WHT
2 C658 2 C688
PHOTO 93 PHOTO 93
RED/GRN BLU/GRN
G551
PHOTO 69
150
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
Stereo Sound System
HOT AT ALL TIMES
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
FUSE 5 BOX
(RR SPEAKER) PHOTO 51
10A
11 C431
PHOTO 57
WHT/GRN VIEW 48
8) C461
(Canada, Type SH 4) PHOTO 83
VIEW 26
WHT/GRN STEREO
AMPLIFIER
PHOTO 105
4 VIEW 58
Left rear Right rear Battery

speaker speaker input
signal signal
+ – + – Ground + – + – + – + –
7 17 8 18 3 5 15 1 9 6 16 2 10
BLU/ GRY/ RED/ BRN/
YEL WHT YEL WHT
16 17 2 13 C462
PHOTO
83
VIEW 70
BLU/ GRY/ RED/ BRN/
YEL WHT YEL WHT BLK LT GRN GRN/WHT PNK YEL/WHT LT BLU BLU/WHT WHT/YEL LT GRN/
WHT
7 18 6 17 C403
PHOTO
65
BLU/ GRY/ RED/ BRN/ VIEW 60
YEL WHT YEL WHT
6) 16) 5) 15)
(*7) (*15) (*8) (*16)
+ – + –
Left rear Right rear
speaker speaker
signal signal
AUDIO UNIT
VIEW 55
BRAIDED
See Ground WIRE
Distribution,
page 14-8.
3 4 1 2 C513 3 4 1 2 C516
PHOTO PHOTO
RED BLK/RED BLU GRY 103 RED BLK/RED BLU GRY 105
BLK RED BLK/RED BLU GRY RED BLK/RED BLU GRY
LEFT REAR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR

MICROPHONE SPEAKER SPEAKER MICROPHONE
LEFT SPEAKER RIGHT SPEAKER

ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
G501
* = ‘97-‘98 Models PHOTO 99

150-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Clock
METER BOX CLOCK BOX
(CRUISE CONTROL) PHOTO 51 RADIO PHOTO 5
15A 7.5A
See Power
Distribution
page 10-7. 4 C254
PHOTO 7
VIEW 20
4 C551
PHOTO 51
VIEW 54
WHT/YEL
YEL
C559
(Terminals 7-10)
PHOTO 67
VIEW 66
See Power
Distribution,
page 10-12.
See Power
YEL Distribution,
page 10-7.
See Dash and
Console Lights
WHT/YEL RED/BLK
2 1 3
CLOCK
Ignition Battery Illumination
input input input
Ground
4
BLK
See Ground
Distribution,
page 14-5.
BLK
G401
PHOTO 56

154
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Accessory Power Socket
HOT IN ACC OR ON HOT AT ALL TIMES
ACC BOX INTERIOR BOX
7.5A PHOTO 51 LIGHTS PHOTO 5
(*15A)
10A
3 C433 C984 6 C251

PHOTO 57 PHOTO 7
OPTION WHT/BLU VIEW 38
VIEW 69
CONNECTOR
YEL/RED PHOTO 52
C456
YEL/RED See Power (Terminals
Distribution, 1-3)
page 10-3. PHOTO 82
WHT/BLU VIEW 64
YEL/RED
See Power
Distribution,
5 page 10-13.
(*3) 2
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
RELAY
PHOTO (53*)
(*5) 1 PHOTO 130
3
WHT/RED
18 C454
PHOTO 76
VIEW 63
WHT/RED
(**6) C482
PHOTO 71
(*** 7) VIEW 34
WHT/RED
WHT/RED
See Stereo
Sound System
WHT/RED
BLK
C4
PHOTO 71
YEL/BLU
A
ACCESSORY
POWER
* = SOCKET
** =

*** = 1

B
BLK

page 14-5. page 14-5.
BLK BLK
G401 G401
PHOTO 56 PHOTO 56

155
s
Menu Circuit Index

1. Behind Right Side of Front Bumper
A/C
PRESSURE
SWITCH RIGHT
HORN
C9
(2-GRY)

2. Behind Center of Front Bumper
G3

3. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper
LEFT
HORN

4. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
MOTOR
C317
(1-BLK)
C8
(2-GRY)

5. Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
PURGE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
(’97 California,
’98-’01 Models)
CRUISE
CONTROL
ACTUATOR
C287
(4-GRY)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

6. Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
ABS PUMP
RADIATOR MOTOR
FAN RELAY RELAY
HEADLIGHT DIMMER
RELAY RELAY
T101
T1

7. Underside of Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
ELECTRICAL
LOAD
DETECTOR
(ELD) UNIT
C254
(7-BRN)
C253
(3-BRN)
C251 C252
(11-GRY) (9-GRY)

8. Right Rear of Engine Compartment
EVAPORATIVE
C142 EMISSION
(14-BLU) (EVAP) PURGE
FLOW SWITCH
(‘97 (49 states,
Canada) Models)
C141
(14-GRY)
C292
(2-GRY)
(‘97
C140 Model)
(10-GRY)
C143
(14-GRY) (A/T)
C144 (8-GRY) (M/T)
(14-BLU)

9. Right Side of Engine Compartment
C139
(2-GRY)
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
(2-CLR)

10. Right Front Corner of Engine Compartment
G201

11. Right Front of Engine Compartment
G1

12. Front of Engine Compartment
CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR
RADIATOR
FAN MOTOR

13. Lower Right Front of Radiator
C207
(2-GRY)

14. Lower Left of Radiator
C322
(1-GRY)

15. Left Front Corner of Engine Compartment
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CONDENSER
CLUTCH
FAN
RELAY
RELAY

16. Left Front Corner of Engine Compartment
G301
G302
C319
(3-GRY)

17. Left Front of Engine Compartment
ABS
C312 PUMP
(2-ORN) MOTOR
C314
(10-ORN)
ABS
MODULATOR
UNIT

18. Left Side of Engine Compartment
G2
T5
C311
(2-GRY)
T4
EXHAUST GAS
RECIRCULATION
(EGR) CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE

19. Left Side of Air Scoop
WINDSHIELD
WIPER MOTOR

20. Left Rear of Engine Compartment
C310
(1-BLK)
C309
(1-BLK)
BRAKE
FLUID
LEVEL
SWITCH WINDSHIELD
WIPER
INTERMITTENT
RELAY

21. Right Side of Engine
VTEC VTEC
SOLENOID PRESSURE
VALVE SWITCH
EXHAUST GAS
RECIRCULATION
(EGR) VALVE
LIFT SENSOR
C123
(1-GRY)
G101

2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
VEHICLE
SPEED
SENSOR
(VSS)

IGNITION
COIL
RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCH

24. Right Front of Engine
DISTRIBUTOR
ASSEMBLY
C131
(4-GRY)
C136
(2-GRY)

25. Right Rear of Engine (All except Type SH)
C112
(8-GRY)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

26. Top of Manual Transmission
C126
(1-BLK)
C127
(1-BLK)
BACK-UP
LIGHTS
SWITCH

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENDING UNIT

28. Front of Automatic Transmission
C135
(2-GRY)
LOCK-UP
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE and
SHIFT
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A

29. Right Side of Engine Compartment
C257
(2-ORN)
INTAKE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE

30. Top of Automatic Transmission
C119
(10-GRY)
COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR

31. Lower Right Front of Engine Compartment
T3

32. Front of Automatic Transmission
SHIFT
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE B
SHIFT
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE C

33. Lower Right Side of Automatic Transmission
A/T GEAR
POSITION
SWITCH

34. Lower Front of Automatic Transmission
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A

35. Lower Front of Automatic Transmission
MAINSHAFT
SPEED
SENSOR

36. Right Front of Engine
T2
STARTER

37. Left Front of Engine
ALTERNATOR
T102

38. Left Front of Engine Compartment
C323
(2-GRY)

39. Left Front of Engine
C15
(1-BLK)
THERMAL
PROTECTOR

40. Left Rear of Engine
C102
(4-GRY)

41. Left Rear of Engine
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
(IAT) SENSOR

42. Lower Left Rear of Engine (Type SH Similar)
TO CRANKSHAFT POSITION/
TOP DEAD CENTER
(CKP/TDC) SENSOR

43. Lower Rear of Engine (Except Type SH)
POWER
ENGINE STEERING
OIL PRESSURE
PRESSURE (PSP)
SWITCH SWITCH
C118
(4-GRY) C117
(14-GRY)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

44. Lower Rear of Engine (Except Type SH)
INTAKE AIR
BYPASS (IAB)
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE

45. Lower Rear of Engine (Type SH Similar)
KNOCK
SENSOR
(KS)

46. Top of Engine
No. 1-4
FUEL
INJECTORS
(BELOW)
IDLE AIR
CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE

47. Top Right Rear of Engine
MANIFOLD
THROTTLE ABSOLUTE
POSITION PRESSURE
(TP) SENSOR (MAP) SENSOR

48. Underside of Vehicle, Forward of TWC Converter
PRIMARY
HEATED
OXYGEN
SENSOR
(HO2S)

49. Underside of Vehicle, Below Passenger’s Footwell
C294
(4-GRY)
C293
(4-BLU)
(Type SH)

50. Underside of Vehicle, Rear of TWC Converter
SECONDARY
HEATED
OXYGEN
SENSOR
(HO2S)

51. Left Kick Panel Area
C551 C801
(16-BLU) (2-YEL)
C980 C976
(20-GRY) (5-BRN)
SRS
FUSE
BLOCK
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHT
DIODE C426/C427
(2-GRY)
C305 ‘97-‘98
(1-NAT) Models
only
C981-C984
OPTION
CONNECTORS
C304
(3-GRY)

53. Top of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
ABS ATTS FAIL-

FAIL-SAFE SAFE RELAY ACCESSORY
RELAY or REVERSE SOCKET
RELAY (A/T) RELAY
DOOR TURN
LOCK SIGNAL/
RELAY HORN
HAZARD RELAY
(’99-’01 RELAY
Models)

MOONROOF BLOWER
CLOSE MOTOR
RELAY RELAY
POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
MOONROOF
OPEN
RELAY

C302
(14-GRY)
C301
C303 (14-GRY)
(7-BRN)

G401

C431 C432
(14-BLU) (14-BLU)
C433
(22-BLU)
C435
(3-BLU)
C436
(5-BLU)
C437
(8-BLU) C438 C434
(4-BLU) (20-BLU)

C306
(20-BRN)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
B
(14-GRN)
DRIVER’S
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
C UNIT
(8-GRY) (A 14-CAVITY)
(UNDERNEATH)

59. Behind Left Side of Dash
PGM-FI C406
MAIN (20-WHT)
RELAY JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
C407
(2-GRY) MULTIPLEX
(‘97-‘98 CONTROL
Models UNIT
only) INSPECTION
CONNECTOR
(2-GRN)

60. Behind Dash, Left of Steering Column
C409
C408
(4-GRY)
(5-BRN)
C410
(6-GRY)
C411
(3-BRN)
C412
(10-GRY)

61. Behind Dash, Left of Steering Column
C416 SRS MEMORY

(3-YEL) ERASE
SIGNAL (MES)
CONNECTOR
STARTER (2-YEL)
CUT RELAY
B A
(3-WHT) (8-GRY)
IMMOBILIZER
CONTROL UNIT

62. Right Side of Steering Column
C6
(2-WHT)
C804
(2-YEL)
STEERING
LOCK

63. Underside of Steering Wheel
C7
(2-YEL)
CABLE
REEL

64. Behind Left Side of Dash
CLUTCH
SWITCH
CLUTCH BRAKE
INTERLOCK SWITCH
SWITCH

65. Behind Left Dash Ventilation Duct
C402
(16-GRY)
C401
(2-BRN)
C403
(20-GRY)

66. Gauge Assembly
B
(16-BLU) D
C A
(12-GRY) (16-GRN) (13-BLU)

67. Rear of Dash, Behind Gauge Assembly
C559
(20-BLU)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

68. Behind Dash, Right of Steering Column
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
MODE
CONTROL
MOTOR

69. Right Side of Driver’s Footwell
G551

70. Right Side of Driver’s Footwell
SRS
UNIT
G801

71. Below Center of Dash
C482 C483
(10-GRY) (12-GRN)
(All ‘97-’98 (A/T)
Models except C569
Type SH) (8-GRY) C570
(12-GRY) (2-BRN)
(Type SH and
all ‘99-’01 Models)
C4
(1-BLK)

72. Left Side of Front Passenger’s Footwell
DATA LINK SERVICE

CONNECTOR CHECK
(DLC) CONNECTOR
(16-GRY) (2-BLU)

73. Behind Glove Box
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
MOTOR
BLOWER
MOTOR
RESISTORS

74. Above Glove Box
FRONT
PASSENGER’S
AIRBAG
C806
(2-YEL)

75. Behind Right Side of Dash
G901 C463
(6-GRY)
C201
(12-GRN)

76. Left Front of Passenger’s Footwell
C454
(20-GRY)
A/C
DIODE
C453
(22-GRY) (A/T or TYPE SH)
(6-GRY) (M/T except SH)

77. Left Side of Front Passenger’s Footwell
C479
(20-BLK)
JUNCTION
G471 CONNECTOR

78. Above Left Side of Front Passenger’s Footwell
A/C
THERMOSTAT

79. Under Front Passenger’s Footrest (A/T)
SHIFT
LOCK
DIODE

80. Underside of Front Passenger’s Footrest
B A
(22-GRY) (A/T) (26-GRY) (A/T) A
(22-BLU) (M/T) (26-BLU) (M/T) (32-GRY)
TRANSMISSION C D ENGINE
CONTROL (31-BLU) (16-GRY)
– CONTROL
MODULE (TCM) MODULE
or ATTS (ECM)
CONTROL UNIT

81. Below Right Side of Dash
BLOWER
MOTOR

82. Right Kick Panel Area
C456
(20-ORN)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

83. Right Kick Panel Area
PASSENGER’S
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
ABS
CONTROL
UNIT
C462
(22-GRY)
C461
(8-GRY) (All except
Canada, TYPE SH)
(12-GRY) (Canada,
TYPE SH)

84. Right Kick Panel Area (Dash Removed)
G402
G403
G404

85. Below Left Side of Center Console
SHIFT
LOCK
RELAY
PARKING
C485 PIN
(2-GRY) SWITCH

86. Below Right Side of Center Console
SHIFT
LOCK
SOLENOID

PARKING
BRAKE
SWITCH
C486
(8-GRY)

C487
(2-GRY)

89. Inside of Left Front Wheel (Right Similar)
FRONT
WHEEL
SENSOR

90. Inside of Left Rear Wheel (Right Similar)
REAR
WHEEL
SENSOR

91. Left Rear Underside of Vehicle (Right Similar)
C609 (LEFT)
C608 (RIGHT)
(2-ORN)

92. Center Underside of Rear Bumper
C605
(2-GRY)

93. Driver’s Door (Passenger’s Similar)
C657 (LEFT)
C687 (RIGHT)
(3-GRY) (USA)
(6-CAVITY) (Canada)
C658 (LEFT)
C688 (RIGHT)
(2-GRY)

94. Inside of Driver’s Door Panel
DOOR
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT

C656 (LEFT)
C686 (RIGHT)
(3-GRY)
C654 (LEFT)
(6-GRY)
C684 (RIGHT)
(2-GRY)

C653 (LEFT)
(4-GRY)
C683 (RIGHT)
(2-GRY)

C430 (LEFT)
C464 (RIGHT)
(25-GRY)

98. Left Rear Quarter Area (Right Similar)
DOOR
SWITCH

99. Under Front Passenger’s Seat
G501

100. Underside of Driver’s Seat
C506
(2-GRY/BRN)

101. Center of Windshield Header
C702
(4-GRY)

102. Rear Underside of Ceiling
C703
MOONROOF (2-BLU/BRN)
MOTOR

103. Under Left Side of Rear Shelf, In Trunk
C513
(4-GRY)

104. Under Center of Rear Shelf, In Trunk
A
REAR WINDOW (1-BRN)
DEFOGGER COIL
B
(2-BRN)

105. Under Right Side of Rear Shelf, In Trunk
STEREO
AMPLIFIER C516
(4-GRY)

106. Right Side of Trunk
C517
(10-GRY)

107. Center Front of Trunk Floor
FUEL
FUEL TANK
PUMP UNIT

108. Right Side of Trunk Lid (Type SH)
C602
(2-GRY)

109. Trunk Latch Switch
TRUNK
LATCH
SWITCH

110. Left Rear of Trunk
C607
(6-GRY)
TRAILER
LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
(6-GRY)

111. Right Rear of Trunk
C604
(6-GRY) G601

112. Center of Spoiler
C3 (All except TYPE SH)

C632 (TYPE SH)
(1-BLK)
C2 (All except TYPE SH)

C633 (TYPE SH)
(1-BLK)

113. Above Accelerator Pedal (Dealer Installed Option)
SECURITY
CONTROL
UNIT

114. Behind Left Side of Dash (Dealer Installed Option)
SECURITY
IN-LINE
FUSE
HOLDER 2
DISARM/
VALET
SECURITY C16 SWITCH
IN-LINE (2-GRY)
FUSE
HOLDER 3

115. Left Side of Dash (Dealer Installed Option)
SECURITY
IN-LINE FUSE
HOLDER 1 and 2
LIGHT
FLASHER
RELAY
DRIVER’S ONLY
UNLOCK RELAY
(’97-’98
Models only)

116. Left Kick Panel Area (Dealer Installed Option)
FOG LIGHT
C407 IN-LINE
(2-GRY) FUSE
(’97-’98 HOLDER
Models
only)
FOG LIGHT
DIODE 3

FOG LIGHT
FOG LIGHT RELAY 2
RELAY 1
SECURITY
DIODES

FOG LIGHT
DIODE 2
FOG LIGHT
DIODE 1
C17
(3-GRY)

119. Center Rear of Engine Compartment
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
BYPASS SOLENOID
VALVE

EVAPORATIVE FUEL TANK

EMISSION (EVAP) PRESSURE
CONTROL CANISTER SENSOR
VENT SHUT VALVE
(’97 (California)-
’98 Models)

121. Left Rear of Engine Compartment (Type SH)
POWER
STEERING
PRESSURE
SWITCH

122. Underside of Vehicle, Rear of ATTS Unit (Type SH)
LEFT OIL LEFT

PRESSURE SOLENOID
SENSOR

123. Center Rear of Engine (Type SH)
C146
(14-GRY)

124. Lower Rear of Engine (Type SH)
INTAKE AIR BYPASS

(IAB) CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE

125. Lower Rear of Engine (Type SH)
C117 (14-GRY)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

126. Top of Steering Column (Type SH)
STEERING
ANGLE
SENSOR

127. Left Side of Passenger’s Footrest (Type SH)
C451
(3-GRY)
LATERAL
ACCELERATION
(Lg) SENSOR

128. Left Front of Trunk (Type SH)
YAW RATE
SENSOR

129. Below Left Quarter Panel (‘99-’01 Models)
KEYLESS
RECEIVER
UNIT

130. Right Rear of Engine Comp. (‘99-’01 Models)
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSIONS (EVAP)
CONTROL CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE

131. Left Kick Panel, Right of Fuse Box (‘99-’01 Models)
C407
(2-GRY)
(ALARM
CONNECTOR)
(NOT USED)

132. Left Kick Panel, On Fuse Box (‘99-’01 Models)
AUXILIARY
FUSE
HOLDER

Menu Circuit Index Terminal Numbering
Connector Views
1. C410
– Gray
– Behind dash, left of steering column, on bracket
– Connects main wire harness to steering column jumper
1 2
3 4 5 6
1 Male – WHT/BLK
Female – WHT
(Multiplex control system)
2 Male – BLU/YEL
Female – BLU/WHT
(Ignition key reminder)
3 A/T: WHT/RED (Interlock system)
4 A/T: Male – Not used
Female – WHT/BLU
(Interlock system)
5 WHT/YEL (Fuse 41)
6 Male – BLK
Female – BLU/WHT
(G401/G402)

+ –
Connector Views
2. C453
– Gray
– Above left side of front passenger’s footrest
– Connects main wire harness to ECM wire harness
1 2 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 8 9 10 11
3 4 5 6 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
M/T except Type SH: Type SH or A/T:

1 1 Type SH: RED/BLU (ATTS)
2 LT GRN/RED (ABS) 2 Type SH: ORN/GRN (ATTS)
3 BRN/YEL (PGM-FI) 3 Type SH: GRN/RED (Brake system indicator)
4 GRN/BLK (Back-up lights) 4 A/T: BLK/BLU (Interlock system)
5 GRN/RED (Charging system) Type SH: BLU/GRN (ATTS)
6 ORN (PGM-FI) 5 A/T: WHT (Back-up lights)
Type SH: YEL/WHT (ATTS)
6 A/T: GRY
(’97 Model Early Production: Starting system)
(’97 Model: All Except Early Production (Starting system)
Type SH: BLU/ORN (ATTS)
7 Type SH: GRY/RED (ATTS)
8 A/T: WHT/RED
Type SH: GRY/WHT
(ATTS)
9 A/T: WHT/GRN (Interlock system)
Type SH: WHT/BLU (ATTS)
10 A/T: GRN/YEL (Interlock system)
Type SH: WHT/RED (ATTS)
11 A/T: YEL/RED (Fuse 18)
Type SH: ORN (ATTS)
12 A/T: PNK (Cruise control)
Type SH: GRN/BLK (M/T: Back-up lights)
13 ORN (PGM-FI)
14 LT GRN/RED (ABS)
15 GRN/RED (Charging system)
16 Type SH: YEL/RED (ATTS)
17 Type SH: YEL (ATTS)
18 Type SH: GRN/BLK (ATTS)
19 Type SH: YEL/BLU (ATTS)
20 BRN/YEL (PGM-FI)
21 Type SH: YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
22 Type SH: GRN (ATTS)

Connector Views
3. C463
– Gray
– Behind right side of dash
– Connects main wire harness to roof wire harness
1 2
3 4 5 6
1 GRN/RED (Moonroof)
2 GRN/YEL (Moonroof)
3 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46)
4
5 WHT/BLK (Entry light control system)
6 BLK (G401/G402)

+ –
Connector Views
4. C604
– Gray
– On inside of right taillight assembly
– Connects rear wire harness to right taillight assembly
1 2
3 4 5 6
1 GRN/YEL (Turn signal and hazard warning lights)

2 Male – GRN/WHT
Female – WHT/BLK
(With Optional Spoiler: Brake lights)
(Without Optional Spoiler: Brake lights)
3 BLK (G601)
4 RED/BLK (Headlight switch)
5 GRN/BLK
(A/T: Back-up lights)
(M/T: Back-up lights)
6

Connector Views
5. C607
– Gray
– On inside of left taillight assembly
– Connects rear wire harness to left taillight assembly
1 2
3 4 5 6
1 Male – GRN/YEL
Female – GRN/BLU
(Turn signal and hazard warning lights)
2 Male – GRN/WHT
Female – WHT/BLK
3 BLK (G601)
5 GRN/BLK
6

+ –
Connector Views
6. C654
– Gray
– In driver’s door
– Connects driver’s door wire harness to driver’s
door lock assembly pigtail
1 2
3 4 5 6
1
2 Male – BLU/RED
Female – BLK/WHT
(All Models: Knob switch output – UNLOCK)
3 BLK (G401/G402)
4 WHT/RED
(’97-’98 Models: Lock/unlock control)
5 Male – YEL/RED
Female – LT GRN/RED
6 Male – BLU/WHT
Female – PNK
(Knob switch output – LOCK)

Connector Views
7. C657 (Canada)
– Gray
– Connects driver’s door wire harness to left
power mirror pigtail
1 2
3 4 5 6
1 ORN/WHT (Defogger control)

2 BLK (G401/G402)
3
4 BLU/WHT (Up/down control)
5 BLU/GRN (Common)
6 BLU/ORN (Left/right control)

+ –
Connector Views
8. C687 (Canada)
– Gray
– In passenger’s door
– Connects passenger’s door wire harness to right
power mirror pigtail
1 2
3 4 5 6
1 ORN/WHT (Defogger control)

2 BLK (G401/G402)
3
4 BLU/WHT (Up/down control)
5 YEL/WHT (Common)
6 LT GRN (Left/right control)

Connector Views
9. Cruise Control Main Switch
– Green
– Left side of dash
– On dashboard wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 BLK (G401/G402)
2 LT GRN (Cruise ON output)
3 RED/BLK (Lights ON input)
4 YEL (Fuse 13)
5 RED (Brightness control)
6

+ –
Connector Views
10. Dash Lights Brightness Controller
– Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6

3 RED/WHT (Controller output)
4 WHT/RED (Controller output)
5
6

Connector Views
11. Driver’s Seat Heater Switch (Canada)
– On driver’s door panel
– On driver’s door wire harness
1 2
3 4 5 6

3 BLK (G401/G402)
4 GRN/BLU (Seat heater control)
5 GRN/RED (Seat heater control)
6 BLK/GRN (Switched ignition input)

+ –
Connector Views
12. Hazard Warning Switch
– Blue
– Center of dash
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2 BLU/GRN (Right hazard lights output)
4 BLU/YEL (Left hazard lights output)
5 WHT/GRN (Fuse 39)

Connector Views
13. Heater Fan Switch
– Brown
– In heater control panel
– On heater sub wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 BLU/YEL (“2” speed control)

2 BLU/BLK (“3” speed control)
3 BLU/RED (“4” speed control)
4 BLK (G901)
5 BLU (“1” speed control)
6 GRN (Fan ON output)

+ –
Connector Views
14. Passenger’s Seat Heater Switch (Canada)
– On passenger’s door panel
– On passenger’s door wire harness
1 2
3 4 5 6

3 BLK (G401/G402)
4 WHT/BLU (Seat heater control)
5 WHT/BLK (Seat heater control)
6 BLK/GRN (Switched ignition input)

Connector Views
15. Shift Lock Relay
– Natural
– Below center console
– On ECM wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6
1
2 GRN/YEL (Shift lock solenoid control)
3 BLK (G471)
4 GRN/WHT (NEUTRAL input)
5
6 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)

+ –
Connector Views
16. Trailer Lighting Connector
– Gray
– Left rear of trunk, taped to harness
– On rear wire harness
1 2
3 4 5 6
1 GRN/BLU (Left turn signal input)

2 BLK (G601)
4 WHT/BLK (Brake light input)
5 GRN/BLK (Back-up lights input)
6 GRN/YEL (Right turn signal input)

Connector Views
17. Turn Signal/Hazard Relay
– On front of under-dash fuse/relay box
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 (Right turn signal/hazard input)

2 (Right turn signal/hazard light output)
3 (Fuse 39)
4 (G401/G402)
5 (Left turn signal/hazard input)
6 (Left turn signal/hazard light output)

+ –
Connector Views
18. Driver’s Only Unlock Relay (’97-’00 USA Models)
– White
– On lower left dash panel
– On dealer installed security wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 WHT/BLK (Battery input)

2 LT GRN/RED (Driver’s door unlock output)
3 GRN/RED (Relay control)
4 LT GRN/RED (Unlock input from driver’s multiplex control unit)
5
6 WHT/BLK (Battery input)

Connector Views
19. Windshield Wiper Intermittent Relay
– Brown
– Left rear of engine compartment
– On left engine compartment wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 BLK (G301)
2 WHT (Intermittent output)
3 GRN/BLK (Fuse 17)
4 BLU/WHT (Intermittent output)
5
6 GRN/RED (Intermittent control)

+ –
Connector Views
20. C254
– Brown
– On underside of under-hood fuse/relay box
– On main wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
1 WHT/RED (Fuse 36)

2 WHT/BLU (Fuse 37)
3 WHT/BLU (ABS)
4 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
5 WHT (Fuse 44)
6 GRN (Fans)
7 BLK (G401/G402)

Connector Views
21. C303
– Brown
– Behind left kick panel
– Connects main wire harness to left engine
compartment wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
1 WHT (Wiper/washer)
2 BLU/YEL (Wiper/washer)
3 BLU (Wiper/washer)
4 GRN/RED (Wiper/washer)
5 BLU/WHT (Wiper/washer)
6 GRN/BLK (Fuse 17)
7 BLK/YEL (Wiper/washer)

+ –
Connector Views
22. PGM-FI Main Relay
– Brown
– Behind dash, left of steering column
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
1 GRN/ORN (Fuel pump control)

2 BLU/RED (Fuse 2)
3 BLK (G101)
4 BLK/YEL (Fuel pump power)
5 RED/ORN (Fuse 23)
6 YEL/BLK (Power output)
7 WHT/GRN (Fuse 4)

Connector Views
23. C112 Junction Connector (All except Type SH)
– Gray
– Below rear of throttle body
– On engine wire harness
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
1 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI) 5 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI)

2 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI) 6
3 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI) 7
4 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI) 8 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI)
Terminals grouped together are connected by the same bus bar.

+ –
Connector Views
24. C143
– Gray
– Right side of engine compartment
– Connects engine wire harness to ECM wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
8 9 10 11 5 6 7 8
12 13 14
A/T: M/T:
1 GRN/BLK (A/T controls) 1 YEL (Fuse 13)
2 GRN/WHT (A/T controls) 2 All except Type SH: BLK/WHT (PGM-FI)
3 BLU/YEL (A/T controls) 3 All except Type SH: WHT (PGM-FI)
4 YEL/BLU (PGM-FI) 4 BRN/BLK (G101)
5 WHT/BLK (PGM-FI) 5 GRN/BLK (Back-up lights)
6 All except Type SH: BLK/WHT (PGM-FI) 6 YEL/BLU (PGM-FI)
7 YEL (A/T controls) 7 WHT/BLK (PGM-FI)
8 RED (A/T controls) 8 RED/BLU (PGM-FI)
9 BLU (A/T controls)
10 WHT (A/T controls)
11 GRN (A/T controls)
12 BRN/BLK (G101)
13 All except Type SH: WHT (PGM-FI)
14 RED/BLU (PGM-FI)

Connector Views
25. C437
– Blue
– On rear of under-dash fuse/relay box
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3 Type SH: YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
4 GRN/RED (Wiper/washer)
5 RED/BLU (Headlight switch)
6
7 BLU/RED (Headlight switch)
8 WHT/GRN (Fuse 39)

+ –
Connector Views
26. C461
– Gray
– Behind right kick panel
– Connects main wire harness to right side wire harness
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5
4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
All except Type SH: Type SH and Canada:

1 ’99-’01 Models: YEL/GRN (Fuse 22) 1 Canada: GRN/RED (Seat heaters)
2 ’99-’01 Models: RED/WHT (Power door locks) 2 Canada: WHT/BLK (Seat heaters)
3 ’99-’01 Models: GRN/ORN (Power door locks) 3 RED/BLU (Seat belt reminder)
4 RED/BLU (Seat belt reminder) 4 WHT/GRN (Fuse 5)
5 Canada: GRN/RED (Heated seats) 5 ’99-’01 Models: GRN/BLK (ATTS)
6 ’97-’98 Models: GRN/BLK (Back-up lights) 6 Canada: WHT/BLU (Seat heaters)
Canada: WHT/BLK (Heated seats) 7 Canada: GRN/BLU (Seat heaters)
7 Canada: WHT/BLU (Heated seats) 8 Type SH: GRN (ATTS)
8 USA: WHT/GRN (Fuse 5) 9 ’97-’98 Models: GRN/BLK (Back-up lights)
Canada: GRN/BLU (Heated seats) ’99-’01 Models: ORN (ATTS)
10 ’97-’98 Models: GRN/BLK (ATTS)
’99-’01 Models: RED/WHT (Power door locks)
11 ’97-’98 Models: ORN (ATTS)
’99-’01 Models: GRN/ORN (Power door locks)
12 ’99-’01 Models: YEL/GRN (Fuse 22)

Connector Views
27. C486
– Gray
– Below console
– Connects ECM wire harness to center console jumper
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
1 BLK (G471)
2 RED (A/T: Console lights)
3 Male – BLK/WHT
Female – BLK
(G471)
4 WHT/BLU (A/T controls)
5 BLU/YEL (A/T controls)
6 Male – ORN
Female – BLK/RED
(A/T controls)
7 RED/BLK (A/T: Console lights)
8 Male – WHT/BLK
Female – WHT/RED
(Interlock system)

+ –
Connector Views
28. C569
– Gray
– Below middle of dash
– Connects dashboard wire harness to heater-sub wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
1 RED/BLK (Dash lights)

2 BRN/YEL (Rear window defogger)
3 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
4 RED (Dash lights)
5 YEL/WHT (Rear window defogger)
6 YEL/BLU (A/C compressor controls)
7 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
8 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)

Connector Views
29. C252
– Gray
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
1 Canada: ORN (DRL)

2 WHT/GRN (Fuse 39)
3 BLU/RED
(USA: Headlights)
(Canada: Headlights)
4 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
5 RED/GRN and RED/GRN (Fuse 50)
6 YEL/RED and YEL/RED (ABS)
7 ORN/WHT
(USA: Headlights)
8 BLU/BLK (Fans)
9 RED/YEL and RED/YEL (Fuse 51)

+ –
Connector Views
30. C119 (A/T)
– Gray
– Above transmission
– Connects engine wire harness to A/T gear position switch pigtail
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10
1 GRY
(Early Production ’97 Model: Starting system)
(All Except Early Production ’97 Model: Starting system)
2 PNK (Cruise control)
3 RED/WHT (G471)
4 BRN (A/T controls)
5 BLU (A/T controls)
7 YEL (A/T controls)
8 RED (A/T controls)
9 WHT (A/T controls)
10 BLK/BLU (A/T controls)

Connector Views
31. C140
– Gray
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10
1 GRN/WHT (PGM-FI) 6 YEL/BLU (PGM-FI)

2 RED/GRN (PGM-FI) 7 RED/WHT (PGM-FI)
3 YEL/RED (PGM-FI) 8 BLU/BLK (PGM-FI)
4 GRN/BLK (PGM-FI) 9 GRN (PGM-FI)
5 RED/BLK (PGM-FI) 10 BLU (Ignition system)

+ –
Connector Views
32. C314
– Orange
– Left side of engine compartment
– Connects left engine compartment wire harness
to ABS modulator jumper
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10
1 RED/BLK (ABS) 6 YEL/WHT (ABS)

2 RED/WHT (ABS) 7 BLK/ORN (ABS)
3 YEL (ABS) 8 YEL/BLU (ABS)
4 RED/BLU (ABS) 9
5 YEL/BLK (ABS) 10 BRN/BLK (ABS)

Connector Views
33. C412
– Gray
– Behind dash, left of steering column, on bracket
– Connects main wire harness to steering column jumper
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10
1 GRN/WHT 6
(Wiper/washer) 7
2 8 Type SH:
3 Type SH: Male – GRN/BLK
Male – BLU/GRN Female – BLK/GRN
Female – BLU (ATTS)
’97-’98 Models: 9 Type SH:
BLU/GRN Male – YEL/WHT
(ATTS) Female – YEL/RED
4 Type SH: (ATTS)
Male – YEL/BLU 10 Type SH:
Female – BLK/YEL Male – BLU/ORN
(ATTS) Female – LT GRN
5 Male – GRN/YEL (ATTS)
Female – WHT/YEL
(Wiper/washer)

+ –
Connector Views
34. C482
– Gray
– Below center of dash
– Connects ECM wire harness to dashboard wire harness
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
5 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
All ’97-’98 Models except Type SH: Type SH and all ’99-’01 Models:
1 YEL/RED (Engine oil pressure indicator light) 1 YEL/RED (Engine oil pressure indicator light)
2 BLU/RED (PGM-FI) 2 BLU/RED (Fuse 2)
3 GRY/RED (PGM-FI) 3 GRY/RED (PGM-FI)
4 A/T: RED (Dash lights) 4 PNK (ATTS)
5 RED/BLK (Headlight switch) 5 YEL/RED (Fuse 21)
6 WHT/RED (Stereo sound system) 6 RED/BLK (Headlight switch)
7 BLU/WHT (VSS) 7 WHT/RED (Stereo sound system)
8 WHT/BLU (Charging system) 8 BLU/WHT (VSS)
9 YEL/GRN (Gauges) 9 WHT/BLU (Charging system)
10 M/T: YEL (Fuse 13) 10 YEL/GRN (Gauges)
11 M/T: YEL (Fuse 13)
12 A/T: RED (Dash lights)

Connector Views
35. C517
– Gray
– Right side of trunk
– Connects right side wire harness to rear wire harness
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10
1 GRN/BLK
2 RED/BLK (Taillights)
3 GRY (ABS)
4 LT BLU (ABS)
5 WHT/BLK
7 GRN/BLU (Turn signal and hazard warning lights)
8 ORN (Trunk light)
9 BLU/YEL (ABS)
10 GRN/YEL (ABS)

+ –
Connector Views
36. ABS Modulator Unit
– Orange
– Left side of engine compartment
– On ABS modulator jumper
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10
1 RED/BLK (FR-IN) 6 YEL/WHT (RL-OUT)

2 RED/WHT (RL-IN) 7 BLK/ORN (RR-OUT)
3 YEL (RR-IN) 8 YEL/BLU (FL-OUT)
4 RED/BLU (FL-IN) 9
5 YEL/BLK (FR-OUT) 10 BRN/BLK (Power)

Connector Views
37. Mode Control Motor
– Green
– Behind dash, right of steering column
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 BLU (DEF) 6 LT GRN/BLK (MODE 3)

2 LT GRN/WHT (VENT) 7 BLU/GRN (MODE 4)
3 8 BLU/BLK (MODE 5)
4 GRN/BLK (MODE 1) 9 BLU/WHT (MODE 6)
5 GRN/YEL (MODE 2) 10 LT GRN/RED (GND)

+ –
Connector Views
38. C251
– Gray
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11
1 WHT (Fuse 45) 6 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46)

2 RED/GRN (Fuse 42) 7 WHT/GRN (Fuse 40)
3 8 BRN/BLK (ABS)
4 9 GRN/ORN (Fuse 48)
5 RED/BLU 10 WHT/YEL (Fuse 41)
(USA: Headlights) 11

Connector Views
39. C201
– Green
– Behind right side of dash
– Connects main wire harness to right engine
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 BLU/BLK (Fans)
3 ORN/WHT
(USA: Headlights)
4 RED/GRN
(USA: Headlights)
5 male – RED/GRN
Female – LT GRN/RED
(USA: Headlights)
7 BLU/ORN (A/C compressor controls)
8 Male – BLK
Female – BLU/RED
(G401/G402)
9 Male – BLK
Female – BLU/RED
(G401/G402)
10 Male – BLU/RED
Female – WHT/YEL
(Horns)
11 Male – BLU/RED
Female – WHT/YEL
(Horns)

+ –
Connector Views
40. Security Control Unit (Canada)
– Behind left side of dash
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 BLU/YEL (Key-in ignition input)

2 GRN/ORN (Passenger’s door OPEN input)
3 ’97-’01 Models: BLK/WHT (Power door locks)
’99-’01 Models: GRN/ORN (UNLOCK input)
4 RED/GRN (Fuse 42)
5 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
6 BLK (G401/G402)
7 ORN (Trunk lid OPEN input)
8 GRN (Driver’s door OPEN input)
9 LT GRN/BLU (Horn control)
10 ’97-’98 Models: BLU/ORN (Power door locks)
’99-’01 Models: RED/WHT (LOCK input)
12 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)

Connector Views
41. C483 (A/T)
– Green
– Connects ECM wire harness to dashboard wire harness
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 BLU/RED (A/T controls)

2 BLU (A/T gear position indicator)
3 BRN (A/T gear position indicator)
4 GRN (A/T gear position indicator)
5 RED (A/T controls)
6
7 BLU/YEL (A/T controls)
8 BLU/GRN (A/T controls)
9 BLU/BLK (A/T controls)
10 LT GRN (A/T controls)
11 BLK/BLU (A/T controls)
12 WHT (A/T gear position indicator)

+ –
Connector Views
42. C117 Junction Connector
– Gray
– Below rear of engine, right of oil filter
– On engine wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
1 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) 8 All except Type SH:

2 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) GRN/BLK
3 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) Type SH: YEL/BLK
(PGM-FI)
4
9 All except Type SH:
5
GRN/BLK
6 All except Type SH: Type SH: YEL/BLK
BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) (PGM-FI)
7 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) 10 All except Type SH:
GRN/BLK
Type SH: YEL/BLK
(PGM-FI)
GRN/BLK
Type SH: YEL/BLK
(PGM-FI)
12
13 Type SH: YEL/BLK
(PGM-FI)
GRN/BLK
Type SH: YEL/BLK
(PGM-FI)

Connector Views
43. C141
– Gray
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
A/T: Type SH:

1 BRN (A/T controls) 1 Male – RED/WHT 8 YEL/BLU (ATTS)
2 BLU (A/T controls) Female – YEL/WHT 9 GRN/BLK (ATTS)
(ATTS) 10 Male – BLU
2 Male – BLK/WHT Female – RED/GRN
4 YEL (A/T controls)
Female – YEL/BLK (ATTS)
5 RED (A/T controls) (ATTS) 11 YEL/BLU (ATTS)
6 WHT (A/T controls) 3 Male – YEL/GRN 12 GRN/BLK (ATTS)
7 BLK/BLU (A/T controls) Female – BLK/BLU
13 Male – BLU/WHT
8 GRY (Early Production ’97 Model: Starting system) (ATTS)
Female – BRN
(All Except Early Production ’97 Model: Starting system) 4 BLK (G101) (ATTS)
9 PNK (Cruise control) 5 Male – GRN/YEL 14 Male – YEL/RED
10 Male – RED/WHT Female – BLK/WHT Female – GRY
Female – BLK (ATTS) (ATTS)
(G471) 6 BLK (G101)
11 RED (A/T controls) 7 Male – ORN
12 WHT (A/T controls) Female – RED/BLK
13 BLU/RED (A/T controls) (ATTS)
14 WHT/RED (A/T controls)

+ –
Connector Views
44. C142
– Blue
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
1 BLU (Ignition system)

2 GRN (Ignition system)
3 YEL (Ignition system)
4 BRN/BLK (G101)
5 BLK/BLU (PGM-FI)
6 RED/BLU (PGM-FI)
7 GRN/YEL (PGM-FI)
8 YEL/GRN (Gauges)
9 WHT/BLU (Charging system)
10 Male – WHT/GRN
Female – WHT/RED
(Charging system)
11 WHT/GRN (Charging system)
12 WHT (Ignition system)
13 RED (Ignition system)
14 BLK (Ignition system)

Connector Views
45. C144
– Blue
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
1 GRN (Fans)
2 YEL/RED (Engine oil pressure indicator light)
3 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)
4 BRN (PGM-FI)
5 RED (PGM-FI)
6 BLU (PGM-FI)
7 YEL (PGM-FI)
8 YEL/GRN (Ignition system)
9 BLU/WHT (VSS)
10 BLK (G101)
11 BLK (G101)
12 RED/YEL (PGM-FI)
13 A/T: BLU/BLK (A/T controls)
14 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI)

+ –
Connector Views
46. C301
– Gray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 RED/WHT (ABS) 8
2 YEL/WHT (ABS) 9
3 YEL/BLK (ABS) 10 WHT/BLU (ABS)
4 RED/BLK (ABS) 11 BRN/BLK (ABS)
5 YEL/BLU (ABS) 12 BRN (ABS)
6 RED/BLU (ABS) 13 GRN/BLU (ABS)
7 YEL (ABS) 14 BLK/ORN (ABS)

Connector Views
47. C302
– Gray
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 ORN (PGM-FI)
2 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)
4 ORN/WHT
(USA: Headlights)
5 RED/YEL
(USA: Headlights)
6 Male – RED/YEL
Female – RED/WHT
(USA: Headlights)
7 GRN/RED (Brake system indicator light)
8
10 Male – YEL/BLK
Female – YEL/WHT
(Fuse 9)
11 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
12 GRN (Fans)
13 WHT (Fuse 45)
14 PNK/BLU (A/C compressor controls)

+ –
Connector Views
48. C431
– Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 WHT/RED (Power windows)

2 Canada: WHT/BLK (Fuse 6)
3 A/T: YEL (Fuse 13)
4 Canada: RED/BLU (Fuse 8)
5 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
6 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
7 BLU/BLK (Power windows)
9
10
11 WHT/GRN (Fuse 5)
12 Canada: RED/BLK (Dash and console lights)
13

Connector Views
49. C432
– Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 YEL (Fuse 13)

2 Canada: BLK (G401/G402)
3
4
5 WHT/GRN (Fuse 4)
6
7 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)
8 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
10 Type SH: WHT/BLU (Fuse 1)
11 YEL/BLK (Blower controls)
12
13
14 WHT/BLK (Brake lights)

+ –
Connector Views
50. Combination Light Switch
– Gray or White
– At steering column
– On combination light switch jumper
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1
2 BLU/RED (HEAD on output)
3 RED/BLU (Flash-to-pass control)
4 RED/GRN (Fuse 42)
5
6
7
8 RED/BLU (Dim control)
9 BLK (G401/G402)
10
11 RED/BLK (Lights on output)
12 GRN/BLU (Left turn signal output)
13 RED (Fuse 13)
14 GRN/YEL (Right turn signal output)

Connector Views
51. Cruise Control Unit
– Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 BRN (Actuator control)

2 GRY (Brake switch input)
3 BLK (G401/G402)
4
5 WHT/BLK (Brake input)
6 LT GRN/RED (Set/decel signal input)
7 LT GRN/BLK (Resume/accel signal input)
8
9 BRN/WHT (Actuator control)
10 BLU/BLK (Indicator light control)
11 BRN/BLK (Actuator control)
12 BLU/WHT (Vehicle speed input)
13 LT GRN (Power input)
14 PNK (Disengage input)

+ –
Connector Views
52. Daytime Running Lights Control Unit (Canada)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 RED/WHT (Left high beam control)

2 RED/BLU (Battery input)
3 RED/YEL (Left low beam input)
4 BLK (G401/G402)
5 RED/GRN (Right low beam input)
6 GRN/WHT (Parking brake input)
7 ORN (High beam OFF input)
8 BLU/RED (Lights ON request input)
9 BLU/BLK (DRL indicator control)
10 ORN/WHT (High beam request)
11 LT GRN/RED (Right high beam control)
12 YEL (Ignition input)
13 GRN/RED (Brake indicator control)
14

Connector Views
53. C402
– Gray
– Behind upper left side of dash
– Connects main wire harness to dashboard wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 GRN/ORN (Indicators)
2 GRN (Indicators)
3 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
4 RED/WHT (Dash and console lights)
5 WHT/RED (Dash and console lights)
6 BLU/GRN (Hazard warning lights)
7 Canada: BLU/BLK (Headlights)
8 RED/YEL or RED/WHT
(USA: Headlights)
9 ORN/WHT
(USA: Headlights)
10 Type SH: YEL/RED (Fuse 21)
11 ORN (Indicators)
12 BLU/WHT (ABS)
13 WHT/GRN (Fuse 39)
14 BLU (SRS)
15 LT GRN/RED (Low fuel indicator light)
16 WHT/BLU (Charging system)

+ –
Connector Views
54. C551
– Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 GRY/YEL (Moonroof)
2 GRY/RED (Moonroof)
3 BLU/RED (Fuse 2)
4 YEL (Fuse 13)
5
6
8 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)
10 BLK (G401/G402)
11
12
13
14
16

Connector Views
55. Audio Unit
– ’97-’98: Gray, ’99-’01: Blue
– Center of dash
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
’97-’98 Models: ’99-’01 Models:

1 RED/GRN (Passenger’s speaker (+)) 1
2 BLU/GRN (Driver’s speaker (+)) 2 WHT/RED (Power (Ignition ON))
3 RED/BLK (Lights ON input) 3
4 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43) 4
5 WHT/RED (Ignition ON input) 5 RED/YEL (RR speaker signal (+))
6 6 BLU/YEL (LR speaker signal (+))
7 BLU/YEL (LR speaker signal (+)) 7 RED/GRN (Passenger’s speaker (+))
8 RED/YEL (RR speaker signal (+)) 8 BLU/GRN (Driver’s speaker (+))
9 BRN/BLK (Passenger’s speaker (–)) 9 RED/BLK (Lights ON input)
10 GRY/BLK (Driver’s speaker (–)) 10 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 BLK (G551) 14
15 GRY/WHT (LR speaker signal (–)) 15 BRN/WHT (RR speaker signal (–))
16 BRN/WHT (RR speaker signal (–)) 16 GRY/WHT (LR speaker signal (–))
17 BRN/BLK (Passenger’s speaker (–))
18 GRY/BLK (Driver’s speaker (–))
19 RED (Dim control)
20 BLK (G551)

+ –
Connector Views
56. Data Link Connector (DLC)
– Gray
– Left side of front passenger’s footwell
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 9
2 10
3 11
4 12 BLK (G471)
5 13 BRN/BLK (G101)
6 LT GRN/RED 14
(Input/output) 15 LT GRN
7 (Input/output)
8 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) 16

Connector Views
57. SRS Unit
– Yellow
– On SRS wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 GRY or GRN (Driver’s airbag control)

2
3 GRY or GRN (Fuse 24)
4
5
6 GRY or GRN (SRS indicator light control)
7 GRY or GRN (Fuse 23)
8 GRY or GRN (MES connector input)
9 GRY or GRN (Service check connector input)
10 GRY or GRN (Passenger’s airbag control)
11
12
13 GRY or GRN (Driver’s airbag control)
14 GRY or GRN (Passenger’s airbag control)
15 GRY or GRN (DLC input/output)
16 GRY or GRN (G801)
17 GRY or GRN (G801)
18 GRY or GRN (MES connector input)

+ –
Connector Views
58. Stereo Amplifier
– Gray
– On underside of rear shelf, in trunk
– On right side wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 PNK (LR speaker (+))

2 WHT/YEL (RR speaker (+))
3 BLK (G501)
4 WHT/GRN (Fuse 5)
5 LT GRN (LR microphone (+))
6 LT BLU (RR microphone (+))
7 BLU/YEL (LR speaker signal (+))
8 RED/YEL (RR speaker signal (+))
9 YEL/WHT (LR speaker (–))
10 LT GRN/WHT (RR speaker (–))
11
12
13
14
15 GRN/WHT (LR microphone (–))
16 BLU/WHT (RR microphone (–))
17 GRY/WHT (LR speaker signal (–))
18 BRN/WHT (RR speaker signal (–))

Connector Views
– Brown
– Behind left kick panel, taped to harness
– On left engine compartment wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 BLK (G301) 14
2 15
3 16 RED/BLK
4 BLK (G301) (Headlight switch)
5 BLK (G301) 17 RED/BLK
6 BLK (G301) (Headlight switch)
7 BLK (G301)
8 18 RED/BLK
(Headlight switch)
9
19
10 BLK (G301)
20
21
11 WHT (Fuse 45)
22
12 WHT (Fuse 45)
13 WHT (Fuse 45)

+ –
Connector Views
60. C403
– Gray
– Behind upper left side of dash
– Connects main wire harness to dashboard wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

2 YEL/BLU (Gauges)
4 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
5 RED (Dash and console lights)
6 RED/YEL (Stereo sound system)
7 BLU/YEL (Stereo sound system)
8 RED/GRN (Stereo sound system)
9 BLU/GRN (Stereo sound system)
10 RED/BLU (Seat belt reminder)
11 PNK (Immobilizer system)
12 BLU/BLK (Cruise control)
13 LT GRN (Cruise control)
17 BRN/WHT (Stereo sound system)
18 GRY/WHT (Stereo sound system)
19 BRN/BLK (Stereo sound system)
20 GRY/BLK (Stereo sound system)

Connector Views
– Natural
– Behind left side of dash, taped to harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 LT GRN/RED (’99-’00 Models: Power door locks) 13 Canada: ORN/WHT (Mirror defoggers)
2 LT GRN/RED (’99-’00 Models: Power door locks) 14 Canada: ORN/WHT (Mirror defoggers)
3 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) 15 YEL/WHT

4 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) (USA: Power mirrors)
(Canada: Power mirrors)
5 Canada: BLK/GRN (Seat heaters) 16 YEL/WHT
(USA: Power mirrors)
6 Canada: BLK/GRN (Seat heaters)
7 Canada: BLK/GRN (Seat heaters)
17 LT GRN
8 RED (Dash and console lights) (USA: Power mirrors)
9 RED (Dash and console lights) (Canada: Power mirrors)
10 RED (Dash and console lights) 18 LT GRN
11 WHT/RED (Canada: Power mirrors)
(’97-’98 Models: Power door locks)
(’99-’00 Models: Power door locks) 19 BLU/WHT
12 WHT/RED (USA: Power mirrors)
(’97-’98 Models: Power door locks) (Canada: Power mirrors)
(’99-’00 Models: Power door locks) 20 BLU/WHT
Terminals grouped together are connected by the same bus bar. (Canada: Power mirrors)

+ –
Connector Views
62. C434
– Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
2
3
4 BLK (G401/G402)
5 WHT/GRN (Fuse 39)
7 GRN (Ignition key reminder)
8
9 WHT/RED (Power windows)
10 BLU/YEL (Hazard warning lights)
12
13 BLU/GRN (Hazard warning lights)
14 GRN/YEL (Moonroof)
15 GRN/RED (Moonroof)
16 BLK/GRN (Rear window defogger)
17
18
19 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)

Connector Views
63. C454
– Gray
– Above left side of front passenger’s footrest
– Connects main wire harness to ECM wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 BLU/WHT (Vehicle speed sensor)

2 RED/WHT (ABS)
3 BLU/ORN (A/C compressor controls)
4 PNK/BLU (A/C compressor controls)
5 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
6 YEL/RED (Engine oil pressure indicator light)
7 BRN/BLK (Cruise control)
8 BRN/WHT (Cruise control)
9 BRN (Cruise control)
12 WHT (PGM-FI)
13 WHT/BLK (PGM-FI)
14 GRN/ORN (PGM-FI)
15 GRN (Fans)
16 BLK (G101)
17 YEL/BLK (PGM-FI)
18 WHT/RED (Stereo sound system)
19 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46)
20 USA: GRN/RED
Canada: Male – GRN/WHT
Female – GRN/RED
(Brake system indicator light)

+ –
Connector Views
– Orange
– Behind right kick panel, taped to harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) 14 ORN/WHT

2 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) (USA: Headlights)
3 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) (Canada: Headlights)
15 ORN/WHT
(USA: Headlights)
4 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)
5 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14)
16 ORN/WHT
6 (USA: Headlights)
7 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
8 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43) 17 GRN/RED (Brake system indicator light)
11 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
12 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
13

Connector Views
– Black
– Left of passenger’s footwell area, taped to harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 BRN/BLK (G101) 11 GRN/BLK (PGM-FI)

4 BRN/BLK (G101)
5 BRN/BLK (G101)
14 BLU/WHT (VSS)
6 BRN/BLK (G101)
15 BLU/WHT (VSS)
16 BLU/WHT (VSS)
7 YEL/BLU (PGM-FI)
8 YEL/BLU (PGM-FI)
9 YEL/BLU (PGM-FI)
10 YEL/BLU (PGM-FI)
20

+ –
Connector Views
– Blue
– On rear left side of dashboard, taped to harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 RED (Dash and 11 BLK (G401)

console lights) 12
console lights) 14 BLK (G401)
console lights)
16 BLK (G401)
4 RED (Dash and
console lights)
17 RED/BLK
5 RED (Dash and
(Headlight switch)
console lights)
18 RED/BLK
6 RED (Dash and
(Headlight switch)
console lights)
19 RED/BLK
(Headlight switch)
7 YEL (Fuse 13)
20 RED/BLK
8 YEL (Fuse 13) (Headlight switch)
9 YEL (Fuse 13)
10 YEL (Fuse 13)

Connector Views
67. C980
– Gray
– On combination light switch jumper
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 12
2 GRN/BLU 13
(Turn signal lights) 14 GRN (Wiper/washer)
3 15 BLK/YEL
4 (Wiper/washer)
5 GRN/RED (Fuse 13) 16 GRN/BLK
6 (Wiper/washer)
7 17 BLK (G401/G402)
8 18
9 RED/BLU 19 GRN/YEL
(USA: Headlights) (Turn signal lights)
(Canada: Headlights) 20 BLU/RED
10 RED/BLK (USA: Headlights)
(Headlight switch) (Canada: Headlights)
11

+ –
Connector Views
68. Door Multiplex Control Unit
– Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 BLK (G401/G402)
2 RED/BLU (Driver’s power window motor control)
3
4 BRN (Door D-line)
5 RED/WHT (Driver’s power window motor pulser input)
6 BLU (Driver’s door key cylinder switch input)
7 GRN/RED (Driver’s door lock switch UNLOCK input)
8 BLK/WHT (Driver’s door knob switch UNLOCK input)
9 RED/YEL (Driver’s power window motor control)
11 BLU/RED (Main switch output)
12 BLK (G401/G402)
13
14 BLK (G401/G402)
15
17 GRN/BLU (Driver’s door lock switch LOCK input)
18 PNK (Driver’s door lock knob switch LOCK input)
19 GRN/WHT (Power window relay input)

Connector Views
69. C433
– Blue
4 5 6 7
1 2 3 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1
3 YEL/RED (Fuse 18)
5
7 RED/ORN (Fuse 23)
8
9
10 BLK (M/T: G401)
11
12 Canada: YEL (DRL)
13 GRN/WHT (Power windows)
14
15 BLK/YEL (Wiper/washer)
16 BLK (G401/G402)
17
18 WHT/RED (Early Production ’97 Model: Starting system)
BLK/WHT (All Except Early Production ’97 Model: Starting system)
19 BLU/RED (Fuse 2)
20
21
22

+ –
Connector Views
70. C462
– Gray
– Connects main wire harness to right side wire harness
4 5 6 7
1 2 3 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 ’99-’01 Models: GRN/BLK

2 RED/YEL (Stereo sound system)
3 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46)
4 WHT/BLK (Brake lights)
5 GRN/ORN (Door courtesy lights)
6 LT GRN/RED (Low fuel indicator light)
7 YEL/BLU (Gauges)
8 ORN (Indicators)
10 LT BLU (ABS)
11 GRN/YEL (ABS)
12 BLK/YEL (PGM-FI)
13 BRN/WHT (Stereo sound system)
14 GRN (Door courtesy lights)
15 BLK/GRN (Rear window defogger)
16 BLU/YEL (Stereo sound system)
17 GRY/WHT (Stereo sound system)
20
21 GRY (ABS)
22 BLU/YEL (ABS)

Connector Views
71. Heater Control Panel
– Green
– Center of dash
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 BLU/RED (A/C thermostat input)

2 GRN (Heater fan switch input)
3 BLU (Mode motor DEF)
4 GRN/RED (F/R motor RECIRC)
7 LT GRN/WHT (Mode motor VENT)
8 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9)
9 LT GRN/RED (Mode motor GND)
10 YEL/WHT (Rear defogger switch ON output)
11 GRN/WHT (F/R motor FRESH)
12 BRN/YEL (Rear defogger switch ON output)
13 BLK (G901)
14 GRN/BLK (Mode 1)
15 GRN/YEL (Mode 2)
16 LT GRN/BLK (Mode 3)
17 BLU/GRN (Mode 4)
18 BLU/BLK (Mode 5)
19 BLU/WHT (Mode 6)
21
22

+ –
Connector Views
72. Security Control Unit (USA)
– Gray
– On dealer installed security wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 ’99-’01 Models: GRN/ORN (UNLOCK input)

2 BLK/WHT (Door OPEN input)
3 ORN (Trunk OPEN input)
4 YEL/RED (Hood OPEN input)
5 BLU (Disarm/valet input)
6 ’97-’98 Models: BLK/WHT (LOCK output)
’99-’01 Models: RED/WHT (LOCK input)
7 ’97-’98 Models: GRN/RED (Driver’s only unlock relay control)
8 ’97-’98 Models: BLU/ORN (UNLOCK output)
9 RED (Siren control)
10 WHT/YEL (Battery input)
11 BLK/YEL (Ignition input)
12
13 BLK (Ground)
14 RED (Security indicator control)
15 BLU/YEL (Key in ignition input)
16
17 BLU/RED (Lights flash control)
18 LT GRN/BLU (Horn control)
19
20
21 WHT (Siren control)
22 ’99-’01 Models: RED/WHT (LOCK input)

Connector Views
73. C430
– Green/Gray
– In driver’s door jamb
– Connects main wire harness to driver’s door wire harness
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25
16 WHT/RED
1 BRN (Multiplex control system) (’97-’98 Models: Power door locks)
2 BLU/RED (Power windows) (’99-’00 Models: Power door locks)
3 17 LT GRN/RED
4 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43) (’97-’98 Models: Power door locks)
5 GRN/WHT (Power windows) (’99-’00 Models: Power door locks)
6 Canada: GRN/BLU (Seat heaters) 18 Canada: ORN/WHT (Mirror defoggers)
7 RED (Dash and console lights) 19
8 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9) 20
9 RED/BLK (Headlight switch) 21 BLK (G401/G402)
10 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) 22 BLK (G401/G402)
11 Canada: GRN/RED (Seat heaters) 23 Male – GRN/ORN
12 Canada: BLK/GRN (Seat heaters) Female – GRN
(Courtesy lights)
13 BLU/WHT
(USA: Power mirrors) 24 Male – RED/GRN
(Canada: Power mirrors) Female – BLU/GRN
(Stereo sound system)
14 YEL/WHT
(USA: Power mirrors) 25 Male – BRN/BLK
(Canada: Power mirrors) Female – GRY/BLK
(Stereo sound system)
15 LT GRN

+ –
Connector Views
74. C464
– Green/Gray
– In passenger’s door jamb
– Connects main wire harness to passenger’s door wire harness
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25
1 Canada: BLK/GRN (Seat heaters) 14 BLU/ORN

2 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46) (’97-’98 Models: Power door locks)
3 Canada: WHT/BLU (Seat heaters) (’99-’00 Models: Power door locks)
4 BLU/BLK (Power windows) 15 BLK/WHT
5 WHT/RED
(’99-’00 Models: Power door locks) 16 Canada: RED (Dash and console lights)
6 Canada: WHT/BLK (Seat heaters) 17 BLU/YEL (Power windows)
7 BLU/WHT 18 BLK (G401/G402)
(USA: Power mirrors) 19 Male – BLU/GRN
(Canada: Power mirrors) Female – RED/GRN
8 YEL/WHT (Stereo sound system)
(USA: Power mirrors) 20 Male – GRY/BLK
(Canada: Power mirrors) Female – BRN/BLK
9 LT GRN (Stereo sound system)
(USA: Power mirrors) 21 Male – GRN
(Canada: Power mirrors) Female – GRN/ORN
10 LT GRN/RED (Courtesy lights)
(’97-’98 Models: Power door locks) 22
(’99-’00 Models: Power door locks) 23
11 Canada: RED/BLK (Headlight switch) 24
12 BLU (Power windows) 25 Canada: ORN/WHT (Mirror defoggers)
13

Connector Views
75. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
– At steering column
Connector A Connector B
– Natural – Natural
– On steering column jumper wire harness – Connects steering column jumper wire harness
to windshield wiper/washer switch pigtail
1 2 3 4
1 2
5 6 7 8
1 BLK/YEL (Washer motor control) 1 Male – BLK

2 GRN (Intermittent output) Female – GRN/WHT
3 BLU (Low speed control) (Intermittent dwell timer output)
4 BLU/YEL (High speed control) 2 Male – WHT
Female – WHT/YEL
5 BLU/WHT (Intermittent control)
(Intermittent dwell timer output)
6
7 GRN/BLK (Fuse 17)
8 BLK (G401/G402)

+ –
Connector Views
76. Immobilizer Control Unit
– Behind dash, on left side of steering column
– Gray – White
– On main wire harness – On steering column jumper wire harness
1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
1 WHT/GRN (Fuse 4) 1 WHT (Immobilizer receiver input)

2 GRY (PARK/NEUTRAL input) 2 BLK (Shield ground)
3 LT BLU (Starter cut control) 3 ORN (Immobilizer receiver input)
4 *1: BLK/YEL
*2: YEL/BLK
(Ignition input)
5 PNK (Immobilizer indicator control)
6 BRN/YEL (Immobilizer signal output)
7 GRN/RED (Parking brake input)
8 BLK (G401/G402)


Connector Views
77. Power Mirror Switch
– On driver’s door panel
Connector A Connector B (Canada)

– Green – On driver’s door wire harness
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 ORN/WHT (Defogger output)

2 2 YEL/BLK (Ignition ON input)
3 LT GRN (USA: Passenger’s left/right control)
(Canada: Passenger’s left/right control)
4 BLU/ORN (USA: Driver’s left/right control)
(Canada: Driver’s left/right control)
5 BLU/WHT
(USA: Up/down control)
(Canada: Up/down control)
6 YEL/WHT (USA: Passenger’s common)
(Canada: Passenger’s common)
7 BLU/GRN (USA: Driver’s common)
(Canada: Driver’s common)
8
9 YEL/BLK (USA: Fuse 9)
(Canada: Fuse 9)
10 BLK (USA: G401/G402)
(Canada: G401/G402)

+ –
Connector Views
78. Steering Lock
– Top of steering column
– Blue – Green
– On steering column jumper wire harness – On steering column jumper wire harness
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7
1 BLK/WHT (START output) 1 ORN (Immobilizer receiver output)

2 2 WHT (Immobilizer receiver output)
3 WHT (Fuse 33) 3 BLU/WHT (Ignition key switch output)
4 YEL (ON output) 4 BLU/WHT (G401/G402)
5 WHT/BLK (START or ON output) 5 WHT (Ignition key light control)
6 BLK/YEL (START or ON output) 6 A/T: WHT/BLU (Key interlock switch output)
7 7 WHT/YEL (Fuse 41)
Connector C (A/T only)

– White
– On steering column jumper wire harness
1 2
1 WHT/RED (Key interlock solenoid control)

2 BLK/RED (Key interlock switch input)

Connector Views
79. ABS Control Unit
– Orange – Orange
– On main wire harness – On main wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 BLU/WHT (WARN) 7 BLK (G404) 1 BLK (G403) 12 BLK (G403)

2 BLK (G404) 8 YEL (RR-IN) 2 13 GRY/WHT (RLP)
3 BLK/ORN (RR-OUT) 9 RED/BLU (FL-IN) 3 WHT/RED (FLP) 14 RED/WHT (SCS)
4 YEL/BLU (FL-OUT) 10 RED/WHT (RL-IN) 4 GRN/RED (PARK) 15 GRY/RED (RRP)
5 YEL/WHT (RL-OUT) 11 RED/BLK (FR-IN) 5 WHT/BLU (FRP) 16 GRN/ORN (MCK)
6 YEL/BLK (FR-OUT) 12 YEL/RED (PMR) 6 BRN (FLW (–)) 17 LT BLU (RLW (+))
7 GRN/BLU (FLW (+)) 18 GRY (RLW (–))
8 GRN (FRW (–)) 19 GRN/YEL (RRW (+))
9 GRN/BLK (FRW (+)) 20 BLU/YEL (RRW (–))
10 WHT/BLK (STOP) 21 YEL/GRN (FSR)
11 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9) 22 LT GRN/RED (DLC)

+ –
Connector Views
80. Passenger’s Multiplex Control Unit
Connector A (E in S/M) Connector B (D in S/M)

– Blue – Blue
– On main wire harness – On main wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 BLU (Passenger’s power window motor control) 1 PNK (A-D line)

2 BLU/YEL (Passenger’s power window motor control) 2 LT GRN (D-A line)
3 3 GRN/YEL (Intermittent dwell timer input)
4 4 BLK/WHT
5 (’97-’98 Models: Passenger’s door LOCK output)
6 (’99-’00 Models: Passenger’s door LOCK output)
7 5 BLU/ORN
(’97-’98 Models: Passenger’s door UNLOCK output)
8
(’99-’00 Models: Passenger’s door UNLOCK output)
9 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43)
6
7 YEL (Fuse 13)
11 BLU/RED (Power window main switch input)
8 WHT/RED (Brightness control)
12 BLU/BLK (Fuse 16)
9 RED/WHT (Brightness control)
13 A/T: WHT/GRN (Shift lock circuit input)
10 GRN/WHT (Intermittent dwell timer input)
14 A/T: BLK (G401/G402)
11 GRN/ORN (Passenger’s door OPEN input)
15 A/T: GRN/YEL (Shift lock solenoid control)
12
16 A/T: BLK/BLU (Park position input)
13
17
14
18
19 BLK (G401/G402)
20 BLK (G401/G402)

Connector Views
81. Driver’s Multiplex Control Unit
Connector A Connector C
– Connects driver’s multiplex control unit to – Gray
under-dash fuse/relay box – On main wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8
1 (Power window relay control) 1 ’99-’01 Models: RED (Door lock relay control)
2 (Lights ON input) 2 WHT (Fuse 44)
3 (Fuse 43) 3 ’99-’01 Models: WHT (Fuse 44)
4 4 BLK (G401/G402)
5 (Park input) 5 YEL/RED (Engine oil pressure switch input)
6 (Intermittent wiper control) 6 WHT/BLK (Ignition key/ceiling light control)
7 (G401/G402) 7 WHT/RED (Door LOCK output)
8 8 LT GRN/RED (Door UNLOCK output)
9 (Rear window defogger ON input)
10 (Rear window defogger ON output)
11 (Washer ON input)
12 (Intermittent ON input)
13 (Fuse 13)
14 (Driver’s door OPEN input)
Connector B
– Green
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 PNK (A-D line)

2 WHT/BLU (Engine running input)
3 BLU/YEL (Key in ignition input)
4
5
6
7 LT GRN (D-A line)
8 BRN (Door D-line)
9 ’99-’01 Models: GRN/ORN (Alarm control)
10
11
12 ’99-’01 Models: RED/WHT (Alarm control)
13 LT BLU (Multiplex control inspection connector input)
14 RED/BLU (Driver’s seat belt switch input)

+ –
Connector Views
82. ATTS Control Unit
– Below front passenger’s footrest
– Blue – Blue
– On ECM wire harness – On ECM wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 BLK/WHT (RSOL) 14 BLK (G101) 1 YEL/RED (Fuse 21) 12 BRN/BLK (G101)

2 RED/BLU (PWR) 15 YEL/WHT (ASH) 2 GRY (TOH) 13 BRN (TOL)
3 BLK/BLU (LSOL) 16 ORN (VCCY) 3 PNK (WARN2) 14
4 GRY/RED (RRP) 17 4 15 RED/GRN (POL)
5 GRN/BLK (BACK) 18 5 RED/BLK (POR) 16
6 GRY/WHT (RLP) 19 BLU/GRN (STR-Z) 6 GRN/RED (PARK) 17 LT GRN/BLK (VREF)
7 BLU/ORN (STR-A) 20 BLU (NE) 7 18 YEL (G-SEN)
8 WHT/BLU (FRP) 21 YEL/WHT (STR-B) 8 GRN (YAW) 19 GRN/YEL (FI-RX)
9 RED/WHT (SCS) 22 YEL/RED (ABSY) 9 GRN/BLU (FI-TX) 20 RED/GRN (PB)
10 WHT/RED (FLP) 23 PNK (WARN1) 10 ORN/GRN (FSR) 21 BLK (G101)
11 LT GRN/RED (DLC) 24 YEL/BLK (Fuse 9) 11 22 YEL/BLK (ASG)
12 YEL/RED (Fuse 21) 25 BRN/BLK (G101)
13 GRN/BLK (SG) 26 YEL/BLU (VCC)

Connector Views
83. Transmission Control Module (TCM)
– Gray – Gray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 14 BLK (G101) 1 RED (LS A+) 12 WHT/BLK (STOP SW)

2 GRN/WHT (SH B) 15 YEL (LC) 2 13 BLK/RED (T-MODE)
3 BLU/YEL (SH A) 16 GRN/BLK (SH C) 3 14 BLU/BLK (OP2SW)
4 RED (ATPN) 17 BLU/RED (D4 IND) 4 RED/BLK (TPS) 15 BLU/YEL (T-M–)
5 BLU (NE) 18 5 BLU/WHT (VSS) 16 WHT/BLU (T-M+)
6 BRN (ATP1) 19 BLU/BLK (LED C) 6 17 WHT (NMSG)
7 BLU (ATP2) 20 BLU/GRN (LED B) 7 LT GRN/RED 18 GRN/BLU (SEAF)
8 GRN (ATP D3) 21 BLU/YEL (LED A) (RXD/TXD) 19 GRN/YEL (SEFA)
9 YEL (ATP D4) 22 WHT/GRN (ILU) 8 GRN (NCSG) 20 LT GRN/BLK (VREF)
10 LT GRN (ATP PN) 23 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43) 9 BLU (NC) 21 WHT (LS A–)
11 WHT (ATP R) 24 10 RED (NM) 22 WHT/RED (LS B–)
12 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) 25 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) 11 BLU/RED (LS B+)
13 BRN/BLK (G101) 26 BRN/BLK (G101)

+ –
Connector Views
84. Gauge Assembly
– Blue – Gray
– On dashboard wire harness – On dashboard wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 RED/BLK (Lights ON input) 1 WHT/BLU (Charging system indicator light control)

2 RED (Brightness control) 2 BLU/BLK (DRL indicator light control)
3 3 YEL (Fuse 13)
4 BLK (G401/G402) 4 YEL (Fuse 13)
5 GRN/RED (Brake system indicator light control) 5 BLU (SRS indicator light control)
6 GRN/BLU (Turn signal and hazard warning lights input) 6 BLU/WHT (ABS indicator light control)
7 GRN/YEL (Turn signal and hazard warning lights input) 7 YEL/RED (Low engine oil pressure indicator light control)
8 8
9 PNK (Immobilizer indicator light control) 9 YEL (Fuse 13)
10 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43) 10 YEL/GRN (Engine coolant temperature input)
11 BLU/BLK (Cruise control indicator light control) 11 LT GRN/RED (Low fuel indicator light control)
12 YEL/BLU (Fuel gauge input) 12 Type SH: PNK (ATTS indicator light control)
13 RED/BLU (Seat belt reminder light control)
Connector B Connector D (A/T only)

– Blue – Green
– On dashboard wire harness – On dashboard wire harness
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 RED/YEL (High beam input) 1 BLU (A/T “2” indicator control)

2 ORN/WHT (High beam indicator light control) 2 GRN (A/T “D3” indicator control)
3 BLU/WHT (Vehicle speed input) 3 BLU/RED (A/T “D4” indicator control)
4 4 RED (A/T “N” indicator control)
5 BLU (Engine speed input) 5 WHT (A/T “R” indicator control)
6 6 BLK/BLU (A/T “P” indicator control)
7 7 LT GRN (PARK/NEUTRAL output)
8 BLK (G401/G402) 8
9 BLK/YEL (Fuse 14) 9 YEL (Fuse 13)
10 RED (Brightness control) 10 BLU/BLK (Shift indicator circuit control)
11 RED/BLK (Lights ON input) 11 BLU/GRN (Shift indicator circuit control)
12 ORN (Trunk OPEN indicator light control) 12 BLU/YEL (Shift indicator circuit control)
13 13 RED (Brightness control)
14 GRN (Driver’s door OPEN input) 14 RED/BLK (Lights ON input)
15 GRN/ORN (Passenger’s door OPEN input) 15 BLK (G401/G402)
16 GRY/RED (MIL control) 16 BRN (A/T “1” indicator control)

Connector Views
85. Engine Control Module (ECM)
– Gray – Blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 YEL (INJ4) 19 WHT/GRN (ALTC) 1 A/T, Type SH: 18 BLU/WHT (VSS)

2 BLU (INJ3) 20 YEL/GRN (ICM) LT GRN/BLK (VREF) 19
3 RED (INJ2) 21 2 BLU (CKPP) 20 ’97 Model: All except
4 BRN (INJ1) 22 BRN/BLK (G101) 3 GRN (TDCP) california: BRN (PFSW)
5 ORN/BLU (SO2SHTC) 23 BLK (G101) 4 YEL (CYPP) 21
6 BLK/WHT (PO2SHTC) 24 YEL/BLK (IGP2) 5 BLU/ORN (ACS) 22 BRN/YEL (IMOCODE)
7 ORN (ESOL) 25 WHT (RESSOL) 6 BLU/RED (Fuse 2) 23
8 GRN/YEL (VTS) 26 RED/BLU (IABSOL) 7 RED/WHT (SCS) 24
9 BRN/BLK (G101) 27 GRN (FANC) 8 LT GRN (K-LINE) 25
10 BLK (G101) 28 ’97 California Model 9 26
11 YEL/BLK (IGP1) and all ’98-’01 Models: 10 WHT/YEL (Fuse 43) 27
12 BLK/BLU (IACV) GRN/WHT (2WBS) 11 28
13 29 ’97 California Model 12 WHT (CKPM) 29 A/T: LT GRN (ATPNP)
and all ’98-’01 Models: 13 RED (TDCM) 30 Type SH: GRN/BLU
14
ORN/GRN (VSV) (FITX)
15 RED/YEL (PCS) 14 BLK (CYPM)
30 A/T: GRN/BLU (SEAF)
16 GRN/ORN (FLR) 15 BLU/BLK (VTM)
31 31 Type SH: GRN/YEL
17 PNK/BLU (ACC) 16 GRN (PSPSW)
32 (FIRX)
18 GRY/RED (MIL) 17 WHT/GRN (ALTF)
A/T: GRN/YEL (SEFA)
Connector D
– Gray
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
1 RED/BLK (TPS) 10 YEL/BLU (VCC2)

2 RED/WHT (ECT) 11 GRN/BLK (SG2)
3 RED/GRN (MAP) 12 GRN/WHT (SG1)
4 YEL/RED (VCC1) 13
5 WHT/BLK (BKSW) 14 WHT/RED (SHO2S)
6 RED/BLU (KS) 15 ’97 California Model
7 WHT (PHO2S) and all ’98-’01 Models:
8 RED/YEL (IAT) WHT/BLU (PTANK)
9 WHT/BLK (EGRL) 16 GRN/RED (EL)

+ –
Connector Views
86. Keyless Receiver Unit
– Gray
– On right side wire harness
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3 YEL/GRN (Fuse 22)
4
5 GRN/ORN (UNLOCK output)
6 RED/WHT (LOCK output)
7 BLK (G501)
8 WHT/BLU (Fuse 46)

Connector Views
87. C146
– Gray
– Underside of engine, left of transmission
– Connects engine wire harness to ATTS sub harness
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
1 YEL/RED (ATTS) 8 RED/WHT (ATTS)

2 YEL/GRN (ATTS) 9 BLK (ATTS)
3 YEL/BLU (ATTS) 10 ORN (ATTS)
4 BLK/WHT (ATTS) 11 GRN/BLK (ATTS)
5 BLK (ATTS) 12 GRN/YEL (ATTS)
6 BLU (ATTS) 13 YEL/BLU (ATTS)
7 GRN/BLK (ATTS) 14 BLU/WHT (ATTS)

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Connector Identification and Wire Harness Routing

Connector Number of
or Cavities/ Location Connects to Notes
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Starter Cables
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
T1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T2
+
ÁÁÁÁÁ Right side of engine compartment
Battery
Starter motor
Battery positive terminal
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Battery Ground Cables
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
T3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine compartment Transmission housing
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G1 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery ground
cables
– Battery Battery negative terminal
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Engine Ground Cables
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T4
T5 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine compartment
Cylinder head cover
PSP switch bracket
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G2
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine ground
cables

203
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
G1
T1
STARTER CABLES
T2
T4
BATTERY
GROUND
CABLES
T3 T5 G2
ENGINE
GROUND
CABLES

203-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C101
ÁÁÁÁ
Engine Wire Harness (With ATTS)
4-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ Left side of engine compartment Alternator
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C102
C103
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
TDC/CKP sensor
No. 1 fuel injector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C104 2-BLK Middle of engine No. 2 fuel injector
C105 2-BLK Middle of engine compartment IAC valve
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C106
C107
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
No. 3 fuel injector
No. 4 fuel injector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C108 2-GRY Middle of engine compartment IAT sensor
C109 2-GRY Middle of engine compartment IAB control solenoid valve
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C110
C111
2-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
PSP switch
Knock sensor (KS)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C113 4-GRY Middle of engine Ignition coil
C114 3-GRY Middle of engine compartment TP sensor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C115
C116
2-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Radiator fan switch
MAP sensor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C117 14-GRY Middle of engine Junction connector
C122 3-GRY Middle of engine Vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C123
C124
1-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
VTEC solenoid valve
VTEC pressure switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C125 3-GRY Middle of engine EGR valve lift sensor
C126 1-BLK Middle of engine Back-up light switch (+)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C127
C128
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Back-up light switch (–)
Starter solenoid
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C129 2-GRY Middle of engine ECT sensor
C130 1-BLK Middle of engine Coolant temperature sending unit
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C131
C136
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
CYP sensor
Ignition control module (ICM)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C139 2-GRY Right side of engine compartment Main wire harness
C140 10-GRY Right side of engine compartment ECM wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C141
C142
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
14-BLU
ÁÁÁÁ
Right side of engine compartment
ECM wire harness
ECM wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C143 8-GRY Right side of engine compartment ECM wire harness
C144 14-BLU Right side of engine compartment ECM wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C145
C146
1
ÁÁÁÁ
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Engine oil pressure switch
ATTS sub-harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
T101 Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
T102 Left side of engine compartment Alternator
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
G101 Middle of engine Engine ground, via engine wire harness

203-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
G101
C141 C144 C107 C103

T101 C142 C113 C106
C116 C105
C115 C104 C108
C102
C140
ENGINE
WIRE
HARNESS
C143
C139
C122
C123
C124
C110
C130
C109
C111
C131
C145
T102
C126
C127 C128 C117 C101
C114 C146
C136 C129
C125

203-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C101
ÁÁÁÁ
Engine Wire Harness (Without ATTS)
4-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ Left side of engine compartment Alternator
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C102
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C103 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
TDC/CKP sensor
No. 1 fuel injector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C104 2-BLK Middle of engine No. 2 fuel injector
C105 2-BLK Middle of engine compartment IAC valve
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C106
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
No. 3 fuel injector
No. 4 fuel injector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C108 2-GRY Middle of engine compartment IAT sensor
C109 2-GRY Middle of engine compartment IAB control solenoid valve
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C110
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
PSP switch
Knock sensor (KS)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C113 4-GRY Middle of engine Ignition coil
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C114
ÁÁÁÁÁ
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
TP sensor
Radiator fan switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C116 3-GRY Middle of engine compartment MAP sensor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C118
ÁÁÁÁÁ
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
10-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
A/T gear position switch A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C120 2-BLK Middle of engine Countershaft speed sensor A/T
C121 1 Middle of engine Oil pressure switch A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C122
ÁÁÁÁÁ
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
1-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
VTEC solenoid valve
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C124 2-GRN Middle of engine VTEC pressure switch
C125 3-GRY Middle of engine EGR valve lift sensor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C126
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Back-up light switch (+)
Back-up light switch (–)
M/T
M/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C128 1-BLK Middle of engine Starter solenoid
C129 2-GRY Middle of engine ECT sensor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C130
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Coolant temperature sending unit
CYP sensor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C132 2-BLK Middle of engine A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
C133 2-BRN Middle of engine A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C134
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Mainshaft speed sensor
Lock-up control solenoid valve and
shift control solenoid valve A
A/T
A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C136
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Ignition control module (ICM)
Shift control solenoid valve B A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C138 2-BRN Middle of engine Shift control solenoid valve C A/T
C139 2-GRY Right side of engine compartment Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C140
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
ECM wire harness
ECM wire harness A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C142 14-BLU Right side of engine compartment ECM wire harness
C143 8-GRY Right side of engine compartment ECM wire harness M/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C143
ÁÁÁÁÁ
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
14-BLU
ÁÁÁÁ
ECM wire harness
ECM wire harness
A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
T101 Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
T102 Left side of engine compartment Alternator
T103 Middle of engine Engine oil pressure switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G101
ÁÁÁÁ
Middle of engine Engine ground, via engine wire harness
203-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
G101
C144
C142
C141 C106
C107
T101 C116 C112

C122 C113 C108 C103
C105
C121
C115 C104 C102
ENGINE
WIRE
C140 HARNESS
C143 C109
C139 C110
C123
C124
C125
C117
C126
C127 T103
C130
C111
C128
C118
C131
C135
C136 T102
C129 C120
C134 C101
C132 C119 C114
C137 C138
C133

203-5
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C301
ÁÁÁÁ
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ Under left side of dash Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C302
C303
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
7-BRN
ÁÁÁÁ
Under left side of dash
Main wire harness
Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C304 3-GRY Under left side of dash Security wire harness Optional
C305 1-NAT Under left side of dash Fog light system connector Optional
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C306
C307
20-BRN
ÁÁÁÁ
5-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Behind left kick panel
Left rear of engine compartment
Junction connector
Windshield wiper motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C308 6-BRN Left side of engine compartment Windshield wiper intermittent relay
C309 1-BLK Left side of engine compartment Brake fluid level switch (+)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C310
C311
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch (–)
EGR control solenoid valve
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C312 2-ORN Left side of engine compartment ABS left front wheel sensor
C313 2-ORN Left side of engine compartment ABS pump motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C314
C315
10-ORN
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRN
ÁÁÁÁ
Behind front bumper
ABS modulator unit wire harness
Windshield washer motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C316 2-BRN Behind front bumper Left front side marker light
C317 1-BLK Behind front bumper Fog light system connector Optional
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C318
C319
2-BRN
ÁÁÁÁ
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Behind front bumper
Left front turn signal light
Security alarm system Optional
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C320 4-GRN Left side of engine compartment Condenser fan relay
C321 4-BRN Left side of engine compartment A/C compressor clutch relay
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C322
C323
1-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
A/C compressor clutch
Condenser fan motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C324 2-BRN Behind left headlight Left front parking light
C325 3-BLK Behind left headlight Left headlight (high beam)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C326
3-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ Behind left headlight Left headlight (low beam)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G301
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
G302 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ABS Modulator Unit Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C314 10-ORN Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire harness
C382 10-ORN Left side of engine compartment ABS modulator unit
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Main Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C139
C251
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
11-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Engine wire harness
Under-hood fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C252 9-GRY Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C253 3-BRN Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
C254 7-BRN Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C255
C256
3-WHT
ÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
ELD unit
Intake control solenoid valve
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C257 2-ORN Right side of engine compartment ABS right front wheel sensor
C258 2-NAT Right side of engine compartment Test tachometer connector

203-6
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
C255 C253
ABS MODULATOR
C257 C254 UNIT WIRE HARNESS
C139
C258 C252
C251
C310
C309
C307
MAIN WIRE C301 C303
HARNESS
C302
C256
C304
C305
C306
C323 C308 LEFT ENGINE

COMPARTMENT
C311 WIRE HARNESS
C322
C312
C314 C313
C324 C382
C326 C320
C315
C325 C321
C316
C318 C319
C317
G301 G302

203-7
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C201
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness
12-GRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ Behind right kick panel Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C202
C203
3-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
3-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind right headlight
Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low beam)
Right headlight (high beam)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C204 2-BRN Behind right headlight Right front parking light
C205 2-BRN Behind front bumper Right front side marker light
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C206
C207
2-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind front bumper
Behind middle of front bumper
Right front turn signal light
Radiator fan motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C208 2-GRY Behind middle of front bumper A/C pressure switch
C209 2-GRY Behind middle of front bumper Right horn
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C210
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Behind middle of front bumper Left horn
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G201
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right engine
RIGHT ENGINE
C201
COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS
C210
G201 C209
C208
C207
C204
C202
C205
C203
C206

203-8
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C140
ÁÁÁÁ
ECM Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)
10-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C141
C141
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
Engine wire harness
Engine wire harness
ATTS
A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C142 14-BLU Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
C143 8-GRY Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness M/T, ATTS
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C143
C144
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
14-BLU
ÁÁÁÁ
Engine wire harness
Engine wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C287 4-GRY Right side of engine compartment Cruise control actuator
C288 2-BLK Right side of engine compartment EVAP bypass solenoid valve *3
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C289
C290
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁ
Fuel tank pressure sensor
EVAP control canister vent shut valve
*3
*2
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C290 2-BLK Right side of engine compartment EVAP control canister vent shut valve *4
C291 2-GRY Right side of engine compartment EVAP purge control solenoid valve *3
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C292
C293
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
4-BLU
ÁÁÁÁ
EVAP purge flow switch
Primary heated oxygen sensor (Primary
HO2S)
*1
ATTS
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C294
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁ
*1: ’97 (49ST, Canada) Model ÁÁÁÁ
Right side of engine compartment Secondary heated oxygen sensor
(Secondary HO2S)
*2: ’97 (California), ’98 Model

*3: ’97 (California), ’98-’01 Models
*4: ’99-’01 Models
C292
C289
C290
C291
C287 C288
C142
C143
C144
C141
(with
C140 ATTS)
C141
(A/T)
C293
ECM WIRE HARNESS
C294
203-9
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C454
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ECM Wire Harness (Dash Branch)
20-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Behind glove box Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C453
C453
22-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
6-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind glove box
Behind glove box
Main wire harness
Main wire harness
A/T, ATTS
M/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C471 2-BLK Behind glove box Diode A/T
C472 16-GRY Front passenger’s footwell ECM
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C473
C474
31-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
32-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Front passenger’s footwell
ECM
ECM
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C475 26-GRY Front passenger’s footwell TCM A/T
C475 26-BLU Front passenger’s footwell ATTS control unit
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C476
C476
22-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
22-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
TCM
ATTS control unit
A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C479 20-BLK Behind right side of dash Junction connector
C480 2-BLU Under middle of dash Service check connector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C481
C482
16-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
12-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Under middle of dash
Data link connector
Dashboard wire harness *1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C482 10-GRY Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness *2
C483 12-GRN Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C484
C485
6-WHT
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind center console
Shift lock relay
Shift lock solenoid sub-harness
A/T
A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C486 8-GRY Behind center console Mode switch A/T
C487 2-GRY Behind center console Ashtray light Optional
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C488
1-WHT
ÁÁÁÁÁ Behind center console Parking brake switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G471
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under middle of dash
*1: ’97-’98 Models (ATTS), ’99-’01 Models
*2: ’97-’98 Model (M/T, A/T)
Body ground, via ECM wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Shift Lock Solenoid Sub-harness (A/T)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C485
C499 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
2-GRY ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ECM wire harness
Shift lock solenoid

203-10
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
G471
ECM WIRE HARNESS
C482 C480 C453 C454

C483
C479
C481
C484
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID C471
SUB-HARNESS
(A/T)
C474
C485
C473
C475 C476 C472

C486
C499
C488
C487

203-11
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Main Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C301
ÁÁÁÁÁ
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C302
C303
14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
7-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left engine compartment wire harness
Left engine compartment wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C401 2-BRN Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
C402 16-GRY Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C403
C405
20-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
12
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Dashboard wire harness
Security system connector *1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C406 20-WHT Under left side of dash Junction connector
C407 2-GRY Under left side of dash Security system connector *2
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C407
C408
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
5-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Security system connector
Combination light switch
*3
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C409 4-GRY Under left side of dash Combination light switch
C410 6-GRY Under left side of dash Ignition key switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C411
C412
3-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Ignition switch
Front main steering angle sensor and
intermittent dwell time controller
ATTS
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C413
C414
4-WHT
ÁÁÁÁÁ
7-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Starter cut relay
PGM-FI main relay
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C415 2-GRN Under left side of dash Multplex control unit inspection
connector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C416 3-YEL Under left side of dash SRS main harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C417 3-GRY Above clutch pedal Clutch switch M/T
C418 2-YEL Above clutch pedal Clutch interlock switch M/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C419
C420
8-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
4-WHT
ÁÁÁÁÁ
On the steering column
Above brake pedal
Immobilizer control unit
Brake switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C421 14-BLU Under left side of dash Cruise control unit
C422 14 Under left side of dash Daytime running lights control unit Canada
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C426
C428
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Option connector
Multiplex control unit (driver’s)
*4
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C429 14-GRN Behind left kick panel Multiplex control unit (driver’s)
C430 25-GRN/GRY Under left side of dash Driver’s door wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C431
C432
14-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
14-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Under-dash fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C433 22-BLU Behind left kick panel Under-dash fuse/relay box
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C435
C436
3-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
5-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C439
C440
5-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
5-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Horn relay
Accessory socket relay
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C441 5-BLK Under left side of dash A/T reverse relay
C441 5-BLK Under left side of dash ATTS fail-safe relay
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C442
C443
5-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
5
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ABS fail-safe relay
Seat heater relay Canada
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C444 5-BLK Under left side of dash Door lock relay ’99-’01
Models
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G401
*1: Canada optional
ÁÁÁÁÁ
*2: ’97-’98 Models (USA optional)
Behind left kick panel Body ground, via main wire harness
*3: ’99-’01 Models (USA optional)

*4: ’97-’98 Models
203-12
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
C408
C414 C409 C410
C413
C407 C411
(’97-’98 C412
models)
C421
C406
C405
C422
C401
C402
C403
C303
C302
C426
(’97-’98 Models)
C416 C420
C415 C419
C407 C418 C417
(’99-’01 C429
Models) MAIN WIRE
C428 HARNESS
C430
C431 C432
C434
C433
C437
G401
C435
C438
C436
C439
C443
C440
C441
C444 C442
(’99-’01
Models)

203-13
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Main Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C201
ÁÁÁÁÁ
12-GRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under right side of dash Right engine compartment wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C451
C452
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Lateral acceleration (Lg) sensor
Diode
ATTS
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C453 22-GRY Under middle of dash ECM wire harness *1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C454
C456
20-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
20-ORN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Under right side of dash
ECM wire harness
Junction connector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C457 14-BLU Behind right kick panel Multiplex control unit (passenger’s)
C458 20-BLU Behind right kick panel Multiplex control unit (passenger’s)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C459
C460
22-ORN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
12-ORN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind right kick panel
ABS control unit
ABS control unit
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C461 12-GRY Behind right kick panel Right side wire harness *3
C461 8-GRY Behind right kick panel Right side wire harness *4
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C462
C463
22-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
6-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Right side wire harness
Roof wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C464 25-GRN/GRY Under right side of dash Passenger’s door wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G402 Under right side of dash Body ground, via main wire harness
G403 Under right side of dash Body ground, via main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G404
*1: A/T, ATTS
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under right side of dash
*3: USA Type SH, Canada
Body ground, via main wire harness
*2: M/T *4: USA without ATTS
C452 C454 C453 C463

C451
C201
C456
C464
C457
C458
C460
C459
C462
G403
G402
G404

203-14
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C461
Right Side Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
12-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind right kick panel Main wire harness *1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C461
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8-GRY
22-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Main wire harness
Main wire harness
*2
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C503 3 Under front passenger’s seat Passenger’s seat heater Canada
C504 1-WHT Left quarter panel Driver’s door switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C505
ÁÁÁÁÁ
3
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY/BRN
Under driver’s seat
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Under driver’s seat
Driver’s seat heater
Driver’s seat belt switch
Canada
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C507 1-WHT Right quarter panel Passenger’s door switch
C508 2-BRN Middle of fuel tank Fuel pump (FP)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C509
ÁÁÁÁÁ
3-BRN
4-BLU
Middle of fuel tank
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left side of trunk
Fuel gauge sending unit
Yaw rate sensor ATTS*4
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C510 4-BLU Left side of trunk Yaw rate sensor ATTS *5
C511 2-GRY Middle front of trunk Trunk light
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C512
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
4-GRY
Middle of trunk lid
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left side of rear shelf
High mount brake light
Left rear speaker
*3
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C514 1-BRN Middle front of trunk Rear window defogger coil
C515 18-GRY Left side of rear shelf Stereo amplifier
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C516
ÁÁÁÁÁ
4-GRY
10-GRY
Left side of rear shelf
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Under rear shelf
Right rear speaker
Rear wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C518 8-GRY Left quarter panel Keyless receiver unit ’99-’01
Models
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G501
*1: USA Type SH, Canada
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Right side of floor
*2: USA without ATTS *3: Except Type SH
Body ground, via right side wire harness
*4: ’97 Model *5: ’98-’01 Models
G501
C506
C503
C504 C505
C462
C518
C513
C512 C461
C510
C507
C508
C515
C509
C517
C511 C516
C514 2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
203-15
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Dashboard Wire Harness
C401
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under left side of dash Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C402
C403
16-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
20-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Main wire harness
Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C483
C551
12-GRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
16-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ECM wire harness
A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C552 6-GRN Under left side of dash Cruise control main switch
C553 5-BLU Under left side of dash Moonroof switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C554
C559
6-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
20-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind gauges
Dash lights brightness controller
Junction connector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C560 12-GRY Behind gauges Gauge assembly
C561 16-BLU Behind gauges Gauge assembly
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C562
C563
16-GRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
13-BLU
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind gauges
Behind gauges
Gauge assembly
Gauge assembly
A/T
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C564 6-BLU Behind middle of dash Hazard warning switch
C565 4-GRY Behind middle of dash Clock
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C566
16-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Behind audio unit Audio unit ’97-’98
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Models
C566 20-BLU Behind audio unit Audio unit ’99-’01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C569
C570
8-GRY
2-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Heater-sub harness
Heater-sub harness
Models
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C571
C572
1-NAT
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1-NAT
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Accessory socket (+)
Accessory socket (–)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G551
ÁÁÁÁÁ
*1: ’97-’98 Models (ATTS), ’99-’01 Models

Body ground, via dashboard wire
harness
*2: ’97-’98 Models (M/T, A/T)

203-16
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS
C403 C402 C401 C559 C562 C563
C564
C565
C566
C569
C552
C553
C554
C570
C483
C482
C571
C551 C561 C572
C560
G551

203-17
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Rear Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C517
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under rear shelf Right side wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C602
C603
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Right side of trunk lid
Middle rear of trunk lid
Spoiler sub-harness
Trunk latch switch
*1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C604 6-GRY Right rear of trunk Right taillight
C605 2-GRY Behind rear bumper License plate light
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C606
C607
6-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
6-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left rear of trunk
Left rear of trunk
Trailer lighting connector
Left taillight
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C608 2-ORN Right side of trunk ABS right rear wheel sensor
C609 2-ORN Left side of trunk ABS left rear wheel sensor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G601
*1: Type SH
ÁÁÁÁÁ Left side of trunk Body ground, via rear wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Spoiler Sub-harness (Type SH)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C602
C632
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left side of trunk
Built into rear spoiler
Rear wire harness
High mount brake light (+)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C633 1-BLK Built into rear spoiler High mount brake light (–)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Rear Window Defogger Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C931
C932
C933
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-BRN
1-BLK
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left C-pillar
Middle front of trunk
Right C-pillar
Rear window defogger (+)
Rear window defogger coil
Rear window defogger (–)

203-18
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
WIRE HARNESS
C931
C932
C609
C632
C633 C933
C607
C606
REAR WIRE
HARNESS
SPOILER
SUB-HARNESS C517
C603
C605 C608
C602
C604
G601

203-19
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Driver’s Door Wire Harness
C430
ÁÁÁÁÁ
25-GRN/GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Driver’s door Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C652
C653
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Driver’s door
Driver’s door
Driver’s door speaker
Driver’s window motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C654 6-GRY Driver’s door Driver’s door lock actuator
C655 2-GRY Driver’s door Driver’s door courtesy light Type SH
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C656
C657
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Driver’s door
Driver’s door
Driver’s door key cylinder switch
Left power mirror actuator USA
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C657 6-GRY Driver’s door Left power mirror actuator and Canada
defogger
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C658 2-GRY Driver’s door Left tweeter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C659 3-GRY Driver’s door Driver’s door lock switch
C660 20-BLU Driver’s door Multiplex control unit (door)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C661
C662
10-GRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Driver’s door
Driver’s door
Power mirror switch
Power mirror switch Canada
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C663 6 Driver’s door Driver’s seat heater switch Canada
C659
C662 C657
C661
DRIVER’S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
C658
C430
C656
C650
C655 C654 C653 C663 C652

203-20
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C464
Passenger’s Door Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ

25-GRN/GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁPassenger’s door Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C682
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-GRY
2-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Passenger’s door
Passenger’s door
Passenger’s door speaker
Passenger’s window motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C684 2-GRY Passenger’s door Passenger’s door lock actuator
C685 2-GRY Passenger’s door Passenger’s door courtesy light Type SH
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C686
ÁÁÁÁÁ
3-GRY
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Passenger’s door
Passenger’s door
Passenger’s door key cylinder switch
Right power mirror actuator USA
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C687 6-GRY Passenger’s door Right power mirror actuator and Canada
defogger
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C688 2-GRY Passenger’s door Right tweeter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C689 3-GRY Passenger’s door Passenger’s door lock switch
C690 5-NAT Passenger’s door Passenger’s window switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C691
6
ÁÁÁÁÁPassenger’s door Passenger’s seat heater switch Canada
C687
C688 C689
C464 C690
C686
C682 C691 C683 C684 C685
PASSENGER’S DOOR WIRE HARNESS

203-21
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Roof Wire Harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C463
ÁÁÁÁÁ
6-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under right side of dash Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C702
4-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Front of roof Ceiling light/spotlight
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C703 2-BLU/BRN Rear of roof Moonroof motor
C703
C702
ROOF WIRE HARNESS
C463

203-22
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C416
SRS Main Wire Harness

3-YEL
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Under left side of dash Main wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C801
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-YEL
2-YEL
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Memory erase signal (MES)
connector
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C804
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2-YEL
18-YEL
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Middle of floor
Cable reel
SRS unit
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C806 2-YEL Behind glove box Front passenger’s airbag assembly
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G801 Middle of floor Body ground, via SRS main harness
C416 C804 SRS MAIN HARNESS
C806
C805
C803
C801
G801

203-23
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Heater Sub-harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C569
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C570
C901
2-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10-GRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Behind left side of center console
Dashboard wire harness
Mode control motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C904 22-GRN Behind heater control panel Heater control panel
C905 6-BRN Behind heater control panel Heater fan switch
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C906
C907
3-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
5-BRN
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A/C thermostat
Blower resistor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C908 5-GRN Behind glove box Recirculation control motor
C909 2-BRN Behind glove box Blower motor
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
G901
ÁÁÁÁÁ Under right side of dash Body ground, via heater-sub harness
HEATER SUB-HARNESS
C907 C908
C906
C909 C901
C901 C905 C570

C904 C569

203-24
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
+ –

Connector Number of
Terminal Color
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C146
ATTS Sub-harness (Type SH)

14-GRY
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C352
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C353
3-GRY
2-GRN ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left oil pressure sensor
Left solenoid
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C354 3 Left side of engine compartment Right oil pressure sensor
C355 2 Left side of engine compartment Right solenoid
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C356
2
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Left side of engine compartment Linear solenoid
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C357 2 Left side of engine compartment Oil temperature sensor
C357 C355 C356
ATTS
SUB-HARNESS
C354
C353 C146
C352

203-25
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
Engine/Powertrain Control Module Terminal Arrangement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
wire side of female terminals
ECM Connector A (32P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.

Terminal
Wire color Terminal name Description Signal
number
1 YEL INJ4 (No. 4 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No. 4 fuel injector. With engine running: duty controlled
2 BLU INJ3 (No. 3 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No. 3 fuel injector. With engine running: duty controlled
3 RED INJ2 (No. 2 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 fuel injector. With engine running: duty controlled
4 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No. 1 fuel injector. With engine running: duty controlled
SO2SHTC (SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Drives secondary heated oxygen With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
5 ORN/BLU
sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: 0 V
HEATER CONTROL
PO2SHTC (PRIMARY
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Drives primary heated oxygen With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
6 BLK/WHT
sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: 0 V
HEATER CONTROL
With EGR operating during driving with fully
ESOL (EGR CONTROL Drives EGR control solenoid warmed up engine: duty controlled
7 ORN
SOLENOID VALVE) valve.
With EGR not operating: battery voltage
VTS (VTEC SOLENOID With engine at low rpm: 0 V
8 GRN/YEL Drives VTEC solenoid valve.
VALVE) With engine at high rpm: battery voltage
Ground for the ECM control
9 BRN/BLK LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit.
Ground for the ECM power
10 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit.
Power source for the ECM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
11 YEL/BLK IPG1 (POWER SOURCE)
control circuit. With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
IACV (IDLE AIR CONTROL
12 BLK/BLU Drives IACV. With engine running: duty controlled
VALVE)
With engine running, engine coolant below
PCS (EVAP PURGE
Drives EVAP purge control 167F (75C) [122F (50C)]*1: battery voltage
15 RED/YEL CONTROL SOLENOID
solenoid valve. With engine running, engine coolant above
VALVE)
167F (75C) [122F (50C)]*1: 0 V
0 V for two seconds after turning ignition switch
16 GRN/ORN FLR (FUEL PUMP RELAY) Drives fuel pump relay.
ON (II), then battery voltage
With compressor ON: 0 V
17 PNK/BLU ACC (A/C CLUTCH RELAY) Drives A/C clutch relay.
With compressor OFF: battery voltage
MIL (MALFUNCTION With MIL turned ON: 0 V
18 GRY/RED Drives MIL.
INDICATOR LAMP) With MIL turned OFF: battery voltage
With fully warmed up engine running: battery
ALTC (ALTERNATOR voltage
19 WHT/GRN Sends alternator control signals.
CONTROL)
During driving with small electrical load: 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
ICM (IGNITION CONTROL With engine running: about 10 V (depending on
20 YEL/GRN Sends ignition pulse.
MODULE)
engine speed)
*1: ’98-99 models, ’97 California model

205
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ECM Connector A (32P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.

Terminal
number
LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground for the ECM control Less than 1.0 V at all times
22 BRN/BLK
circuit.
PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground for the ECM power Less than 1.0 V at all times
23 BLK
circuit.
IGP2 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the ECM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
24 YEL/BLK
control circuit. With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
ICSOL (INTAKE CONTROL Drives intake control solenoid With engine running, engine speed above 3,000
SOLENOID VALVE) valve. rpm: 0 V
25 WHT
With engine running, engine speed below 3,000
rpm: battery voltage
IABSOL (INTAKE AIR Drives IAB control solenoid With engine running, engine speed below 4,900
BYPASS CONTROL valve. rpm: battery voltage
26 RED/BLU
SOLENOID VALVE) With engine running, engine speed above 4,900
rpm: 0 V
FANC (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay. With radiator fan running: 0 V
27 GRN
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
2WBS (EVAP BYPASS Drives EVAP bypass solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
28*1 GRN/WHT
SOLENOID VALVE) valve.
VSV (EVAP CONTROL Drives EVAP control canister With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
29*1 ORN/GRN CANISTER VENT SHUT vent shut valve.
VALVE)

205-1
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
ECM Connector C (31P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.

Terminal
number
LT GRN/ VREF (REFERENCE Provides reference voltage to With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
1
BLK VOLTAGE) TCM or ATTS control unit. With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
2 BLU CKPP (CKP SENSOR SIDE) Detects CKP sensor. With engine running: pulses
3 GRN TDCP (TDC SENSOR SIDE) Detects TDC sensor. With engine running: pulses
4 YEL CYPP (CYP SENSOR SIDE) Detects CYP sensor. With engine running: pulses
ACS (A/C SWITCH SIGNAL) Detects A/C switch signal. With A/C switch ON: 0 V
5 BLU/ORN
With A/C switch OFF: battery voltage
STS (STARTER SWITCH Detects starter switch signal. With starter switch ON (II): battery voltage
6 BLU/RED
SIGNAL) With starter switch OFF: 0 V
SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check connector With the connector connected: 0 V
7 RED/WHT SIGNAL) signal (the signal causing a DTC With the connector disconnected: 5 V or battery
indication). voltage
K-LINE Sends and receives scan tool With ignition switch ON (II): about 5
8 LT GRN
signal.
VBU (VOLTAGE BACK UP) Power source for the ECM Battery voltage at all times
10 WHT/YEL control circuit. Power source for
the DTC memory.
CKPM (CKP SENSOR M Ground for CKP sensor signal.
12 WHT
SIDE)
TDCM (TDC SENSOR M Grouind for TDC sensor signal.
13 RED
SIDE)
CYPM (CKP SENSOR M Ground for CYP sensor signal.
14 BLK
SIDE)
VTM (VTEC PRESSURE Detects VTEC pressure switch With engine at low engine speed: 0 V
15 BLU/BLK SWITCH) signal. With engine at high engine speed: battery
voltage
PSPSW (P/S PRESSURE Detects PSP switch signal. At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead
SWITCH) position: 0 V
16 GRN
At idle with steering wheel at full lock: battery
voltage
ALTLF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal. With fully warmed up engine running: 0 V –
17 WHT/GRN
SIGNAL) battery voltage (depending on electrical load)
VSS (VEHICLE SPEED Detects VSS signal. With ignition switch ON (II) and front wheels
18 BLU/WHT
SENSOR) rotating: cycles 0 V – 5 V
PSFW (EVAP PURGE FLOW Detects EVAP purge flow switch Purge flowing: 0 V
20*2 BRN
SWITCH) signal. Purge not flowing: about 5 V
IMO CODE (IMMOBILIZER Detects immobilizer signal.
22 BRN/YEL
CODE)

*2: ’97 (49ST, Canada model)
*3: With ATTS
*4: A/T

205-2
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
ECM Connector C (31P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.

Terminal
number
ATPNP (A/T GEAR POSITION Detects A/T gear position switch In N or P position: 0 V
29 LT GRN
SWITCH) signal. In any other position: battery voltage
Data communication with TCM:
30*4 GRN/BLU SEAF With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
ECM control data input.
Data communication with ATTS
30*3 GRN/BLU FITX control unit: ECM control data With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
input.
Data communication with TCM:
31*4 GRN/YEL SEFA With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
ECM control data output.
Data communication with ATTS
31*3 GRN/YEL FIRX With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
control unit: control data output.

*2: ’97 (49ST, Canada model)
*3: With ATTS
*4: A/T

205-3
s
Menu Circuit Index

s
t
Menu Circuit Index
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
ECM Connector D (16P) NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.

Terminal
number
TPS (THROTTLE POSITION Detects TP sensor signal. With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
1 RED/BLK
SENSOR) With throttle fully closed: about 0.5 V
ECT (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 – 4.8 V
2 RED/WHT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE Detects MAP sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 3 V
3 RED/GRN PRESSURE SENSOR) At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine
speed)
VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Power source for MAP sensor. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
4 YEL/RED
With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
BKSW (BRAKE SWITCH) Detects brake switch signal. With brake pedal released: 0 V
5 WHT/BLK
With brake pedal depressed: battery voltage
6 RED/BLU KS (KNOCKSENSOR) Detects KS signal. With engine knocking: pulses
PHO2S (PRIMARY HEATED Detects primary heated oxygen With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
7 WHT OXYGEN SENSOR, sensor (sensor 1) signal. warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
SENSOR 1 With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 – 4.8 V
8 RED/YEL
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (depending on intake air temperature)
EGRL (EGR VALVE LIFT Detects EGR valve lift sensor At idle without vacuum: about 1.2 V
9 WHT/BLK
SENSOR) signal. With 27 kPa (200 mmHg, 8 in. Hg): about 4.3 V
VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
10 YEL/BLU
With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
11 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground. Less than 1.0 V at all times
12 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Ground for MAP sensor. Less than 1.0 V at all times
SHO2S (SECONDARY Detects secondary heated With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
14 WHT/RED HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR, oxygen sensor (sensor 2 ) warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
SENSOR 2) signal. With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
PTANK (FUEL TANK Detects fuel tank pressure With fuel fill cap opened: about 2.5 V
15*1 WHT/BLU
PRESSURE SENSOR) sensor signal.
EL (ELD) Detects ELD signal. With parking lights turned on at idle: about 2.5 –
3.5 V
16 GRN/RED
With low beam headlights turned on at idle:
about 1.5 – 2.5 V

205-4
s
Menu Circuit Index

1997 2001 Prelude Electrical Troubleshooting Manua

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1997 2001 Prelude Electrical Troubleshooting Manua

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1997 2001 Prelude Electrical Troubleshooting Manua

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What components are discussed in the document?

What components are discussed in the document?

What information is provided about the different connectors?

What information is provided about the different connectors?

Menu

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

How to Read Schematics Fuse/Relay Information

Symbol Definitions Ground-to-Components

How to Troubleshoot In-Line Connector Views

Request for Correction Component Connector Views

How to Identify Terminal Numbers

Wire Harness Routing Index

2001 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Connector Identification and Wire Harness Routing Index

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Wire Side Terminal Side

1999 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY

38 RADIATOR FAN RELAY

T1 T101 HEADLIGHT RELAY

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

   !  

  

    

SRS FUSE BLOCK

E2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

    

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

R/C MIRROR ABS system, Mirror defoggers (Canada), Power mirrors,

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

NOTE: All ground wires are BLK unless otherwise noted.

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

FUSE 32 FUSE 31 FUSE 38 FUSE 39 FUSE 40 FUSE 41 FUSE 49

FUSE 34 FUSE 35 FUSE 42 FUSE 43 FUSE 44 FUSE 45 FUSE 46 FUSE 47

See Power Distribution, See Power Distribution,

FUSE 36 FUSE 37 HEADLIGHT

FUSE 3 FUSE 1 FUSE 4 FUSE 6 FUSE 5 FUSE 7 FUSE 8

BLK T3 C981 (Not

Menu Circuit Index

2 1 C976 SRS FUSE BLOCK

UNDER- FUSE 23 FUSE 24

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

Early Production All except Early

FUSE 2 FUSE 4 FUSE 1 FUSE 6

3 C551 19 C433 5 10 C432 2 C431

BLU/RED BLU/RED WHT/GRN WHT/ WHT/

BLU/RED BLU/ BLU/ WHT/ WHT/

ENGINE STARTER PGM-FI MAIN IMMOBILIZER ATTS SEAT

2000 American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Menu Circuit Index

HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT IN ACC OR ON

!